OWNER'S MANUAL
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications
All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication.
However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time so that
our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.
This manual applies to all Hyundai models and includes descriptions and
explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you
may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehi-
cle.
F2
Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the per-
formance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited
warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations estab-
lished by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal or state agencies.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible
for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic
systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instruc-
tions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose
to install one of these devices.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
F3
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
These titles indicate the following:
✽✽
NOTICE
This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
WARNING
This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other
persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.
CAUTION
This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the
caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.
F4
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who drive
Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of which we're very
proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you read it care-
fully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.
The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundai deal-
er. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.
HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA
Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leave the man-
ual in the vehicle for their use.Thank you.
Copyright 2011 Hyundai Motor America. All rights reserved.No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval
system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor America.
CAUTION
Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet Hyundai
specifications.You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 8-4 in the
Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.
F5
Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts
1.What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?
Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same
parts used by Hyundai Motor
Company to manufacture vehicles.
They are designed and tested for the
optimum safety, performance, and reli-
ability to our customers.
2.Why should you use genuine parts?
Hyundai Genuine Parts are engi-
neered and built to meet rigid manu-
facturing requirements. Using imita-
tion, counterfeit or used salvage parts
is not covered under the Hyundai New
Vehicle Limited Warranty or any other
Hyundai warranty.
In addition, any damage to or failure of
Hyundai Genuine Parts caused by the
installation or failure of an imitation,
counterfeit or used salvage part is not
covered by any Hyundai Warranty.
3. How can you tell if you are purchas-
ing Hyundai Genuine Parts?
Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts
Logo on the package (see below).
Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to
are packaged with labels written only
in English.
Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold
through authorized Hyundai
Dealerships.
A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L
A100A03L
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Introduction
Your vehicle at a glance
Safety features of your vehicle
Features of your vehicle
Driving your vehicle
What to do in an emergency
Maintenance
Specifications, Consumer information,
Reporting safety defects
Index
table of contents
1
How to use this manual / 1-2
Fuel requirements / 1-3
Vehicle handling instructions / 1-5
Vehicle break-in process / 1-5
Vehicle data collection and event data
recorders / 1-6
Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster / 1-7
Introduction
Introduction
21
A010000AUN
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your vehi-
cle.Your Owner’s Manual can assist you
in many ways. We strongly recommend
that you read the entire manual. In order
to minimize the chance of death or injury,
you must read the WARNING and CAU-
TION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words in this
manual to best explain how to enjoy your
vehicle. By reading your manual, you will
learn about features, important safety
information, and driving tips under vari-
ous road conditions.
The general layout of the manual is pro-
vided in the Table of Contents. A good
place to start is the index;it has an alpha-
betical listing of all information in your
manual.
Sections:This manual has eight sections
plus an index.Each section begins with a
brief list of contents so you can tell at a
glance if that section has the information
you want.
You will find various WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs, and NOTICEs in this manu-
al. These WARNINGs were prepared to
enhance your personal safety.You should
carefully read and follow ALL procedures
and recommendations provided in these
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS and NOTICES.
✽✽
NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or help-
ful information is being provided.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which harm, serious bodily injury or
death could result if the warning is
ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which damage to your vehicle could
result if the caution is ignored.
13
Introduction
A020101BEN-EU
Your new vehicle is designed to use only
unleaded fuel having a pump octane
number ((R+M)/2) of 87 or higher.
Your new vehicle is designed to obtain
maximum performance with UNLEADED
FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emis-
sions and spark plug fouling.
A020103AUN-EU
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alcohol),
and gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol (also known as wood alcohol)
are being marketed along with or instead
of leaded or unleaded gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or
gasohol containing any methanol. Either
of these fuels may cause drivability prob-
lems and damage to the fuel system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if
drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or drivability problems
may not be covered by the manufactur-
er’s warranty if they result from the use
of:
1. Gasohol containing more than 10%
ethanol.
2.Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
CAUTION
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified. (Consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
details.)
WARNING
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refueling.
• Tighten the cap until it clicks one
time, otherwise the Check Engine
light will illuminate.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an acci-
dent.
Introduction
41
"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-
prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15 per-
cent gasoline, and is manufactured
exclusively for use in Flexible Fuel
Vehicles. “E85” is not compatible with
your vehicle. Use of “E85” may result in
poor engine performance and damage to
your vehicle's engine and fuel system.
HYUNDAI recommends that customers
do not use fuel with an ethanol content
exceeding 10 percent.
A020105AUN
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood alco-
hol) should not be used in your vehicle.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per-
formance and damage components of
the fuel system.
Fuel Additives
HYUNDAI recommends that you use
good quality gasolines treated with deter-
gent additives such as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline, which help prevent
deposit formation in the engine. These
gasolines will help the engine run clean-
er and enhance performance of the
Emission Control System.For more infor-
mation on TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline, please go to the website
(www
.toptiergas.com).
For customers who do not use TOP Tier
Detergent Gasoline regularly, and have
problems starting or the engine does not
run smoothly, additives that you can buy
separately may be added to the gasoline.
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not
available, one bottle of additive added to
the fuel tank at every 7,500mile or every
engine oil change is recommended.
Additives are available from your author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer along with infor-
mation on how to use them. Do not mix
other additives.
A020107AUN
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle in
another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding reg-
istration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is avail-
able.
CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
may not cover damage to the fuel
system and any performance prob-
lems that are caused by the use of
fuels containing methanol.
CAUTION
Never use gasohol which contains
methanol. Discontinue use of any
gasohol product which impairs dri-
vability.
CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
does not cover damage to the fuel
system or any performance prob-
lems caused by the use of “E85”fuel.
15
Introduction
A090000AEN
As with other vehicles of this type, failure
to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control, an accident or
vehicle rollover.
Specific design characteristics (higher
ground clearance, track, etc.) give this
vehicle a higher center of gravity than
other types of vehicles. It is not designed
for cornering at the same speeds as a
conventional 2-wheel drive sedans or
sports coupe.Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. Again, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of
control, an accident or vehicle rollover.
Be sure to read the “Reducing the risk
of a rollover” driving guidelines, in
section 5 of this manual.
A030000AUN
No special break-in period is needed. By
following a few simple precautions for the
first 600 miles (1,000 km) you may add to
the performance, economy and life of
your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine speed
(rpm, or revolutions per minute)
between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for long
periods of time, either fast or slow.
Varying engine speed is needed to
properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergen-
cies, to allow the brakes to seat prop-
erly.
• Don't let the engine idle longer than 3
minutes at one time.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200
miles (2,000 km) of operation.
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESSVEHICLE HANDLING
INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction
61
A040000AFD
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder (EDR). The main pur-
pose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hit-
ting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehi-
cle's systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehi-
cle is designed to record such data
as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and pas-
senger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and / or
brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances
in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your
vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situa-
tion occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g.,
name, gender, age, and crash loca-
tion) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR,spe-
cial equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufactur-
er, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS
17
Introduction
INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Seat belt warning light
High beam indicator
Turn signal indicator
ABS warning light
Parking brake & Brake fluid
warning light
Engine oil pressure warning
light
AWD system warning light
(if equipped)
AWD LOCK indicator
(if equipped)
ESC indicator
ESC OFF indicator
Malfunction indicator
Air bag warning light
Cruise indicator
Cruise SET indicator
Immobilizer indicator
(if equipped)
Low fuel level warning light
* For more detailed explanations, refer to “Instrument cluster” in section 4.
Charging system warning light
Shift pattern indicator
Low windshield washer fluid
level warning light (if equipped)
A050000BEN-EU
Door and tailgate ajar warning
light
Key out indicator (if equipped)
KEY
OUT
AWD
LOCK
AIR
BAG
ESC
ESC
OFF
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System) malfunction indicator
Low tire pressure telltale
2
Interior overview / 2-2
Instrument panel overview / 2-3
Engine compartment / 2-4
Your vehicle at a glance
Your vehicle at a glance
22
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Door lock/unlock button ....................4-16
2. Driver position memory system
button*...............................................4-38
3. Outside rearview mirror control
switch................................................4-49
4. Central door lock switch....................4-16
5. Power window lock button ................4-29
6. Power window switches....................4-26
7. Air vent..............................................4-85
8. Front fog light switch*........................4-73
9. Instrument panel illumination control
knob..................................................4-52
10. ESC OFF button.............................5-26
11. Power adjustable pedal control
switch* ............................................4-39
12. AWD LOCK button* ........................5-16
13. AC inverter switch*........................4-115
14. Power tailgate main control button*4-21
15. Steering wheel power tilt control*...4-41
16. Steering wheel................................4-40
17. Fuse box.........................................7-44
18. Hood release lever..........................4-30
19. Parking brake pedal........................5-22
20. Brake pedal.....................................5-21
21. Accelerator pedal..............................5-6
22. Seat...................................................3-2
* : if equipped
B010000AEN-EU
OEN006001N
23
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1. Instrument cluster.............................4-51
2. Steering wheel audio controls* ......4-121
3. Light control / Turn signals ...............4-72
4. Horn .................................................4-41
5. Auto cruise controls..........................5-31
6.Wiper/Washer...................................4-74
7. Driver’s front air bag.........................3-52
8. Ignition switch.....................................5-4
9. Digital clock and thermometer .......4-117
10. Audio ............................................4-121
11. Hazard warning flasher
switch.....................................4-69 / 6-2
12. Climate control system*.......4-84 / 4-96
13. Parking brake pedal.......................5-22
14. Brake pedal....................................5-21
15. Accelerator pedal.............................5-6
16. Shift lever .........................................5-8
17. Seat warmer* ...................................3-8
18. Passenger’s front air bag...............3-52
19. Glove box.....................................4-109
* : if equipped
OEN006002N
B020000AEN-EE
Your vehicle at a glance
42
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-16
2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-14
3. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-18
4. Air cleaner.........................................7-21
5. Fuse box...........................................7-45
6. Negative battery terminal..................7-27
7. Positive battery terminal ...................7-27
8. Radiator cap .....................................7-17
9. Engine oil dipstick.............................7-14
10. Power steering fluid reservoir.........7-19
11.Windshield washer fluid reservoir...7-20
OEN078059
B030000AEN-EU
* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
3
Seats / 3-2
Seat belts / 3-21
Child restraint system / 3-33
Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system / 3-41
Safety features of your vehicle
Safety features of your vehicle
23
C010000AEN-EE
Front seat
(1) Forward and backward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height (Driver’s seat)*
(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)*
(5) Seat warmer*
(6) Headrest
2nd row seat
(7) Forward and backward
(8) Seatback angle
(9) Walk-in seat
(10) Headrest
(11) Armrest
(12) Seat warmer*
3rd row seat
(13) Seatback angle
(14) Headrest
*: if equipped
SEATS
OEN032052N
Manual seat
Power seat
33
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust the seat
while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control,
and an accident causing death,
serious injury, or property dam-
age.
• Do not allow anything to interfere
with the normal position of the
seatback. Storing items against a
seatback or in any other way
interfering with proper locking of
a seatback could result in serious
or fatal injury in a sudden stop or
collision.
• Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap por-
tion of the seat belt snug and low
across the hips. This is the best
position to protect you in case of
an accident.
• In order to avoid unnecessary
and perhaps severe air bag
injuries, always sit as far back as
possible from the steering wheel
while maintaining comfortable
control of the vehicle. We recom-
mend that your chest be at least
10 inches (250 mm) away from
the steering wheel.
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
When you return the seatback to its
upright position, hold the seatback
and return it slowly and be sure
there are no other occupants
around the seat. If the seatback is
returned without being held and
controlled, the back of the seat
could spring forward resulting in
accidental injury to a person struck
by the seatback.
WARNING - Loose objects
Loose objects in the driver’s foot
area could interfere with the opera-
tion of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident. Do not place
anything under the front seats.
WARNING - Driver respon-
sibility for passengers
Riding in a vehicle with the seat-
back reclined could lead to serious
or fatal injury in an accident. If a
seat is reclined during an accident,
the occupant’s hips may slide
under the lap portion of the seat
belt applying great force to the
unprotected abdomen. Serious or
fatal internal injuries could result.
The driver must advise the passen-
ger to keep the seatback in an
upright position whenever the vehi-
cle is in motion.
WARNING
Do not use a sitting cushion that
reduces friction between the seat
and passenger. The passenger's
hips may slide under the lap por-
tion of the seat belt during an acci-
dent or a sudden stop. Serious or
fatal internal injuries could result
because the seat belt can't operate
normally.
Safety features of your vehicle
43
(Continued)
• To avoid the possibility of burns
from a hot rear floor surface, do
not remove the carpet in the
cargo area. Emission control
devices beneath this floor gener-
ate high temperatures.
WARNING - Rear seat-
backs (2nd and 3rd row)
• The rear seatback must be
securely latched. If not, passen-
gers and objects could be thrown
forward resulting in serious
injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop or collision.
• Luggage and other cargo should
be laid flat in the cargo area. If
objects are large, heavy, or must
be piled, they must be secured.
Under no circumstances should
cargo be piled higher than the
seatbacks. Failure to follow these
warnings could result in serious
injury or death in the event of a
sudden stop, collision or rollover.
• No passenger should ride in the
cargo area or sit or lie on folded
seatbacks while the vehicle is
moving. All passengers must be
properly seated in seats and
restrained properly while riding.
• When resetting the seatback to
the upright position, make sure it
is securely latched by pushing it
forward and rearward.
(Continued)
WARNING
After adjusting the seat, always
check that it is securely locked into
place by attempting to move the
seat forward or rearward without
using the lock release lever.
Sudden or unexpected movement
of the driver's seat could cause you
to lose control of the vehicle result-
ing in an accident.
WARNING
• Do not adjust the seat while wear-
ing seat belts. Moving the seat
cushion forward may cause
strong pressure on the abdomen.
• Use extreme caution so that
hands or other objects are not
caught in the seat mechanisms
while the seat is moving.
• Do not put a cigarette lighter on
the floor or seat. When you oper-
ate the seat, gas may gush out of
the lighter and cause fire.
WARNING
The 3rd row seat is designed for
ONLY 2 passengers. Seat belts and
head rests are not available for more
than two passengers. In the case of
an accident, an unrestrained pas-
senger could be seriously injured or
killed. All passengers must be prop-
erly seated in seats and restrained
properly while riding.
35
Safety features of your vehicle
Front seat adjustment - manual
C010101AUN
Forward and rearward
To move the seat forward or rearward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever
under the front edge of the seat cush-
ion up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and make
sure the seat is locked securely by trying
to move forward and rearward without
using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.
C010102AUN
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on the
seatback recline lever located on the
outside of the seat at the rear.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat and
adjust the seatback of the seat to the
position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seatback is locked in place. (The lever
MUST return to its original position for
the seatback to lock.)
C010103AUN
Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat)
To change the height of the seat cushion,
push the lever that is located on the out-
side of the seat cushion upwards or
downwards.
• To lower the seat cushion, push the
lever down several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, pull the lever
up several times.
OEN036013OEN036012OEN036011
Safety features of your vehicle
63
C010104BEN
Headrest
The driver's and front passenger's seats
are equipped with a headrest for the
occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort
for the driver and front passenger, but
also helps to protect the head and neck
in the event of a collision.
Forward and backward adjustment
The headrest may be adjusted forward to
3 different positions by pulling the head-
rest forward to the desired detent. To
adjust the headrest to it’s furthest back-
wards position, pull it fully forward to the
farthest position and release it.Adjust the
headrest so that it properly supports the
head and neck.
OEN036007
WARNING
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the headrest
should be adjusted so the middle
of the headrest is at the same
height of the center of gravity of
an occupant's head. Generally,
the center of gravity of most peo-
ple's head is similar with the
height of the top of their eyes.
Also, adjust the headrest as close
to your head as possible. For this
reason, the use of a cushion that
holds the body away from the
seatback is not recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed as severe
injury to the occupants may
occur in the event of an accident.
Headrests may provide protec-
tion against neck injuries when
properly adjusted.
• Do not adjust the headrest posi-
tion of the driver's seat while the
vehicle is in motion.
OHM038048N
37
Safety features of your vehicle
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the head-
rest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3).
Removal
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release button (1)
while pulling upward (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the head-
rest poles (3) into the holes while press-
ing the release button (1). Then adjust it
to the appropriate height.
Active headrest (if equipped)
The active headrest is designed to move
forward and upward during a rear impact.
This helps to prevent the driver's and
front passenger’s heads from moving
backward and thus helps minimize neck
injuries.
OEN036008 OEN038009 HNF2041-1
WARNING
Make sure the headrest locks in
position after adjusting it to proper-
ly protects the occupants.
WARNING
A gap between the seat and the
headrest release button may
appear when seating on the seat or
when you push or pull the seat. Be
careful not to get your finger, etc.
caught in the gap.
Safety features of your vehicle
83
C010105AEN
Lumbar support (for driver’s seat)
The lumbar support can be adjusted by
moving the lever on the outside of the dri-
ver’s seatback.Pivoting the lever increas-
es or decreases lumbar support.
C010107AEN
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm the
front seats during cold weather. With the
ignition switch in the ON position, push
either of the switches to warm the driver's
seat or the front passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under conditions
where the operation of the seat warmer
is not needed, keep the switches in the
OFF position.
• Each time you push the button, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
• The seat warmer defaults to the OFF
position whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
✽✽
NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in the ON
position, the heating system in the seat
turns off or on automatically depending
on the seat temperature.
CAUTION
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
paint thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may damage
the surface of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place anything on
the seats that insulates against
heat, such as blankets, cushions
or seat covers on the seats while
the seat warmer is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers. Damage to the seat
warming components could occur.
OFF → HIGH ( ) → LOW ( )
→
OEN036015OEN036014
39
Safety features of your vehicle
C010108AUN-EU
Seatback pocket
The seatback pocket is provided on the
back of the front passenger’s and driver’s
seatbacks.
C010200AEN
Front seat adjustment - power
(if equipped)
The front seat can be adjusted by using
the control knob located on the outside of
the seat cushion. Before driving, adjust
the seat to the proper position so as to
easily control the steering wheel, pedals
and switches on the instrument panel.
WARNING - Seatback
pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp objects
in the seatback pockets. In an acci-
dent they could come loose from
the pocket and injure vehicle occu-
pants.
OEN036010
WARNING
The power seat is operable with the
ignition OFF.
Therefore, children should never be
left unattended in the car.
WARNING
For proper operation of the occu-
pant classification system:
• Do not place any items cumula-
tively weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg)
in the passenger’s seatback
pocket or on the passenger’s
seat.
• Do not hang onto the front pas-
senger seatback.
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warmers
due to the possibility of excess
heating or burns. The occupants
must be able to feel if the seat is
becoming too warm and to turn the
seat warmer off. The seat warmer
may cause burns even at low tem-
peratures, especially if used for
long periods of time. In particular,
the driver must exercise extreme
care for the following types of pas-
sengers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or dis-
abled persons, or hospital outpa-
tients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold
tablets, etc.)
Safety features of your vehicle
103
C010201AUN
Forward and rearward
Push the control knob forward or rear-
ward to move the seat to the desired
position. Release the knob once the seat
reaches the desired position.
C010202AUN
Seatback angle
Push the control knob forward or rear-
ward to move the seatback to the desired
angle. Release the knob once the seat
reaches the desired position.
OEN036003 OEN036004
CAUTION
• The power seat is driven by an
electric motor. Stop operating
once the adjustment is complet-
ed. Excessive operation may
damage the electrical equipment.
• When in operation, the power
seat consumes a large amount of
electrical power. To prevent
unnecessary charging system
drain, don’t adjust the power seat
longer than necessary while the
engine is not running.
• Do not operate two or more power
seat control knobs at the same
time. Doing so may result in
power seat motor or electrical
component malfunction.
311
Safety features of your vehicle
C010203AUN
Seat cushion height
Pull the front portion of the control knob
up to raise or down to lower the front part
of the seat cushion. Pull the rear portion
of the control knob up to raise or down to
lower the rear part of the seat cushion.
Release the knob once the seat reaches
the desired position.
C010204AEN
Lumbar support (for driver’s seat)
Push the control knob forward or back-
ward to adjust the lumbar support to the
desired position. Release the knob once
the lumbar support reaches the desired
position.
Rear seat adjustment
C010301AUN
Forward and backward (2nd row seat)
To move the seat forward or backward:
1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment lever
under the front edge of the seat cush-
ion and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and make
sure the seat is locked securely by trying
to move forward and backward without
using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.
OEN036006 OEN036005 OEN032016N
Safety features of your vehicle
123
C010302AEN
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Pull on the seatback recline lever
located on the outside of the seat at
the rear or on the back of the rear
seatback.
2. 2nd row seat
Carefully lean back on the seat and
adjust the seatback of the seat to the
position you desire.
3rd row seat
Hold and adjust the seatback of the
seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seatback is locked in place. (The lever
MUST return to its original position for
the seatback to lock.)
C010303CUN
Headrest
The rear seat(s) is equipped with head-
rests in all the seating positions for the
occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort
for passengers, but also helps to protect
the head and neck in the event of a colli-
sion.
OHM038049N
OEN032017N
OEN032018N
■ 2nd row seat
■ 3rd row seat
313
Safety features of your vehicle
2nd row headrest
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the head-
rest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3).
Removal and installation
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release button
(1) while pulling upward (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the head-
rest poles (3) into the holes while press-
ing the release button (1). Then adjust it
to the appropriate height.
OEN032020NOEN032019N
WARNING
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the headrest
should be adjusted so the middle
of the headrest is at the same
height as the center of gravity of
an occupant's head. Generally,
the center of gravity of most peo-
ple's head is similar with the
height of the top of their eyes.
Also, adjust the headrest as close
to your head as possible. For this
reason, the use of a cushion that
holds the body away from the
seatback is not recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed as severe
injury to an occupant may occur
in the event of an accident.
Headrests may provide protec-
tion against severe neck injuries
when properly adjusted.
WARNING
Make sure the headrest locks in
position after adjusting it to proper-
ly protect the occupants.
Safety features of your vehicle
143
3rd row headrest
The headrest will fold down automatically
when the seatback folding.
Always be sure the headrest has locked
into position after you return the seatback.
The headrest cannot be removed.
Do not try to remove the headrest by
force.
C010304AEN
Armrest (2nd row seat)
To use the armrest, pull the strap (1) for-
ward from the seatback.
Multi box and cup holder
• To use the multi box, pull up the lever
(2).
• To use the cup holder, push the button
(3).
Close the cover after use.
OEN036022OEN032021NOEN032060N
315
Safety features of your vehicle
C010305AEN
Seat warmer (2nd row, if equipped)
The seat warmers are provided to warm
the rear seats during cold weather. With
the ignition switch in the ON position,
push either of the switches to warm the
left or right side of the seat.
During mild weather or under conditions
where the operation of the seat warmer
is not needed, keep the switches in the
OFF state.
• The seat warmer defaults to the OFF
state whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
✽✽
NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in the ON
state, the heating system in the seat
turns off or on automatically depending
on the seat temperature.
OEN036057
CAUTION
• When cleaning the seats, do not
use an organic solvent such as
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may damage
the surface of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the seat
warmer, do not place anything on
the seats that insulates against
heat, such as blankets, cushions
or seat covers while the seat
warmer is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers. Damage to the seat
warming components could occur.
• Always turn off the seat warmer
when not in use.
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warmers
due to the possibility of excess
heating or burns. The occupants
must be able to feel if the seat is
becoming too warm and to turn the
seat warmer off. The seat warmer
may cause burns even at low tem-
peratures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
In particular, the driver must exer-
cise extreme care for the following
types of passengers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or dis-
abled persons, or hospital outpa-
tients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or
those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold
tablets, etc.)
Safety features of your vehicle
163
C010306AEN
Walk-in seat (2nd row seat)
To get in or out of the 3rd row seat, pull
up the walk-in lever on the 2nd row seat-
back. The 2nd row seatback will be fold-
ed and the seat will slide forward. Move
the seat to the farthest forward position.
After getting in or out, slide the 2nd row
seat to the farthest rearward position and
pull the seatback firmly backward until it
clicks into place. Make sure that the seat
is locked in place.
C010307AEN
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks may be folded to facil-
itate carrying long items or to increase the
luggage capacity of the vehicle.
WARNING
The purpose of the fold-down rear
seatbacks is to allow you to carry
longer objects that could not be
accommodated in the cargo area.
Never allow passengers to sit on
top of the folded down seatback
while the car is moving as this is
not a proper seating position and
no seat belts are available for use.
This could result in serious injury
or death in case of an accident or
sudden stop.Objects carried on the
folded down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of the
front seatbacks. Doing this could
allow cargo to slide forward and
cause injury or damage during sud-
den stops.
WARNING
Never attempt to adjust while the
vehicle is moving or the 2nd row
seat is occupied as the seat may
suddenly move and cause the pas-
senger on the seat to be injured.
OEN032024N
317
Safety features of your vehicle
2nd row seat
To fold down the rear seatback:
1. Press the rear seat belt buckles down
into the cushion, and inserts the rear
seat belt webbing in the guide to pre-
vent the seat belt from being damaged.
2. Set the front seatback to the upright
position and if necessary, slide the
front seat forward.
3. Lower the rear headrests to the lowest
position.
4. Pull on the seatback folding lever, then
fold the seat toward the front of the
vehicle.
5.When you return the seatback to its
upright position, always be sure it has
locked into position by pushing on the
top of the seatback.
6.To use the rear seat, lift and pull the
seatback backward by pulling on the
folding lever. Pull the seatback firmly
until it clicks into place. Make sure the
seatback is locked in place.
7. Return the rear seat belt to the proper
position.
OEN032025N OEN032027N
Safety features of your vehicle
183
3rd row seat
To fold down the rear seatback:
1. Press the rear seat belt buckles down
into the cushion, and inserts the rear
seat belt webbing in the guide to pre-
vent the seat belt from being damaged.
2. Set the 2nd row seatback to the upright
position and if necessary, slide the 2nd
row seat forward.
3. Pull on the seatback folding lever, then
fold the seat toward the front of the
vehicle, the headrest will automatically
fold down.
4.When you return the seatback to its
upright position, always be sure it has
locked into position by pushing on the
top of the seatback.
5.To use the rear seat, lift and pull the
seatback backward by pulling on the
folding lever. Pull the seatback firmly
until it clicks into place. Make sure the
seatback is locked in place.
OEN037026 OEN037028
319
Safety features of your vehicle
6. Unfold the headrest manually.
7. Return the rear seat belt to the proper
position
WARNING
When you return the rear seatback
to its upright position after being
folded down:
Be careful not to damage the seat
belt webbing or buckle. Do not
allow the seat belt webbing or
buckle to get caught or pinched in
the rear seat. Ensure that the seat-
back is completely locked into its
upright position by pushing on the
top of the seatback. Otherwise, in
an accident or sudden stop, the
seat could fold down and allow
cargo to enter the passenger com-
partment, which could result in
serious injury or death.
OEN032061N OUN026140
WARNING - 3rd row seat
3rd row occupants should always
remain in the center of the seat
cushion so the occupants head is
protected by the headrest.
If not, the tailgate may hit the occu-
pant’s head, which could cause
injury.
Safety features of your vehicle
203
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
When you return the seatback to its
upright position, hold the seatback
and return it slowly. If the seatback
is returned without holding it, the
back of the seat could spring for-
ward resulting in injury caused by
being struck by the seatback.
WARNING - Cargo
Cargo should always be secured to
prevent it from being thrown about
the vehicle in a collision and caus-
ing injury to the vehicle occupants.
Do not place objects on the rear
(2nd and/or 3rd row) seats, since
they cannot be properly secured
and may hit the front seat occu-
pants in a collision.
WARNING - Cargo loading
Make sure the engine is off, the
automatic transaxle is in P (Park)
or the manual transaxle is in
reverse, and the parking brake is
securely applied whenever loading
or unloading cargo. Failure to take
these steps may allow the vehicle
to move if the shift lever is inadver-
tently moved to another position.
CAUTION - Rear seat belts
When returning the rear (2nd and/or
3rd row) seatbacks to the upright
position, remember to return the rear
shoulder belts to their proper posi-
tion. Routing the seat belt webbing
through the rear seat belt guides will
help keep the belts from being
trapped behind or under the seats.
CAUTION - Damaging rear
seat belt buckles
When you fold the rear (2nd and/or
3rd row) seatback, push the buckle
into the pocket in the rear cushion.
Doing so can prevent the buckle from
being damaged by the rear seatback.
321
Safety features of your vehicle
C020100AUN
Seat belt restraint system
SEAT BELTS
WARNING
Seat belts are designed to bear upon
the bony structure of the body, and
should be worn low across the front
of the pelvis or the pelvis, chest and
shoulders, as applicable; wearing
the lap section of the belt across the
abdominal area must be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection
for which they have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid con-
tamination of the webbing with pol-
ishes,oils and chemicals,and partic-
ularly battery acid. Cleaning may
safely be carried out using mild soap
and water. The belt should be
replaced if webbing becomes frayed,
contaminated or damaged. It is
essential to replace the entire
assembly after it has been worn in a
severe impact even if damage to the
assembly is not obvious. Belts
should not be worn with straps twist-
ed. Each belt assembly must only be
used by one occupant; it is danger-
ous to put a belt around a child being
carried on the occupant's lap.
(Continued)
• Avoid wearing twisted seat belts.
A twisted belt can't do its job as
well. In a collision, it could even
cut into you. Be sure the belt
webbing is straight and not twist-
ed.
• Be careful not to damage the belt
webbing or hardware. If the belt
webbing or hardware is dam-
aged, replace it.
WARNING
• For maximum restraint system
protection, the seat belts must
always be used whenever the car
is moving.
• Seat belts are most effective
when seatbacks are in the
upright position.
• Children age 12 and under must
always be properly restrained in
the rear seat. Never allow chil-
dren to ride in the front passen-
ger seat. If a child over 12 must
be seated in the front seat,he/she
must be properly belted and the
seat should be moved as far back
as possible.
• Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back. An improperly positioned
shoulder belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash. The shoulder
belt should be positioned midway
over your shoulder across your
collarbone.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
223
C020101AEN-EU
Seat belt warning
As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt
warning light will blink for approximately
6 seconds each time you turn the ignition
switch ON regardless of belt fastening.
The warning light will blink again for
approximately 6 seconds when starting
the engine.
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition switch is turned ON
and/or START or if it is disconnected
after the ignition switch is turned ON, the
seat belt warning light and the seat belt
warning chime will operate for approxi-
mately 6 seconds until the belt is fas-
tened. If the driver's seat belt is not fas-
tened when the vehicle speed exceeds 6
mph (10 km/h), the seat belt warning light
and chime will operate for approximately
11 times with a pattern of 6 seconds on
and 24 seconds off until the belt is fas-
tened or the vehicle speed decreases
below 3 mph (5 km/h).
1GQA2083
WARNING
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user
which will either prevent the seat
belt adjusting devices from oper-
ating to remove slack, or prevent
the seat belt assembly from being
adjusted to remove slack.
• When you fasten the seat belt, be
careful not to latch the seat belt in
buckles of other seat. It's very dan-
gerous and you may not be pro-
tected by the seat belt properly.
• Do not unfasten the seat belt and
do not fasten and unfasten the
seat belt repeatedly while driving.
This could result in loss of con-
trol, and an accident causing
death, serious injury, or property
damage.
• When fastening the seat belt,
make sure that the seat belt does
not pass over objects that are
hard or can break easily.
• Make sure there is nothing in the
buckle. The seat belt may not be
fastened securely.
323
Safety features of your vehicle
C020102BEN-EU
Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system
with emergency locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into
the buckle (2). There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to the
proper length only after the lap belt por-
tion is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips. If you lean for-
ward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will
extend and let you move around. If there
is a sudden stop or impact, however, the
belt will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you are not able to smothly pull
enough of the safety belt from the
retractor, firmly pull the belt out and
release it. Then you will be able to pull
the belt out smoothly.
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the shoulder
belt anchor to one of 5 positions for max-
imum comfort and safety.
The height of the seat belt should not be
too near your neck. The shoulder portion
should be adjusted so that it lies across
your chest and midway over your shoul-
der nearest the door and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster
into an appropriate position.
B180A01NF-1
OEN036029
Front seat
Safety features of your vehicle
243
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1).
To lower it, push it down (3) while press-
ing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the height
adjuster to make sure that it has locked
into position.
C020106AUN
Seat belts - Front passenger and rear
seat 3-point system with combination
locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
Combination retractor type seat belts are
installed in the rear seat positions to help
accommodate the installation of child
restraint systems. Although a combina-
tion retractor is also installed in the front
passenger seat position, it is strongly
recommended that children always be
seated in the rear seat. NEVER place
any infant restraint system in the front
seat of the vehicle.
This type of seat belt combines the fea-
tures of both an emergency locking
retractor seat belt and an automatic lock-
ing retractor seat belt.To fasten your seat
belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert
the metal tab into the buckle. There will
be an audible "click" when the tab locks
into the buckle. When not securing a
child restraint, the seat belt operates in
the same way as the driver's seat belt
(Emergency Locking Retractor Type). It
automatically adjusts to the proper length
only after the lap belt portion of the seat
belt is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips.
WARNING
• Verify the shoulder belt anchor is
locked into position at the appro-
priate height. Never position the
shoulder belt across your neck or
face. Improperly positioned seat
belts can cause serious injuries
in an accident.
• Failure to replace seat belts after
an accident could leave you with
damaged seat belts that will not
provide protection in the event of
another collision leading to per-
sonal injury or death. Replace
your seat belts after being in an
accident as soon as possible.
B200A02NF
WARNING
You should place the lap belt por-
tion as low as possible and snugly
across your hips, not on your waist.
If the lap belt is located too high on
your waist, it may increase the
chance of injury in the event of a
collision. Both arms should not be
under or over the belt. Rather, one
should be over and the other under,
as shown in the illustration.
Never wear the seat belt under the
arm nearest the door.
325
Safety features of your vehicle
When the seat belt is fully extended from
the retractor to allow the installation of a
child restraint system, the seat belt oper-
ation changes to allow the belt to retract,
but not to extend (Automatic Locking
Retractor Type). Refer to “Using a child
restraint system” in this section.
✽✽
NOTICE
Although the combination retractor
provides the same level of protection for
seated passengers in either emergency
or automatic locking modes, it is recom-
mended that seated passengers use the
emergency locking feature for improved
convenience. The automatic locking
function is intended to facilitate child
restraint installation. To convert from
the automatic locking feature to the
emergency locking operation mode,
allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully
retract.
When using the rear center seat belt, the
buckle with the “CENTER” mark must be
used.
CAUTION
Do NOT fold down the left portion of
the second row seat back when the
second row center seat belt is buck-
led. ALWAYS UNBUCKLE the sec-
ond row center seat belt before
folding down the left portion of the
second row seat back. If the sec-
ond row center seat belt is buckled
when the left portion of the second
row seat back is folded down, dis-
tortion and damage to the top por-
tion of the seat back and seat belt
garnish may result, causing the
seat back to lock into the folded
down position.
OEN036031N
Safety features of your vehicle
263
To release the seat belt:
The seat belt is released by pressing the
release button (1) in the locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should auto-
matically draw back into the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the belt to
be sure it is not twisted, then try again.
C020105AEN
Stowing the rear seat belt
• The rear seat belt buckles can be
stowed in the pocket between the rear
seatback and cushion when not in use.
• Routing the seat belt webbing through
the rear seat belt guides will help keep
the belts from being trapped behind or
under the seats when they are folded
down.
B210A01NF-1
OEN036033N
OEN036032
3rd row seat
2nd row seat
OEN036034
OEN036035
2nd row seat
3rd row seat
327
Safety features of your vehicle
C020200AEN-EU
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and
front passenger's pre-tensioner seat
belts.The purpose of the pre-tensioner is
to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly
against the occupant's body in certain
frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat
belts may be activated in crashes where
the frontal collision is severe enough.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if
the occupant tries to lean forward too
quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock
into position. In certain frontal collisions,
the pre-tensioner will activate and pull
the seat belt into tighter contact against
the occupant's body.
If the system senses excessive seat belt
tension on the driver or passenger's seat
belt when the pre-tensioner activates, the
load limiter inside the pre-tensioner will
release some of the pressure on the
affected seat belt.
OED030300
CAUTION
When using the seat belt, use it
after taking it out of the guides.
If you pull the seat belt when it is
stored in the guides, it may damage
the guides and/or belt webbing.
WARNING
For your safety, be sure that the
belt webbing is not loose or twisted
and always sit properly on your
seat.
Safety features of your vehicle
283
The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-
sists mainly of the following components.
Their locations are shown in the illustration:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
✽✽
NOTICE
• Both the driver's and front passen-
ger's pre-tensioner seat belts may be
activated in certain frontal collisions.
The pre-tensioners will not be activat-
ed if the seat belts are not being worn
at the time of the collision.
• When the pre-tensioner seat belts are
activated, a loud noise may be heard
and fine dust, which may appear to be
smoke, may be visible in the passenger
compartment. These are normal oper-
ating conditions and are not hazardous.
• Although it is harmless, the fine dust
may cause skin irritation and should
not be breathed for prolonged peri-
ods. Wash all exposed skin areas thor-
oughly after an accident in which the
pre-tensioner seat belts were activat-
ed.
✽✽
NOTICE
Because the sensor that activates the
SRS air bag is connected with the pre-
tensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag
warning light on the instrument
panel will illuminate for approximately
6 seconds after the ignition switch has
been turned to the ON position, and
then it should turn off.
AIR
BAG
WARNING
To obtain maximum benefit from a
pre-tensioner seat belt:
1.The seat belt must be worn cor-
rectly and adjusted to the proper
position. Please read and follow
all of the important information
and precautions about your vehi-
cle’s occupant safety features –
including seat belts and air bags –
that are provided in this manual.
2. Be sure you and your passengers
always wear seat belts properly.
1LDE3100
329
Safety features of your vehicle
C020300AUN-EU
Seat belt precautions
(Continued)
• The pre-tensioner seat belt
assembly mechanisms become
hot during activation. Do not
touch the pre-tensioner seat belt
assemblies for several minutes
after they have been activated.
• Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the pre-tensioner seat
belts yourself. This must be done
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not strike the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies.
• Do not attempt to service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat belt
system in any manner.
• Improper handling of the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt assemblies, and
failure to heed the warnings not
to strike, modify, inspect, replace,
service or repair the pre-tension-
er seat belt assemblies may lead
to improper operation or inadver-
tent activation and serious injury.
• Always wear the seat belts when
driving or riding in a motor vehicle.
• If the vehicle or pre-tensioner seat
belt must be discarded, contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not
working properly, this warning light
will illuminate even if there is no
malfunction of the SRS air bag. If
the SRS air bag warning light does
not illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned ON, or if it remains
illuminated after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds, or if it
illuminates while the vehicle is
being driven, please have an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect
the pre-tensioner seat belt and SRS
air bag system as soon as possible.
WARNING
• Pre-tensioners are designed to
operate only one time. After acti-
vation, pre-tensioner seat belts
must be replaced. All seat belts,
of any type, should always be
replaced after they have been
worn during a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING
All occupants of the vehicle must
wear their seat belts at all times.
Seat belts and child restraints
reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injuries for all occupants in the
event of a collision or sudden stop.
Without a seat belt, occupants
could be shifted too close to a
deploying air bag, strike the interior
structure or be thrown from the
vehicle. Properly worn seat belts
greatly reduce these hazards.
Even with advanced air bags,
unbelted occupants can be severe-
ly injured by a deploying air bag.
Always follow the precautions about
seat belts, air bags and occupant
safety contained in this manual.
Safety features of your vehicle
303
C020306AUN-EU
Infant or small child
All 50 states have child restraint laws.You
should be aware of the specific require-
ments in your state. Child and/or infant
seats must be properly placed and installed
in the rear seat.For more information about
the use of these restraints, refer to “Child
restraint system” in this section.
✽✽
NOTICE
Small children are best protected from
injury in an accident when properly
restrained in the rear seat by a child
restraint system that meets the require-
ments of the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. Before buying any
child restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
213. The restraint must be appropriate
for your child's height and weight.
Check the label on the child restraint for
this information. Refer to “Child
restraint system” in this section.
C020301AUN
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always occupy
the rear seat and use the available
lap/shoulder belts.The lap portion should
be fastened snug on the hips and as low
as possible. Check belt fit periodically. A
child's squirming could put the belt out of
position. Children are afforded the most
safety in the event of an accident when
they are restrained by a proper restraint
system in the rear seat. If a larger child
(over age 12) must be seated in the front
seat, the child should be securely
restrained by the available lap/shoulder
belt and the seat should be placed in the
rearmost position. Children age 12 and
under should be restrained securely in
the rear seat. NEVER place a child age
12 and under in the front seat. NEVER
place a rear facing child seat in the front
seat of a vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch-
es the child’s neck or face, try placing the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. If
the shoulder belt still touches their face
or neck they need to be returned to a
child restraint system.
WARNING
Every person in your vehicle needs
to be properly restrained at all
times, including infants and chil-
dren. Never hold a child in your
arms or lap when riding in a vehi-
cle. The violent forces created dur-
ing a crash will tear the child from
your arms and throw the child
against the interior. Always use a
child restraint appropriate for your
child's height and weight.
331
Safety features of your vehicle
C020302AKM
Restraint of pregnant women
Pregnant women should wear lap/shoul-
der belt assemblies whenever possible
according to specific recommendations
by their doctors. The lap portion of the
belt should be worn AS SNUGLY AND
LOW AS POSSIBLE on the hips, not a
cross the abdomen.
C020303AUN
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should con-
sult a physician for recommendations.
C020304AUN
One person per belt
Two people (including children) should
never attempt to use a single seat belt.
This could increase the severity of
injuries in case of an accident.
C020305AUN
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve max-
imum effectiveness of the restraint sys-
tem, all passengers should be sitting up
and the front and rear (2nd and/or 3rd
row) seats should be in an upright posi-
tion when the car is moving. A seat belt
cannot provide proper protection if the
person is lying down in the rear seat or if
the front and rear (2nd and/or 3rd row)
seats are in a reclined position.
WARNING - Shoulder belts
on small children
• Never allow a shoulder belt to be
in contact with a child’s neck or
face while the vehicle is in
motion.
• If seat belts are not properly worn
and adjusted on children, there is
a risk of death or serious injury.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never place
the lap portion of the safety belt
over the area of the abdomen
where the fetus is located or above
the abdomen where the belt could
crush the fetus during an impact.
Safety features of your vehicle
323
C020400AEN
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be disas-
sembled or modified. In addition, care
should be taken to assure that seat belts
and belt hardware are not damaged by
seat hinges, doors or other abuse.
C020401AEN
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected peri-
odically for wear or damage of any kind.
Any damaged parts should be replaced
as soon as possible.
C020402AUN
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and dry.
If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solution
and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong
detergents or abrasives should not be
used because they may damage and
weaken the fabric.
C020403AEN
When to replace seat belts
Entire in-use seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an accident.
This should be done even if no damage
is visible. Additional questions concern-
ing seat belt operation should be directed
to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
When you return the rear seatback
to its upright position after the rear
seatback has been folded down, be
careful not to damage the seat belt
webbing or buckle. Be sure that the
webbing or buckle does not get
caught or pinched in the rear seat.
A seat belt with damaged webbing
or buckle could possibly fail during
a collision or sudden stop, result-
ing in serious injury. If the webbing
or buckles are damaged, get them
replaced immediately.
WARNING
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious
or fatal injuries in the event of a col-
lision or sudden stop. The protec-
tion of your restraint system (seat
belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seat.
Seat belts must be snug against
your hips and chest to work proper-
ly. The more the seatback is
reclined, the greater the chance
that an occupant's hips will slide
under the lap belt causing serious
internal injuries or the occupant's
neck could strike the shoulder belt.
Drivers and passengers should
always sit well back in their seats,
properly belted, and with the seat-
backs upright.
333
Safety features of your vehicle
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
C030000BEN-EU
Children riding in the car should sit in the
rear seat and must always be properly
restrained to minimize the risk of injury in
an accident, sudden stop or sudden
maneuver. According to accident statis-
tics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in the
front seat. Larger children not in a child
restraint should use one of the seat belts
provided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your state. Child and/or
infant safety seats must be properly
placed and installed in the rear seat.You
must use a commercially available child
restraint system that meets the require-
ments of the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS).
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt, or
by a LATCH system (if equipped).
Children could be injured or killed in a
crash if their restraints are not properly
secured.For small children and babies, a
child seat or infant seat must be used.
Before buying a particular child restraint
system, make sure it fits your car seat
and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow
all the instructions provided by the man-
ufacturer when installing the child
restraint system.
(Continued)
• When the child restraint system
is not in use, store it in the lug-
gage area or fasten it with a seat
belt so that it will not be thrown
forward in the case of a sudden
stop or an accident.
• Children may be seriously injured
or killed by an inflating air bag.
All children, even those too large
for child restraints, must ride in
the rear seat.
WARNING
• A child restraint system must be
placed in the rear seat. Never
install a child or infant seat on the
front passenger's seat. Should an
accident occur and cause the
passenger-side air bag to deploy,
it could severely injure or kill an
infant or child seated in an infant
or child seat. Thus only use a
child restraint in the rear seat of
your vehicle.
• A seat belt or child restraint sys-
tem can become very hot if it is
left in a closed vehicle on a sunny
day, even if the outside tempera-
ture does not feel hot. Be sure to
check the seat cover and buckles
before placing a child there.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
343
WARNING
To reduce the chance of serious or
fatal injuries:
• Children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear seat.
A child riding in the front passen-
ger seat can be forcefully struck
by an inflating air bag resulting in
serious or fatal injuries.
• Always follow the child restraint
system manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for installation and use of
the child restraint.
• Always make sure the child seat
is secured properly in the car and
your child is securely restrained
in the child seat.
• Never hold a child in your arms or
lap when riding in a vehicle. The
violent forces created during a
crash will tear the child from your
arms and throw the child against
the car’s interior.
• Never put a seat belt over your-
self and a child. During a crash,
the belt could press deep into the
child causing serious internal
injuries.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never leave children unattended
in a vehicle – not even for a short
time. The car can heat up very
quickly, resulting in serious
injuries to children inside. Even
very young children may inadver-
tently cause the vehicle to move,
entangle themselves in the win-
dows, or lock themselves or oth-
ers inside the vehicle.
• Never allow two children, or any
two persons, to use the same
seat belt.
• Children often squirm and repo-
sition themselves improperly.
Never let a child ride with the
shoulder belt under their arm or
behind their back. Always proper-
ly position and secure children in
the rear seat.
• Never allow a child to stand-up or
kneel on the seat or floor of a
moving vehicle. During a colli-
sion or sudden stop, the child
can be violently thrown against
the vehicle’s interior, resulting in
serious injury.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never use an infant carrier or a
child safety seat that "hooks"
over a seatback, it may not pro-
vide adequate security in an acci-
dent.
• Seat belts can become very hot,
especially when the car is parked
in direct sunlight. Always check
seat belt buckles before fasten-
ing them over a child.
• After an accident, have an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer check the
child restraint system, seat belt,
tether anchor and lower anchor.
• If there is not enough space to
place the child restraint system
because of the driver's seat,
install the child restraint system
in the rear right seat.
335
Safety features of your vehicle
C030100AEN-EU
Using a child restraint system
For small children and babies, the use of
a child seat or infant seat is required.This
child seat or infant seat should be of
appropriate size for the child and should
be installed in accordance with the man-
ufacturer's instructions.
For safety reasons, we recommend that
the child restraint system be used in the
rear seats.
Since all passenger seat belts move
freely under normal conditions and only
lock under extreme or emergency condi-
tions (emergency locking mode), you
must manually change these seat belts
to the automatic locking mode to secure
a child restraint.
CRS09
OUN026150
Forward-facing child restraint system
Rearward-facing child restraint system
WARNING - Child seat
installation
• A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
to the car and the child is not
properly restrained in the child
restraint. Before installing the
child restraint system, read the
instructions supplied by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
• If the seat belt does not operate
as described in this section, have
the system checked immediately
by your authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• Failure to observe this manual's
instructions regarding child
restraint systems and the
instructions provided with the
child restraint system could
increase the chance and/or
severity of injury in an accident.
WARNING
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger
seat, because of the danger that an
inflating passenger-side air bag
could impact the rear-facing child
restraint and kill the child.
Safety features of your vehicle
363
C030102AUN-EU
Placing a passenger seat belt into
the automatic locking mode
The automatic locking mode will help
prevent the normal movement of the
child in the vehicle from causing the seat
belt to loosen and compromise the child
restraint system. To secure a child
restraint system, use the following proce-
dure.
To install a child restraint system on the
outboard or center rear seats, do the fol-
lowing:
1. Place the child restraint system on the
seat and route the lap/shoulder belt
around or through the restraint, follow-
ing the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.Be sure the seat belt web-
bing is not twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into
the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”
sound.
Position the release button so that it is
easy to access in case of an emergency.
3. Pull the shoulder portion of the seat
belt all the way out.When the shoulder
portion of the seat belt is fully extend-
ed, it will shift the retractor to the
“Automatic Locking” (child restraint)
mode.
E2MS103005
OEN036102
OEN036101
337
Safety features of your vehicle
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of
the seat belt to retract and listen for an
audible “clicking” or “ratcheting” sound.
This indicates that the retractor is in
the “Automatic Locking” mode. If no
distinct sound is heard, repeat steps 3
and 4.
5. Remove as much slack from the belt
as possible by pushing down on the
child restraint system while feeding the
shoulder belt back into the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat belt is
holding it firmly in place. If it is not,
release the seat belt and repeat steps
2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is in
the “Auto Lock” mode by attempting to
pull more of the seat belt out of the
retractor. If you cannot, the retractor is
in the “Auto Lock” mode.
To remove the child restraint, press the
release button on the buckle and then
pull the lap/shoulder belt out of the
restraint and allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
When the seat belt is allowed to
retract to its fully stowed position, the
retractor will automatically switch
from the “Automatic Locking”mode to
the emergency lock mode for normal
adult usage.
OEN036104OEN036103
WARNING - Auto lock
mode
The lap/shoulder belt automatically
returns to the “emergency lock
mode”whenever the belt is allowed
to retract fully. Therefore, the pre-
ceding seven steps must be fol-
lowed each time a child restraint is
installed.
If the retractor is not in the
Automatic Locking mode, the child
restraint can move when your vehi-
cle turns or stops suddenly. A child
can be seriously injured or killed if
the child restraint is not properly
anchored to the car, including set-
ting the retractor to the Automatic
Locking mode.
Safety features of your vehicle
383
C030103AEN
Securing a child restraint seat with
tether anchor system
Child restraint hook holders are located
on the back of the rear seatbacks.
1. Route the child restraint seat tether
strap over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable head-
rests, route the tether strap under the
headrest and between the headrest
posts, otherwise route the tether strap
over the top of the seatback.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
appropriate child restraint hook holder
and tighten to secure the child restraint
seat.
OEN037049N-1
WARNING - Tether strap
Never mount more than one child
restraint to a single tether anchor
or to a single lower anchorage
point. The increased load caused
by multiple seats may cause the
tethers or lower anchorage points
to break, causing serious injury or
death.
WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
to the car and the child is not prop-
erly restrained in the child restraint.
Always follow the child seat manu-
facturer’s instructions for installa-
tion and use.
2GHA3300L
339
Safety features of your vehicle
C030104AEN-EU
Securing a child restraint seat with
child seat lower anchor system
Some child seat manufacturers make
child restraint seats that are labeled as
LATCH or LATCH-compatible child
restraint seats. LATCH stands for "Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children".These
seats include two rigid or webbing
mounted attachments that connect to
two LATCH anchors at specific seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
child restraint seat eliminates the need to
use seat belts to attach the child seat in
the rear seats.
Child restraint symbols are located on
the left and right rear seat backs to indi-
cate the position of the lower anchors for
child restraints.
WARNING - Child restraint
check
Check that the child restraint sys-
tem is secure by pushing and
pulling it in different directions.
Incorrectly fitted child restraints
may swing, twist, tip or separate
causing death or serious injury.
WARNING - Child restraint
anchorage
• Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for
adult seat belts or harnesses or
for attaching other items or
equipment to the vehicle.
• The tether strap may not work
properly if attached somewhere
other than the correct tether
anchor.
OUN036101L OEN032046N
Lower Anchor
Position Indicator
Lower Anchor
Safety features of your vehicle
403
LATCH anchors have been provided in
your vehicle. The LATCH anchors are
located in the left and right outboard rear
seating positions. Their locations are
shown in the illustration. There is no
LATCH anchor provided for the center
rear seating position.
The LATCH anchors are located between
the seatback and the seat cushion of the
rear seat left and right outboard seating
positions.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install child
restraint seats with LATCH or LATCH-
compatible attachments.
Once you have installed the LATCH child
restraint, assure that the seat is properly
attached to the LATCH and tether
anchors.
Also, test the child restraint seat before
you place the child in it.Tilt the seat from
side to side. Also try to tug the seat for-
ward. Check to see if the anchors hold
the seat in place.
OEN032048N
WARNING
If the child restraint is not anchored
properly, the risk of a child being
seriously injured or killed in a colli-
sion greatly increases.
WARNING - LATCH lower
anchors
LATCH lower anchors are only to
be used with the left and right rear
outboard seating positions. Never
attempt to attach a LATCH
equipped seat in the center seating
position. You may damage the
anchors or the anchors may fail
and break in a collision.
WARNING
• When using the vehicle's
"LATCH" system to install a child
restraint system in the rear seat,
all unused vehicle rear seat belt
metal latch plates or tabs must be
latched securely in their seat belt
buckles and the seat belt web-
bing must be retracted behind
the child restraint to prevent the
child from reaching and taking
hold of unretracted seat belts.
Unlatched metal latch plates or
tabs may allow the child to reach
the unretracted seat belts which
may result in strangulation and a
serious injury or death to the
child in the child restraint.
• Do not place anything around the
lower anchors. Also make sure
that the seat belt is not caught in
the lower anchors.
WARNING
Install the child restraint seat fully
rearward against the seatback with
the seatback reclined two positions
from the most upright latched posi-
tion.
CAUTION
Do not allow the rear seat belt web-
bing to get scratched or pinched by
the child-seat latch and LATCH
anchor during the installation.
341
Safety features of your vehicle
C040000AEN
(1) Driver’s front air bag
(2) Passenger’s front air bag
(3) Side impact air bag
(4) Curtain air bag
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
OEN036301
* The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
WARNING
Even in vehicles with air bags, you
and your passengers must always
wear the seat belts provided in
order to minimize the risk and
severity of injury in the event of a
collision or rollover.
Safety features of your vehicle
423
C040900AEN-EU
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if
necessary) only when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or START
position.
• Air bags inflate in the event of a seri-
ous frontal or side collision in order to
help protect the occupants from seri-
ous physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which the
air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a col-
lision and its direction. These two fac-
tors determine whether the sensors
produce an electronic deployment/
inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the densi-
ty and stiffness of the vehicles or
objects which your vehicle hits in the
collision. The determining factors are
not limited to those mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to see
the air bags inflate during an accident.
It is much more likely that you will sim-
ply see the deflated air bags hanging
out of their storage compartments after
the collision.
• In order to help provide protection in a
severe collision, the air bags must
inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag
inflation is a consequence of the
extremely short time in which a collision
occurs and the need to inflate the air
bag between the occupant and the
vehicle structures before the occupant
impacts those structures.This speed of
inflation reduces the risk of serious or
life-threatening injuries in a severe col-
lision and is thus a necessary part of air
bag design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include facial
abrasions, bruises and broken bones
because the inflation speed also caus-
es the air bags to expand with a great
deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the air bag
can cause fatal injuries, especially if
the occupant is positioned exces-
sively close to the air bag.
WARNING
• To avoid severe personal injury
or death caused by deploying air
bags in a collision, the driver
should sit as far back from the
steering wheel air bag as possi-
ble (at least 10 inches (250 mm)
away). The front passengers
should always move their seats
as far back as possible and sit
back in their seat.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the
event of collision, and passen-
gers may be injured by the air bag
expansion force if they are not in
proper position.
• Air bag inflation may cause
injuries including facial or bodily
abrasions, injuries from broken
glasses or burns.
343
Safety features of your vehicle
C040902AEN
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make a
loud noise and they leave smoke and
powder in the air inside of the vehicle.
This is normal and is a result of the igni-
tion of the air bag inflator. After the air
bag inflates, you may feel substantial dis-
comfort in breathing due to the contact of
your chest with both the seat belt and the
air bag, as well as from breathing the
smoke and powder. Open your doors
and/or windows as soon as possible
after impact in order to reduce dis-
comfort and prevent prolonged expo-
sure to the smoke and powder.
Though the smoke and powder are non-
toxic, they may cause irritation to the skin
(eyes, nose and throat, etc). If this is the
case, wash and rinse with cold water
immediately and consult a doctor if the
symptom persists.
C040903AEN
Do not install a child restraint on the
front passenger’s seat.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger’s seat. If the air
bag deploys, it would impact the rear-fac-
ing child restraint, causing serious or
fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing child
restraints in the front passenger’s seat
either. If the front passenger air bag
inflates, it could cause serious or fatal
injuries to the child.
1JBH3051
WARNING
When the air bags deploy, the air
bag related parts in the steering
wheel and/or instrument panel
and/or in both sides of the roof rails
above the front and rear doors are
very hot. To prevent injury, do not
touch the air bag storage area’s
internal components immediately
after an air bag has inflated.
WARNING
• Extreme Hazard! Do not use a
rearward facing child restraint on
a seat protected by an air bag in
front of it!
• Never put a child restraint in the
front passenger’s seat.If the front
passenger air bag inflates, it can
cause serious or fatal injuries.
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of a vehicle
equipped with side and/or curtain
air bags, be sure to install the
child restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible,
and securely lock the child
restraint system in position.
Inflation of side and/or curtain air
bags could cause serious injury
or death to an infant or child.
Safety features of your vehicle
443
C041000AEN
Air bag warning light
The purpose of the air bag warning light
in your instrument panel is to alert you of
a potential problem with your air bag -
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
When the ignition switch is turned ON,
the warning light should illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds, then go off.
Have the system checked if:
• The light does not turn on briefly when
you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is
in motion.
C040100AEN-EU
SRS components and functions
The SRS consists of the following com-
ponents:
1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side impact air bag modules
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors
10.“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indi-
cator (Front passenger’s seat only)
11. Occupant classification system
(Front passenger’s seat only)
12. Driver’s seat track position sensor
13. Driver’s and front passenger’s seat
belt buckle sensors
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the ignition
switch is ON to determine if a crash
impact is severe enough to require air
bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat
belt deployment.
The SRS "AIR BAG" warning light on the
instrument panel will illuminate for about
6 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, after which the
SRS "AIR BAG" warning light should go
out.
If any of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunction of the SRS.
Have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
inspect the air bag system as soon as
possible.
• The light does not turn on briefly when
you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is
in motion.
AIR
BAG
OEN031051N
345
Safety features of your vehicle
The front air bag modules are located
both in the center of the steering wheel
and in the front passenger's panel above
the glove box.When the SRSCM detects
a sufficiently severe impact to the front of
the vehicle, it will automatically deploy
the front air bags.
Upon deployment, tear seams molded
directly into the pad covers will separate
under pressure from the expansion of the
air bags. Further opening of the covers
then allows full inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combination
with a properly worn seat belt, slows the
driver's or the passenger's forward
motion, reducing the risk of head and
chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling the
driver to maintain forward visibility and
the ability to steer or operate other con-
trols.
B240B01L
Driver’s front air bag (1)
B240B02L B240B03L
Driver’s front air bag (2) Driver’s front air bag (3)
Safety features of your vehicle
463
WARNING
• Do not install or place any acces-
sories (drink holder, cassette
holder, sticker, etc.) on the front
passenger's panel above the
glove box in a vehicle with a pas-
senger's air bag. Such objects
may become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the pas-
senger's air bag inflates.
• When installing a container of liq-
uid air freshener inside the vehi-
cle, do not place it near the
instrument cluster nor on the
instrument panel surface.
It may become a dangerous pro-
jectile and cause injury if the pas-
senger's air bag inflates.
B240B05L
Passenger’s front air bag
WARNING
• If an air bag deploys, there may
be a loud noise followed by a fine
dust released in the vehicle.
These conditions are normal and
are not hazardous - the air bags
are packed in this fine powder.
The dust generated during air
bag deployment may cause skin
or eye irritation as well as aggra-
vate asthma for some persons.
Always wash all exposed skin
areas thoroughly with lukewarm
water and a mild soap after an
accident in which the air bags
were deployed.
• The SRS can function only when
the ignition switch is in the ON
position. If the SRS "AIR BAG"
warning light does not illuminate,
or continuously remains on after
illuminating for about 6 seconds
when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position, or after the
engine is started, comes on while
driving, the SRS is not working
properly. If this occurs, have your
vehicle immediately inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Before you replace a fuse or dis-
connect a battery terminal, turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK
position and remove the ignition
key. Never remove or replace the
air bag related fuse(s) when the
ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion. Failure to heed this warning
will cause the SRS “AIR BAG”
warning light to illuminate.
347
Safety features of your vehicle
C040300AUN-EU
Occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with an occu-
pant classification system in the front
passenger's seat.
The occupant classification system is
designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated front passenger and
determine if the passenger's front air bag
should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
The driver's front air bag is not affected
or controlled by the occupant classifica-
tion system.
Main components of occupant
classification system
• A detection device located within the
front passenger seat track.
• Electronic system to determine
whether the passenger air bag sys-
tems (both front and side) should be
activated or deactivated.
• A warning light located on the instru-
ment panel which illuminates the
words "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicating the front passenger air bag
system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag warning
light is interconnected with the occu-
pant classification system.
If the front passenger seat is occupied by
a person that the system determines to
be of adult size, and he/she sits properly
(sitting upright with the seatback in an
upright position, centered on the seat
cushion with their seat belt on, legs com-
fortably extended and their feet on the
floor), the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator will be turned off and the front
passenger's air bag will be able to inflate,
if necessary, in frontal crashes.
You will find the "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicator on the center facia panel.
This system detects the conditions 1~4
in the following table and activates or
deactivates the front passenger air bag
based on these conditions.
OEN036047N
Safety features of your vehicle
483
Always be sure that you and all vehicle
occupants are seated and restrained
properly (sitting upright with the seat in
an upright position, centered on the seat
cushion, with the person's legs comfort-
ably extended, feet on the floor, and
wearing the safety belt properly) for the
most effective protection by the air bag
and the safety belt.
• The OCS may not function properly if
the passenger takes actions which can
affect the detection system. These
include:
(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.
(2) Leaning against the door or center
console.
(3) Sitting towards the sides or the
front of the seat.
(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or
resting them on other locations
which reduce the passenger weight
on the front seat.
(5) Improperly wearing the safety belt.
(6) Reclining the seat back.
C040301AEN
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
*1) The system judges a person of adult
size as an adult. When a smaller
adult sits in the front passenger seat,
the system may recognize him/her
as a child depending on his/her
physique and posture.
*2) Do not allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat. When a larger
child who has outgrown a child
restraint system sits in the front pas-
senger seat, the system may recog-
nize him/her as an adult depending
on his/her physique or posture.
*3) Never install a child restraint system
on the front passenger seat.
WARNING
Riding in an improper position or
placing weight on the front passen-
ger's seat when it is unoccupied by
a passenger adversely affects the
occupant classification system
(OCS).
(Continued)
Condition detected by the
occupant classification sys-
tem
1. Adult *
1
2. Child*
2
or child restraint
system*
3
3. Unoccupied
4.There is a malfunction in
the system
Off
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Activated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Activated
"PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicator light
SRS warning light
Front passenger air
bag
Indicator/Warning light Devices
349
Safety features of your vehicle
1KMN3663
1KMN3664
1KMN3665
- Never sit with hips shifted
towards the front of the seat.
- Never lean on the door or center
console.
- Never sit on one side of the front
passenger seat.
- Never place feet on the dash-
board.
OVQ036013N
1KMN3662
- Never put a heavy load in the
front passenger seat or seatback
pocket.
- Never excessively recline the
front passenger seatback.
OVQ036014N
- Never place feet on the front pas-
senger seatback.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
503
When an adult is seated in the front pas-
senger seat, if the “PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF” indicator is on, turn the igni-
tion switch to the LOCK position and ask
the passenger to sit properly (sitting
upright with the seat back in an upright
position, centered on the seat cushion
with their seat belt on, legs comfortably
extended and their feet on the floor).
Restart the engine and have the person
remain in that position.This will allow the
system to detect the person and to
enable the passenger air bag.
If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-
cator is still on, ask the passenger to
move to the rear seat.
✽✽
NOTICE
The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position or after the engine is
started. If the front passenger seat is
occupied, the occupant classification
sensor will then classify the front pas-
senger after several more seconds.
B990A01O
WARNING
Do not allow an adult passenger to
ride in the front seat when the
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indi-
cator is illuminated because the air
bag will not deploy in the event of a
crash. If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicator remains illuminated
after the adult passenger reposi-
tions themselves properly and the
car is restarted, it is recommended
that passenger move to the rear
seat because the passenger's front
air bag will not deploy.
Front seat passengers must stay
properly seated to avoid serious
injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING
Do not put a heavy load in the front
passenger seatback pocket or on
the front passenger seat. Do not
hang onto the front passenger seat.
Do not hang any items, such as a
seatback table, on the front passen-
ger seatback. Do not place feet on
the front passenger seatback. Do
not place any items under the front
passenger seat. Any of these could
interfere with proper sensor opera-
tion.
Proper position
351
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Air bags can only be used once –
have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer replace the air bag imme-
diately after deployment.
• A smaller-stature adult who is not
seated correctly (for example:
seat excessively reclined, leaning
on the door or center console, or
hips shifted forward in the seat)
can cause a condition where the
advanced frontal air bag system
senses less weight than if the
occupant were seated properly
(sitting upright with the seatback
in an upright position, centered
on the seat cushion with their
seat belt on, legs comfortably
extended and their feet on the
floor).
This condition can result in an
adult potentially being misclassi-
fied and illumination of the "PAS-
SENGER AIR BAG OFF" indica-
tor.
(Continued)
• Do not modify or replace the front
passenger seat. Don't place any-
thing on or attach anything such
as a blanket or seat heater to the
front passenger seat. This can
adversely affect the occupant
classification system.
• Do not sit on sharp objects such
as tools when occupying the
front passenger seat. This can
adversely affect the occupant
classification system.
• Do not use accessory seat cov-
ers on the front seats.
• Accident statistics show that
children are safer if they are
restrained in the rear, as opposed
to the front seat. It is recom-
mended that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including
an infant riding in a rear-facing
infant seat, a child riding in a for-
ward-facing child seat and an
older child riding in a booster
seat.
(Continued)
WARNING
• Even though your vehicle is
equipped with the occupant clas-
sification system, never install a
child restraint system in the front
passenger's seat. A deploying air
bag can forcefully strike a child
resulting in serious injuries or
death. Any child age 12 and
under should ride in the rear seat.
Children too large for child
restraints should use the avail-
able lap/shoulder belts. No mat-
ter what type of crash, children of
all ages are safer when restrained
in the rear seat.
• If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicator is illuminated
when the front passenger's seat
is occupied by an adult and
he/she sits properly (sitting
upright with the seatback in an
upright position, centered on the
seat cushion with their seat belt
on, legs comfortably extended
and their feet on the floor), have
that person sit in the rear seat.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
523
C040400BEN-EU
Driver's and passenger's front air
bag
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag) System
and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver
and passenger seating positions. The
indications of the system's presence are
the letters "SRS AIR BAG" embossed on
the air bag pad cover in the steering
wheel and the passenger's side front
panel pad above the glove box.
The SRS consists of air bags installed
under the pad covers in the center of the
steering wheel and the passenger's side
front panel above the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passen-
ger with additional protection than that
offered by the seat belt system alone in
case of a frontal impact of sufficient
severity. The SRS uses sensors to gath-
er information about the driver's seat
position, the driver's and front passen-
ger's seat belt usage and impact severi-
ty.
OEN036036
Driver’s front air bag
WARNING
If the occupant classification sys-
tem is not working properly, the
SRS air bag warning light on
the instrument panel will illuminate
because the passenger's front air
bag is connected with the occupant
classification system. If there is a
malfunction of the occupant classi-
fication system, the "PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF" indicator will not
illuminate and the passenger's
front air bag will inflate in frontal
impact crashes even if there is no
occupant in the front passenger's
seat. If the SRS air bag warning
light does not illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, remains illuminated after
approximately 6 seconds when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, or if it illuminates while
the vehicle is being driven, have an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect
the occupant classification system
and the SRS air bag system as
soon as possible.
OEN036037
Passenger’s front air bag
353
Safety features of your vehicle
The driver's seat track position sensor,
which is installed on the seat track, deter-
mines if the seat is fore or aft of a refer-
ence position. The seat belt buckle sen-
sors determine if the driver and front pas-
senger's seat belts are fastened. These
sensors provide the ability to control the
SRS deployment based on how close the
driver's seat is to the steering wheel,
whether or not the seat belts are fas-
tened, and how severe the impact is.
The advanced SRS offers the ability to
control the air bag inflation within two lev-
els.A first stage level is provided for mod-
erate-severity impacts. A second stage
level is provided for more severe impacts.
According to the impact severity, seating
position and seat belt usage, the SRSCM
(SRS Control Module) controls the air
bag inflation. Failure to properly wear
seat belts can increase the risk or sever-
ity of injury in an accident.
Additionally, your vehicle is equipped
with an occupant classification system in
the front passenger's seat.The occupant
classification system detects the pres-
ence of a passenger in the front passen-
ger's seat and will turn off the front pas-
senger's air bag under certain condi-
tions. For more detail, see "Occupant
classification system" in this section.
WARNING
If a seat track position sensor or an
occupant classification system is
not working properly, the SRS air
bag warning light on the instru-
ment panel will illuminate because
the SRS air bag warning light is
connected with the seat track posi-
tion sensor and the occupant clas-
sification system. If the SRS air bag
warning light does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position, remains illumi-
nated after approximately 6 sec-
onds when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, or if it
illuminates while the vehicle is
being driven, have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer inspect the
advanced SRS air bag system as
soon as possible.
AIR
BAG
WARNING
• Modification to the seat structure
can adversely affect the seat
track position sensor and cause
the air bag to deploy at a different
level than should be provided.
• Do not place any objects under-
neath the front seats as they
could damage the seat track
position sensor or interfere with
the occupant classification sys-
tem.
• Do not place any objects that may
cause magnetic fields near the
front seat. These may cause a
malfunction of the seat track
position sensor.
Safety features of your vehicle
543
✽✽
NOTICE
• Be sure to read information about the
SRS on the labels provided on the sun
visor.
• Advanced air bags are combined with
pre-tensioner seat belts to help pro-
vide enhanced occupant protection in
frontal crashes. Front air bags are not
intended to deploy in collisions in
which protection can be provided by
the pre-tensioner seat belt.
(Continued)
• Move your seat as far back as
practical from the front air bags,
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
• You and your passengers should
never sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the air bags. Improperly
positioned driver and passengers
can be severely injured by inflat-
ing air bags.
• Never lean against the door or
center console – always sit in an
upright position.
• Do not allow a passenger to ride
in the front seat when the “PAS-
SENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator
is illuminated, because the air
bag will not deploy in the event of
a moderate or severe frontal
crash.
(Continued)
WARNING
Always use seat belts and child
restraints – every trip, every time,
everyone! Air bags inflate with con-
siderable force and in the blink of
an eye. Seat belts help keep occu-
pants in proper position to obtain
maximum benefit from the air bag.
Even with advanced air bags,
improperly belted and unbelted
occupants can be severely injured
when the air bag inflates. Always
follow the precautions about seat
belts, air bags and occupant safety
contained in this manual.
To reduce the chance of serious or
fatal injuries and receive the maxi-
mum safety benefit from your
restraint system:
• Never place a child in any child or
booster seat in the front seat.
• ABC – Always Buckle Children in
the back seat. It is the safest
place for children of any age to
ride.
• Front and side air bags can injure
occupants improperly positioned
in the front seats.
(Continued)
WARNING
If you are considering modification
of your vehicle due to a disability,
please contact the Hyundai
Customer Assistance Center at 1-
800-633-5151.
355
Safety features of your vehicle
OEP036096N
OVQ036018N
1VQA2091
Rear impact
Side impact
Rollover
(Continued)
• No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, and the front passenger's
panel above the glove box,
because any such object could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
the air bags to deploy.
• Never place covers, blankets or
seat warmers on the passenger
seat as these may interfere with
the occupant classification sys-
tem.
• Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so
could result in injury, due to acci-
dental deployment of the air bags
or by rendering the SRS inopera-
tive.
• If the SRS air bag warning light
remains illuminated while the
vehicle is being driven, have an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer
inspect the air bag system as
soon as possible.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Air bags can only be used once –
have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer replace the air bag imme-
diately after deployment.
• The SRS is designed to deploy
the front air bags only when an
impact is sufficiently severe and
when the impact angle is less
than 30° from the forward longitu-
dinal axis of the vehicle.
Additionally, the air bags will only
deploy once. Seat belts must be
worn at all times.
• Front air bags are not intended to
deploy in side-impact, rear-
impact or rollover crashes. In
addition, front air bags will not
deploy in frontal crashes below
the deployment threshold.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
563
C040600AEN-EU
Side impact air bag
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
impact air bag in each front seat. The
purpose of the air bag is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passen-
ger with additional protection than that
offered by the seat belt alone.
(Continued)
• Sitting improperly or out of posi-
tion can result in serious or fatal
injury in a crash. All occupants
should sit upright with the seat-
back in an upright position, cen-
tered on the seat cushion with
their seat belt on, legs comfort-
ably extended and their feet on
the floor until the vehicle is
parked and the ignition key is
removed.
• The SRS air bag system must
deploy very rapidly to provide
protection in a crash. If an occu-
pant is out of position because of
not wearing a seat belt, the air
bag may forcefully contact the
occupant causing serious or fatal
injuries.
(Continued)
• Even though your vehicle is
equipped with the occupant clas-
sification system, do not install a
child restraint system in the front
passenger seat position. A child
restraint system must never be
placed in the front seat.The infant
or child could be severely injured
or killed by an air bag deployment
in case of an accident.
• Children age 12 and under must
always be properly restrained in
the rear seat. Never allow chil-
dren to ride in the front passen-
ger seat. If a child over 12 must
be seated in the front seat, he or
she must be properly belted and
the seat should be moved as far
back as possible.
• For maximum safety protection in
all types of crashes, all occu-
pants including the driver should
always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position
to minimize the risk of severe
injury or death in the event of a
crash. Do not sit or lean unneces-
sarily close to the air bag while
the vehicle is in motion.
(Continued)
OUN026141
OEN036038
357
Safety features of your vehicle
The side impact air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side-impact
collisions, depending on the crash sever-
ity, angle, speed and point of impact.The
side impact air bags are not designed to
deploy in all side impact situations.
(Continued)
• Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dan-
gerous projectiles and cause
injury if the supplemental side
impact air bag inflates.
• To prevent unexpected deploy-
ment of the side impact air bag
that may result in personal injury,
avoid impact to the side impact
sensor when the ignition switch
is on.
• If the seat or seat cover is dam-
aged, have the vehicle checked
and repaired by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer because your
vehicle is equipped with side
impact air bags and an occupant
classification system.
WARNING
• Do not allow the passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and passen-
gers when they are seated on
seats equipped with side and/or
curtain air bags.
• The side impact air bag is sup-
plemental to the driver's and the
passenger's seat belt systems
and is not a substitute for them.
Therefore your seat belts must be
worn at all times while the vehicle
is in motion. The air bags deploy
only in certain side impact condi-
tions severe enough to cause
significant injury to the vehicle
occupants.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• For best protection from the side
impact air bag system and to
avoid being injured by the
deploying side impact air bag,
both front seat occupants should
sit in an upright position with the
seat belt properly fastened. The
driver's hands should be placed
on the steering wheel at the 9:00
and 3:00 positions. The passen-
ger's arms and hands should be
placed on their laps.
• Do not use any accessory seat
covers.
• Use of seat covers could reduce
or prevent the effectiveness of
the system.
• Do not install any accessories on
the side or near the side impact
air bag.
• Do not place any objects over the
air bag or between the air bag
and yourself.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
583
C040700AEN
Curtain air bag
Curtain air bags are located along both
sides of the roof rails above the front and
rear doors.
They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants and
the rear outboard seat occupants in cer-
tain side impact collisions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side impact
collisions, depending on the crash sever-
ity, angle, speed and impact.The curtain
air bags are not designed to deploy in all
side impact situations, collisions from the
front or rear of the vehicle or in most
rollover situations.
WARNING
• In order for side and curtain air
bags to provide the best protec-
tion, both front seat occupants
and both outboard rear occu-
pants should sit in an upright
position with the seat belts prop-
erly fastened. Importantly, chil-
dren should sit in a proper child
restraint system in the rear seat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats, they must be
seated in the proper child
restraint system. Make sure to
position the child restraint sys-
tem as far away from the door
side as possible, and secure the
child restraint system in a locked
position.
• Do not allow the passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and passen-
gers when they are seated on
seats equipped with side and/or
curtain air bags.
• Never try to open or repair any
components of the side curtain
air bag system. This should only
be done by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Failure to follow the above instruc-
tions can result in injury or death to
the vehicle occupants in an acci-
dent.
OEN038039
OUN026091
359
Safety features of your vehicle
C040800AEN
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a
collision? (Inflation and non-infla-
tion conditions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents in
which the air bag would not be expect-
ed to provide additional protection.
These include rear impacts,second or
third collisions in multiple impact
accidents, as well as low speed
impacts. In other words, just because
your vehicle is damaged and even if it
is totally unusable, don’t be surprised
that the air bags did not inflate.
Air bag collision sensors
(1) SRS control module
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor
(4) Side impact sensor
OEN031040/OEN036041/OEN036042/OEN031050/OEN036044
1
2
3 4
Safety features of your vehicle
603
C040801AEN
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate in a
frontal collision depending on the intensi-
ty, speed or angles of impact of the front
collision.
1VQA2084
WARNING
• Do not hit or allow any objects to
impact the locations where air
bags or sensors are installed.
This may cause unexpected air
bag deployment, which could
result in serious personal injury
or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered in
any way, the air bags may deploy
when they should not or they may
not deploy when they should,
causing severe injury or death.
Therefore, do not try to perform
maintenance on or around the air
bag sensors. Have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed
due to the deformation of the
front bumper, body or B and C pil-
lars where side collision sensors
are installed. Have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Your vehicle has been designed
to absorb impact and deploy the
air bag(s) in certain collisions.
Installing bumper guards or
replacing a bumper with non-gen-
uine parts may adversely affect
your vehicle’s collision and air
bag deployment performance.
361
Safety features of your vehicle
Side impact and curtain air bags
Side impact and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the strength, speed or
angles of impact resulting from a side
impact collision.
Although the front air bags (driver’s and
front passenger’s air bags) are designed
to inflate only in frontal collisions, they
also may inflate in other types of colli-
sions if the front impact sensors detect a
sufficient impact.Side impact and curtain
air bags are designed to inflate only in
side impact collisions, but they may
inflate in other collisions if the side
impact sensors detect a sufficient
impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved roads,
the air bags may deploy. Drive carefully
on unimproved roads or on surfaces not
designed for vehicle traffic to prevent
unintended air bag deployment.
C040802AEN
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags are
designed not to deploy in such cases
because they may not provide benefits
beyond the protection of the seat belts
in such collisions.
1VQA2086
OVQ036018N
OUN026090
Safety features of your vehicle
623
• Frontal air bags are not designed to
inflate in rear collisions, because occu-
pants are moved backward by the
force of the impact. In this case, inflat-
ed air bags would not be able to pro-
vide any additional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collisions, because occupants
move to the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag
deployment would not provide addi-
tional occupant protection.
However, side impact and curtain air
bags may inflate depending on the
intensity, vehicle speed and angles of
impact.
• In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in a
direction where the air bags would not
be able to provide any additional bene-
fit, and thus the sensors may not
deploy any air bags.
1VQA2089OVQ036018NOUN036087
363
Safety features of your vehicle
• Just before impact, drivers often brake
heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the
front portion of the vehicle causing it to
“ride” under a vehicle with a higher
ground clearance. Air bags may not
inflate in this "under-ride" situation
because deceleration forces that are
detected by sensors may be signifi-
cantly reduced by such “under-ride”
collisions.
• Air bags may not inflate in rollover acci-
dents because air bag deployment
would not provide protection to the
occupants.
However, side impact and curtain air
bags may inflate when the vehicle is
rolled over by a side impact collision, if
the vehicle is equipped with side
impact air bags and curtain air bags.
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated to one area and
the full force of the impact is not deliv-
ered to the sensors.
1VQA2090 1VQA2091 1VQA2092
Safety features of your vehicle
643
C041100AEN
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-free
and there are no parts you can safely
service by yourself.If the SRS "AIR BAG"
warning light does not illuminate, or con-
tinuously remains on, have your vehicle
immediately inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such as
removing, installing, repairing, or any
work on the steering wheel must be per-
formed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er. Improper handling of the SRS system
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING
• Modification to SRS components
or wiring, including the addition
of any kind of badges to the pad
covers or modifications to the
body structure, can adversely
affect SRS performance and lead
to possible injury.
• For cleaning the air bag pad cov-
ers, use only a soft, dry cloth or
one which has been moistened
with plain water. Solvents or
cleaners could adversely affect
the air bag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
•
No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on the
steering wheel, instrument panel,
and the front passenger's panel
above the glove box, because any
such object could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a crash severe enough
to cause the air bags to inflate.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the air bags inflate, they must
be replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring, or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so
could result in injury, due to acci-
dental inflation of the air bags or
by rendering the SRS inopera-
tive.
• If components of the air bag sys-
tem must be discarded, or if the
vehicle must be scrapped, certain
safety precautions must be
observed. An authorized
HYUNDAI dealer knows these
precautions and can give you the
necessary information. Failure to
follow these precautions and pro-
cedures could increase the risk
of personal injury.
• If your car was flooded and has
soaked carpeting or water on the
flooring, you shouldn't try to start
the engine; have the car towed to
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
365
Safety features of your vehicle
C041300AUN
Additional safety precautions
• Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a folded-
down back seat. All occupants should
sit upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on the
floor.
• Passengers should not move out of
or change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not wear-
ing a seat belt during a crash or emer-
gency stop can be thrown against the
inside of the vehicle, against other
occupants, or out of the vehicle.
• Each seat belt is designed to
restrain one occupant. If more than
one person uses the same seat belt,
they could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
• Do not use any accessories on seat
belts. Devices claiming to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the seat
belt can reduce the protection provided
by the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Passengers should not place hard
or sharp objects between them-
selves and the air bags. Carrying
hard or sharp objects on your lap or in
your mouth can result in injuries if an
air bag inflates.
• Keep occupants away from the air
bag covers. All occupants should sit
upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on the
floor. If occupants are too close to the
air bag covers, they could be injured if
the air bags inflate.
• Do not attach or place objects on or
near the air bag covers. Any object
attached to or placed on the front or
side air bag covers could interfere with
the proper operation of the air bags.
• Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the sup-
plemental restraint system sensing
components or side air bags.
• Do not place items under the front
seats. Placing items under the front
seats could interfere with the operation
of the supplemental restraint system
sensing components and wiring har-
nesses.
• Never hold an infant or child on your
lap. The infant or child could be seri-
ously injured or killed in the event of a
crash. All infants and children should
be properly restrained in appropriate
child safety seats or seat belts in the
rear seat.
C041400AUN
Adding equipment to or modifying
your air bag-equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height or front door module, this may
affect the operation of your vehicle's air
bag system.
WARNING
• Sitting improperly or out of posi-
tion can cause occupants to be
shifted too close to a deploying
air bag, strike the interior struc-
ture or be thrown from the vehicle
resulting in serious injury or
death.
• Always sit upright with the seat-
back in an upright position, cen-
tered on the seat cushion with
your seat belt on, legs comfort-
ably extended and your feet on
the floor.
C041200AUN-EU
Air bag warning label (if equipped)
Air bag warning labels, some required by the U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), are attached to alert
the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system.
OEN037045/OEN036046/OEN036048
1
2
366
Safety features of your vehicle
4
Keys / 4-3
Smart key / 4-4
Remote keyless entry / 4-8
Theft-alarm system / 4-12
Door locks / 4-14
Tailgate / 4-18
Windows / 4-25
Hood / 4-29
Fuel filler door / 4-30
Sunroof / 4-32
Driver position memory system / 4-36
Power adjustable pedals / 4-38
Steering wheel / 4-39
Mirrors / 4-41
Instrument cluster / 4-51
Rear parking assist system / 4-67
Hazard warning flasher / 4-69
Lighting / 4-70
Wipers and washers / 4-74
Interior light / 4-78
Defroster / 4-83
Manual climate control system / 4-84
Automatic climate control system / 4-96
Features of your vehicle
Windshield defrosting and defogging / 4-106
Storage compartment / 4-109
Interior features / 4-112
Exterior feature / 4-119
Audio system / 4-120
Rear seat entertainment system (RSE) / 4-153
Features of your vehicle
4
43
Features of your vehicle
D010100AEN
Record your key number
The key code number is stamped on the
bar code tag attached to the key set.
Should you lose your keys, this number
will enable an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er to duplicate the keys easily. Remove
the bar code tag and store it in a safe
place. Also, record the code number and
keep it in a safe place (not in the vehicle).
D010200AEN
Key operations
Type A
Used to start the engine, lock and unlock
the doors.
Type B
Used to start the engine, lock and unlock
the doors.
To remove the mechanical key, press and
hold the release button (1) and remove
the mechanical key (2).
To reinstall the mechanical key, put the
key into the hole and push it until a click
sound is heard.
KEYS
OUN046100L
WARNING - Ignition key
Leaving children unattended in a
vehicle with the ignition key is dan-
gerous even if the key is not in the
ignition switch. Children copy
adults and they could place the key
in the ignition switch. The ignition
key would enable children to oper-
ate power windows or other con-
trols, or even make the vehicle
move, which could result in serious
bodily injury or even death. Never
leave the keys in your vehicle with
unsupervised children.
WARNING
Use only HYUNDAI original parts
for the ignition key in your vehicle.
If an aftermarket key is used, the
ignition switch may not return to
ON after START. If this happens, the
starter will continue to operate
causing damage to the starter
motor and possible fire due to
excessive current in the wiring.
OUN026060
OEN042302
Type A
Type B
Features of your vehicle
44
D040000AEN
With a smart key, you can lock or unlock
a door (and tailgate) and even start the
engine without inserting the key.
The functions of buttons on a smart key
are similar to the remote keyless entry.
(Refer to the “Remote keyless entry” in
this section.)
D040100AEN
Smart key functions
With possession of a smart key, you can
lock and unlock the vehicle doors (and
tailgate), and the smart key enables
starting of the engine as well. Detailed
information follows:
D040101AEN
Locking
Pressing the buttons in the front outside
door handles with all doors (and tailgate)
closed and any door unlocked, locks all
the doors (and tailgate). The hazard
warning lights blink and the chime
sounds once to indicate that all doors
(and tailgate) are locked. The button will
only operate when the smart key is with-
in 28~40 in. (0.7~1 m) from the outside
door handle. If you want to make sure
that a door has locked or not, you should
check the door lock button inside the
vehicle or pull the outside door handle.
OEN046301
SMART KEY (IF EQUIPPED)
OEN046303
45
Features of your vehicle
D040102AEN-EU
Unlocking
Pressing the buttons in the driver’s out-
side door handle with all doors (and tail-
gate) closed and locked, unlocks the dri-
ver’s door. The hazard warning lights
blink and the chime sounds twice to indi-
cate that the driver’s door is unlocked. All
doors (and tailgate) are unlocked if the
button is pressed once more within 4
seconds. The hazard warning lights will
blink and the chime will sound twice to
indicate that all the doors (and tailgate)
are unlocked.
Pressing the button in the front passen-
ger’s outside door handle with all doors
(and tailgate) closed and locked, unlocks
all the doors (and tailgate). The hazard
warning lights blink and the chime
sounds twice to indicate that all doors
(and tailgate) are unlocked. The button
will only operate when the smart key is
within 28~40 in. (0.7~1 m) from the out-
side door handle.
When the smart key is recognized in the
area of 28~40 in.(0.7~1 m) from the front
outside door handle, other people can
also open the door without possession of
the smart key.
D040103AEN-EE
Tailgate unlocking
If you are within 28~40 in.(0.7~1 m) from
the outside tailgate handle, with your
smart key in your possession, the tail-
gate will unlock and open when you
press the tailgate handle switch.
The hazard warning lights will blink twice
to indicate that the tailgate is unlocked
and open.
Also, once the tailgate is opened and
then closed, the tailgate will be locked
automatically.
D040104AEN
Start-up
You can start the engine without inserting
the key. For detailed information refer to
the “Starting the engine with smart key”
in section 5.
Features of your vehicle
64
D040300AEN-EU
Smart key precautions
✽✽
NOTICE
• If, for some reason, you happen to lose
your smart key, you will not be able to
start the engine. Tow the vehicle, if
necessary, and contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle. If you
lose a smart key, you should immedi-
ately take the vehicle and key to your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer to pro-
tect it from potential theft.
• The smart key will not work if any of
following occur:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the smart key.
- You keep the smart key near a
mobile two-way radio system or a
cellular phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is being
operated close to your vehicle.
When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door with
the mechanical key. If you have a
problem with the smart key, contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2.This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid. If the keyless
entry system is inoperative due to
exposure to water or liquids, it will
not be covered by your manufactur-
er’s vehicle warranty.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to
changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance, it will
not be covered by your manufactur-
er’s vehicle warranty.
47
Features of your vehicle
D040400AEN
Restrictions in handling keys
When leaving keys with parking lot and
valet attendants, the following proce-
dures will ensure that your vehicle’s
glove box compartment can not be
opened in your absence.
1. Depress and hold the release button
(1) and remove the mechanical key (2).
2. Close and then lock the glove box
using the mechanical key.
3. Leave the smart key with the atten-
dant. The glove box is secure with the
mechanical key.
D040500BEN
Battery replacement
A smart key battery should last for sever-
al years, but if the smart key is not work-
ing properly, try replacing the battery with
a new one. If you are unsure how to use
your smart key or replace the battery,
contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
The circuit inside the smart key can
have a problem if exposed to moisture
or static electricity. If you are unsure
how to use your smart key or replace the
battery, contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
1. Pry open the rear cover of the smart
key.
2. Replace the battery with a new battery
(CR2032).When replacing the battery,
make sure the battery positive “+” sym-
bol faces up as indicated in the illus-
tration.
3. Install the battery in the reverse order
of removal.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Using the wrong battery can cause the
smart key to malfunction. Be sure to
use the correct battery.
• Circuits inside the smart key may
develop problems when dropped,
exposed to moisture or static electrici-
ty.
• If you suspect that your smart key
might have sustained some damage,
or you feel your smart key is not
working correctly, contact an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
OEN046208
OEN042302
CAUTION
An inappropriately disposed bat-
tery can be harmful to the environ-
ment and human health.
Dispose the battery according to
your local law(s) or regulation.
Features of your vehicle
84
Remote keyless entry system
operations
D020101AEN-EU
Lock (1)
All doors (and tailgate) are locked if the
lock button is pressed.
If all doors (and tailgate) are closed, the
hazard warning lights blink and the
chime sounds once to indicate that all
doors (and tailgate) are locked.
However, if any door (or tailgate) remains
open, the hazard warning lights and the
chime will not operate. If all doors (and
tailgate) are closed after the lock button
is pressed, the hazard warning lights
blink.
D020102AEN-EU
Unlock (2)
Driver's door is unlocked if the unlock
button is pressed once. The hazard
warning lights will blink twice to indicate
that the driver's door is unlocked.
All doors (and tailgate) are unlocked if
the unlock button is pressed once more
within 4 seconds. The hazard warning
lights will blink and the chime will sound
twice again to indicate that all doors (and
tailgate) are unlocked.
After depressing this button, the doors
(and tailgate) will be locked automatical-
ly unless you open any door within 30
seconds.
D020104BEN-EE
Tailgate unlock (3)
With power tailgate
The tailgate is opened or closed auto-
matically if the button is pressed for more
than 1 second.The hazard warning lights
will blink and the chime will sound 3
times to indicate that the tailgate will
swing upward or downward.
✽✽
NOTICE
The power tailgate is opened or closed
by the transmitter regardless of the door
lock status. However, an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer can change the oper-
ating logic so that the power tailgate
may be operated by the transmitter
after any door is unlocked. If you want
this feature, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
OEN048002
OEN046301
Type A
Type B
CAUTION
The power tailgate can be operated
when the engine is not running.
However, the power tailgate con-
sumes large amounts of vehicle
electric power. To prevent the bat-
tery from being discharged, do not
operate them consecutively (more
than approximately 10 times).
49
Features of your vehicle
Without power tailgate
The tailgate is unlocked if the button is
pressed for more than 1 second.
The hazard warning lights will blink twice
to indicate that the tailgate is unlocked.
After depressing this button, the tailgate
will be locked automatically unless you
open the tailgate within 30 seconds.
Also, once the tailgate is opened and
then closed, the tailgate will be locked
automatically.
D020105AUN
Alarm (4)
The horn sounds and hazard warning
lights flash for about 30 seconds if this
button is pressed for more than 0.5 sec-
ond. To stop the horn and lights, press
any button on the transmitter.
D020200AEN-EU
Transmitter precautions
✽✽
NOTICE
The transmitter will not work if any of
following occur:
• The ignition key is in ignition switch.
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 90 feet [30 m]).
• The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the transmitter.
When the transmitter does not work
correctly, open and close the door with
the ignition key. If you have a problem
with the transmitter, contact an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid. If the keyless
entry system is inoperative due to
exposure to water or other liquids,
it will not be covered by your manu-
facturer’s vehicle warranty.
Features of your vehicle
104
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2.This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
D020300AEN
Battery replacement
Transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium battery
which will normally last for several years.
When replacement is necessary, use the
following procedure.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gen-
tly pry open the transmitter center
cover.
OEN048003
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to
changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance, it will
not be covered by your manufactur-
er’s vehicle warranty.
411
Features of your vehicle
2. Replace the battery with a new battery
(CR2032).When replacing the battery,
make sure the battery positive “+” sym-
bol faces up as indicated in the illus-
tration.
3. Install the battery in the reverse order
of removal.
For replacement transmitters, see an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for transmit-
ter reprogramming.
CAUTION
• The keyless entry system trans-
mitter is designed to give you
years of trouble-free use, howev-
er it can malfunction if exposed to
moisture or static electricity. If
you are unsure how to use your
transmitter or replace the battery,
contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can
cause the transmitter to malfunc-
tion. Be sure to use the correct
battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmit-
ter, don't drop it, get it wet, or
expose it to heat or sunlight.
OEN046004
CAUTION
An inappropriately disposed bat-
tery can be harmful to the environ-
ment and human health.
Dispose the battery according to
your local law(s) or regulation.
Features of your vehicle
124
D030000AEN
This system is designed to provide pro-
tection from unauthorized entry into the
car. This system is operated in three
stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the
second is the "Theft-alarm" stage, and
the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-
gered, the system provides an audible
alarm with blinking of the hazard warning
lights.
D030100AEN-EU
Armed stage
Park the car and stop the engine. Arm
the system as described below.
1. Remove the ignition key from the igni-
tion switch and exit the vehicle.
2. Make sure that all doors (and tailgate)
and engine hood are closed and
latched.
3. Lock the doors using the transmitter of
the keyless entry system (or smart
key).
After completion of the steps above, the
hazard warning lights will blink and the
chime will sound once to indicate that the
system is armed.
If any door (or tailgate) or engine hood
remains open, the hazard warning lights
and the chime will not operate and the
theft-alarm will not arm. If all doors (and
tailgate) and engine hood are closed
after the lock button is pressed, the haz-
ard warning lights blink once.
The system can also be armed by lock-
ing the doors with the key from the front
doors; however, the hazard warning
lights will not blink using this method.
✽✽
NOTICE
The theft-alarm system by the key can
be deactivated by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
If you want this feature, consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not arm the system until all pas-
sengers have left the vehicle. If the
system is armed while a passenger(s)
remains in the vehicle, the alarm may
be activated when the remaining pas-
senger(s) leave the vehicle. If any
door (or tailgate) or engine hood is
opened within 30 seconds after the
system enters the armed stage, the
system is disarmed to prevent an
unnecessary alarm.
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM
Armed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
Disarmed
stage
413
Features of your vehicle
D030200AEN-EU
Theft-alarm stage
The alarm will be activated if any of the
following occurs while the system is
armed.
• A front or rear door is opened without
using the ignition key or transmitter (or
smart key).
• The tailgate is opened without using
the transmitter (or smart key).
• The engine hood is opened.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously for
approximately 30 seconds, and repeat
the alarm once more unless the system
is disarmed. To turn off the system,
unlock the doors with the ignition key or
transmitter.
D030400BEN-EU
Disarmed stage
The system will be disarmed when the
doors (and tailgate) are unlocked with the
transmitter (or smart key) or the ignition
key.
After depressing the unlock button, the
hazard warning lights will blink and the
chime will sound twice to indicate that the
system is disarmed.
After depressing the unlock button, if any
door (or tailgate) is not opened within 30
seconds, the system will be rearmed.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Avoid trying to start the engine while
the alarm is activated. The vehicle
starting motor is disabled during the
theft-alarm stage.
If the system is not disarmed with the
transmitter, insert the key into the
ignition switch, turn the ignition
switch to the ON position and wait for
30 seconds. Then the system will be
disarmed. (if equipped)
• If you lose your keys, consult your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust the
theft-alarm system because it could
cause the theft-alarm system to
malfunction. The system should
only be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improper
alterations, adjustments or modifi-
cations to the theft-alarm system
are not covered by your vehicle
manufacturer warranty.
Features of your vehicle
144
D050100AEN-EU
Operating door locks from out-
side the vehicle
• Turn the key toward the rear of the
vehicle to unlock and toward the front
of the vehicle to lock.
• If you lock the door with a key, all vehi-
cle doors will lock automatically.
• From the driver’s door, turn the key to
the right once to unlock the driver’s
door and once more within 4 seconds
to unlock all doors.
• Doors can also be locked and
unlocked with the transmitter (or smart
key).
• Once the doors are unlocked, they may
be opened by pulling the door handle.
• When closing the door, push the door
by hand. Make sure that doors are
closed securely.
✽✽
NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-
ple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operating
temporarily in order to protect the
circuit and prevent damage to system
components.
• To lock a door without the key, push the
inside door lock button (1) or central
door lock switch (2
)
to the “Lock” posi-
tion and close the door (3).
• If you lock the door with the central
door lock switch (2), all vehicle doors
will lock automatically.
✽✽
NOTICE
Always remove the ignition key, firmly
engage the parking brake, close all win-
dows and lock all doors when leaving
your vehicle unattended.
DOOR LOCKS
OEN046005
Lock
Unlock
OEN046006
WARNING
• If you don't close the door
securely, the door may open
again.
• Be careful that someone's body
and hands are not trapped when
closing the door.
415
Features of your vehicle
Operating door locks from inside
the vehicle
D050201AEN-EE
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, pull the door lock but-
ton (1) to the “Unlock”position.The red
mark (2) on button will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock but-
ton (1) to the “Lock”position.If the door
is locked properly, the red mark (2) on
the door lock button will not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door handle
(3) outward.
• If the inner door handle of the driver’s
(or front passenger’s) door is pulled
when the door lock button is in lock
position, the button is unlocked and
door opens. (if equipped)
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
ignition key is in the ignition switch and
any front door is open.
D050202AUN
With central door lock switch
Operate by depressing the central door
lock switch.
OEN046007
Lock
Unlock
WARNING - Door lock mal-
function
If a power door lock ever fails to
function while you are in the vehi-
cle, try one or more of the following
techniques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously
pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
key to unlock the door from out-
side.
• Move to the cargo area and open
the tailgate.
OEN046008
Driver’s door
OEN046009
Passenger’s door
Features of your vehicle
164
• When pushing down on the front por-
tion (1) of the switch, all vehicle doors
will lock.
• When pushing down on the rear por-
tion (2) of the switch, all vehicle doors
will unlock.
• If the key is in the ignition switch and
any front door is open, the doors will
not lock when the front portion (1) of
central door lock switch is pressed.
WARNING - Unlocked
vehicles
Leaving your vehicle unlocked can
invite theft or possible harm to you
or others from someone hiding in
your vehicle while you are gone.
Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close all
windows and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.
WARNING - Unattended
children
An enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended chil-
dren or animals who cannot escape
the vehicle. Furthermore, children
might operate features of the vehi-
cle that could injure them, or they
could encounter other harm, possi-
bly from someone gaining entry to
the vehicle. Never leave children or
animals unattended in your vehicle.
WARNING - Doors
• The doors should always be fully
closed and locked while the vehi-
cle is in motion to prevent acci-
dental opening of the door.
Locked doors will also discour-
age potential intruders when the
vehicle stops or slows.
• Be careful when opening doors
and watch for vehicles, motorcy-
cles, bicycles or pedestrians
approaching the vehicle in the
path of the door. Opening a door
when something is approaching
can cause damage or injury.
417
Features of your vehicle
D050300AAM-EU
Impact sensing door unlock
system (if equipped)
In the event of air bag deployment result-
ing from a vehicle impact, all doors will
automatically unlock.
D050400BEN-EU
Auto door lock/unlock feature
• All doors will be automatically locked
when shifting the transaxle shift lever
out of P(Park) with engine is running.
• All doors will be automatically unlocked
when shifting the transaxle shift lever
into P(Park) with engine is running.
✽✽
NOTICE
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer can
activate or deactivate some auto door
lock/unlock features as follows;
• Speed sensing auto door lock
• Auto door unlock by using the dri-
ver's door lock button
• Auto door unlock when the ignition
key is removed from the ignition switch
• Auto door lock/unlock by shifting the
transmission shift lever out of P
(Park) or into P (Park)
If you want to activate or deactivate
some door lock/unlock feature, consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
D050500AEN
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to help
prevent children from accidentally open-
ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle.
The rear door safety locks should be
used whenever children are in the vehi-
cle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Push the child safety lock located on
the rear edge of the door to the lock
( ) position. When the child safety
lock is in the lock position, the rear
door will not open even when the inner
door handle is pulled.
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the outside
door handle (1).
Even though the doors may be unlocked,
the rear door will not open by pulling the
inner door handle (2) until the rear door
child safety lock is unlocked ( ).
OEN046010
WARNING - Rear door
locks
If children accidentally open the
rear doors while the vehicle is in
motion, they could fall out of the
vehicle,resulting in severe injury or
death. To prevent children from
opening the rear doors from the
inside, the rear door safety locks
should be used whenever children
are in the vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
184
D070100AEN-EE
Opening the tailgate
• The tailgate is locked or unlocked
when all doors are locked or unlocked
with the key, transmitter (or smart key)
or central door lock switch.
• Only the tailgate is unlocked if the tail-
gate unlock button on the transmitter
(or smart key) is pressed. Once the
tailgate is opened and then closed, the
tailgate is locked automatically.
• If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened
by pressing the handle switch and
pulling the handle up.
✽✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, door lock and
door mechanisms may not work proper-
ly due to freezing conditions.
D070200AUN
Closing the tailgate
To close the tailgate, lower and push
down the tailgate firmly. Make sure that
the tailgate is securely latched.
TAILGATE
OEN046011
WARNING
The tailgate swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are near
the rear of the vehicle when open-
ing the tailgate.
CAUTION
Make certain that you close the tail-
gate before driving your vehicle.
Possible damage may occur to the
tailgate lift cylinders and attached
hardware if the tailgate is not
closed prior to driving.
WARNING - Exhaust
fumes
If you drive with the tailgate open,
you will draw dangerous exhaust
fumes into your vehicle which can
cause serious injury or death to
vehicle occupants.
If you must drive with the tailgate
open, keep the air vents and all win-
dows open so that additional out-
side air comes into the vehicle.
419
Features of your vehicle
D070300AEN
Emergency tailgate safety release
Your vehicle is equipped with the emer-
gency tailgate safety release lever locat-
ed on the bottom of the tailgate. When
someone is inadvertently locked in the
luggage compartment, if the lever is
pushed, the tailgate latch mechanism is
released and the tailgate is opened by
pushing rearward.
WARNING
• For emergencies, be fully aware
of the location of the emergency
tailgate safety release lever in
this vehicle and how to open the
tailgate if you are accidentally
locked in the luggage compart-
ment.
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the luggage compartment
of the vehicle at any time. The
luggage compartment is a very
dangerous location in the event
of a crash.
• Use the release lever for emer-
gencies only. Use extreme cau-
tion, especially while the vehicle
is in motion.
OEN046014
WARNING - Rear cargo
area
Occupants should never ride in the
rear cargo area where no restraints
are available. To avoid injury in the
event of an accident or sudden
stops, occupants should always be
properly restrained.
Features of your vehicle
204
D070400AEN-EE
Power tailgate (if equipped)
(1) Power tailgate main control button
(2) Power ON/OFF button
(3) Power tailgate handle switch
(4) Power tailgate sub control button
The power tailgate can be opened and
closed automatically with the transmitter
(or smart key), the main control button on
the driver side crash pad, or the sub con-
trol button or handle switch on the tail-
gate.
When the power ON/OFF button is OFF
(not depressed), the power tailgate can
be opened and closed manually by
pressing the tailgate handle switch from
outside vehicle and pulling the handle up.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the power tailgate is open approxi-
mately 6 hours, the ECU will enter Sleep
mode to conserve battery power and the
tailgate might not close automatically.
Close the tailgate manually and then
operate the tailgate with the power
operating system.
✽✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, the power tail-
gate may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
WARNING
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle.
Children or animals might operate
the power tailgate that could result
in injury to themselves or others, or
damage to the vehicle.
OEN036051
OEN038050
OEN046210
In the glove box
On the tailgate
OEN046013
On the tailgate
On the driver side crash pad
421
Features of your vehicle
D070401AEN
Automatic stop and reversal
If, during power opening or closing, the
tailgate is blocked by an object or part of
the body, the power tailgate will detect
the resistance, then the chime will sound
3 times, and it will stop movement or
move to the full open position to allow the
object to be cleared.
However, if the resistance is weak such
as from an object that is thin or soft, or
the tailgate is near the latched position,
the automatic stop and reversal may not
detect the resistance and the closing
operation will continue. Also, if the power
tailgate is forced by a strong impact, the
automatic stop and reversal may oper-
ate.
If the automatic stop and reversal feature
operates continuously more than twice
during one opening or closing operation,
the power tailgate may stop at that posi-
tion. At this time, close the tailgate man-
ually and operate the tailgate automati-
cally again.
OEN036049
WARNING
• Never intentionally place any
object or part of your body in the
path of the power tailgate to
make sure the automatic stop
operates.
• Make sure all faces, arms, hands,
body parts and any other obstruc-
tions are safely out of the way
before operating the power tail-
gate.
• Never place any object or part of
your body in the path of the
power tailgate. This could result
in serious injury or cause dam-
age to the vehicle.
• Make sure there are no people or
objects around the tailgate before
operating the power tailgate.
Have rear passengers or cargo
get in or out of the vehicle only
after the tailgate is open fully and
stopped.
CAUTION
• The power tailgate can be operat-
ed when the engine is not run-
ning. However the power opera-
tion consumes large amounts of
vehicle electric power. To prevent
the battery from being dis-
charged, do not operate it exces-
sively e.g.: more than approxi-
mately 10 times repeatedly.
• To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the
power tailgate in the open posi-
tion for a long lime.
• Do not apply excessive force
while operating the power tail-
gate.This could cause damage to
the power tailgate.
• Do not modify or repair any part
of the power tailgate by yourself.
This must be done by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• When jacking up the vehicle to
change a tire or repair the vehicle,
do not operate the power tailgate.
This could cause the power tail-
gate to operate improperly.
Features of your vehicle
224
D070402AEN-EE
How to reset the power tailgate
If the battery has been discharged or dis-
connected, the related fuse has been
replaced or disconnected, and the power
tailgate doesn't work properly, the power
tailgate must be reset as follows:
1. Put the shift lever P (Park).
2. Pull out the memory fuse on the dri-
ver's side fuse panel and reinstall it
after 1 minute.
3. Close the tailgate manually.
4. Open the tailgate completely using the
transmitter (or smart key) or main con-
trol button on the driver side crash
pad.
5. Close the tailgate completely using the
transmitter (or smart key) or main con-
trol button on the driver side crash
pad.
If the power tailgate doesn't work proper-
ly after above procedure, have the sys-
tem checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
D070403BEN-EE
Power ON/OFF button
• When the power ON/OFF button is ON
(depressed), the power tailgate can be
controlled with the sub control button
on the tailgate.Also, the tailgate can be
opened and closed automatically by
pressing the tailgate handle switch.
• When the power ON/OFF button is
OFF (not depressed), the power tail-
gate can not be controlled with the sub
control button or tailgate handle switch.
However, the tailgate can be controlled
with the transmitter (or smart key) or
the main control button on the driver
side crash pad even though the power
ON/OFF button is OFF (not
depressed).
OEN038050OEN076023
On the driver’s side fuse panel
423
Features of your vehicle
Also, the tailgate can be opened or
closed manually by pressing the tail-
gate handle switch and pulling the han-
dle up or pushing the tailgate down-
ward.
D070404BEN-EE
Power tailgate operation
• Push the power tailgate main control
button on the driver side crash pad to
open or close the power tailgate.
However, the power tailgate will not
open with the main control button
when all doors and tailgate are locked
and closed and the key is removed
from the ignition switch (or the ignition
switch is turned to the LOCK position,
if equipped with smart key system).
• The power tailgate can be opened or
closed by the transmitter (or smart key)
regardless of the door lock status.
• When the power tailgate is operated
with the main or sub control button or
transmitter (or smart key), the chime
sounds and hazard warning lights flash
3 times.
• When the power ON/OFF button is ON
(depressed), do as follows to open or
close the power tailgate:
- Pushing the sub control button on the
bottom of the tailgate will close the
power tailgate automatically.
- Pressing the tailgate handle switch
will open the power tailgate automat-
ically when the tailgate is unlocked.
OEN036051
On the driver side crash pad
OEN046013
On the tailgate
WARNING
Do not allow children to play with
the power tailgate. Keep the power
ON/OFF button in the OFF (not
depressed) position when not in
use. Serious injury or death can
result from unintentional power
operation by a child.
CAUTION
Close the tailgate, and keep the
power ON/OFF button in the OFF
(not depressed) position before
washing the vehicle in an automatic
car wash.
Features of your vehicle
244
• When the power ON/OFF button is
OFF (not depressed), the power tail-
gate can not be controlled with the sub
control button or tailgate handle switch,
and if the sub control button is pushed,
the chime sounds once.
However, the tailgate may be opened
manually by pressing the tailgate han-
dle switch and lifting the tailgate
upward. The tailgate may be manually
closed by pushing the tailgate down-
ward.
• If the power tailgate is not closed and
latched completely after power closing
operation, the chime sounds 3 times.
• If the power tailgate is operated while
the tailgate is in partially opened posi-
tion (less than 10 degrees), the tailgate
is automatically opened fully.
If the power tailgate is operated while
the tailgate is in half-opened position
(more than 10 degrees), the tailgate is
automatically closed completely.
• If the power tailgate is operated again
while the tailgate is closing, the tailgate
is automatically opened fully.
• If the power tailgate is operated again
while the tailgate is opening, the tail-
gate is automatically closed complete-
ly. However, if the power tailgate con-
trol button is pressed again when the
tailgate is open less than 10 degrees,
the tailgate will continue to open.
Power tailgate non-opening conditions
The power tailgate will not open auto-
matically, but will close under the follow-
ing conditions. If the main or sub control
button is pushed for power opening oper-
ation, the chime sounds once.
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position,
1.Vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h).
2.The gearshift lever is not in P (Park).
WARNING
Even though the power ON/OFF
button is in the OFF (not
depressed) position, the tailgate
will still be propelled upward by
mechanical force if the tailgate is
manually opened more than 10
degrees beyond the fully closed
position. In addition, if the tailgate
is manually closed to the second-
ary latch position, the tailgate will
be electrically moved to the fully
latched position. Make sure that
face, arms, hands, and other
obstructions are safely out of the
way before operating the tailgate.
WARNING
Make sure there are no people or
objects around the tailgate before
operating the power tailgate. Wait
until the tailgate is open fully and
stopped before loading or unload-
ing cargo or passengers from the
vehicle.
WARNING
Make sure the tailgate is closed
firmly before driving. If the tailgate
is open, you will draw dangerous
exhaust fumes into your vehicle
which can cause serious injury or
death to vehicle occupants.
425
Features of your vehicle
D080000AEN
(1) Driver’s door power window switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power win-
dow switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window up/down
(Driver’s window)
(7) Power window lock switch
✽✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, power windows
may not work properly due to freezing
conditions.
WINDOWS
OEN046015
Features of your vehicle
264
D080100AUN
Power windows
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate.
Each door has a power window switch
that controls the door's window.The driv-
er has a power window lock switch which
can block the operation of passenger
windows. The power windows can be
operated for approximately 30 seconds
after the ignition key is removed or turned
to the ACC or LOCK position.However, if
the front doors are opened, the power
windows cannot be operated within the
30 second period after the ignition key
removal.
✽✽
NOTICE
While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if equipped)
in an open (or partially open) position,
your vehicle may demonstrate a wind
buffeting or pulsation noise. This noise
is a normal occurrence and can be
reduced or eliminated by taking the fol-
lowing actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows down,
partially lower both front windows
approximately one inch. If you experi-
ence the noise with the sunroof open,
slightly reduce the size of the sunroof
opening.
D080101AUN
Window opening and closing
The driver’s door has a master power
window switch that controls all the win-
dows in the vehicle.
To open or close a window, press down
or pull up the front portion of the corre-
sponding switch to the first detent posi-
tion (5).
D080103AUN
Auto up/down window
(Driver's window)
Depressing or pulling up the power win-
dow switch momentarily to the second
detent position (6) completely lowers or
lifts the window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is in
operation, pull up or depress and release
the switch to the opposite direction of the
movement.
OUN026012 OMG035014
427
Features of your vehicle
If the power window is not operated cor-
rectly, the automatic power window sys-
tem must be reset as follows:
1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
2. Close driver’s window and continue
pulling up on driver’s power window
switch for at least 1 second after the
window is completely closed.
Automatic reversal
If the upward movement of the window is
blocked by an object or part of the body,
the window will detect the resistance and
will stop upward movement.The window
will then lower approximately 11.8 in. (30
cm) to allow the object to be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is pulled
up continuously, the window will stop
upward movement then lower approxi-
mately 1 in. (2.5 cm). And if the power
window switch is pulled up continuously
again within 5 seconds after the window
is lowered by the automatic window
reversal feature, the automatic window
reversal will not operate.
✽✽
NOTICE
The automatic reverse feature for the
driver’s window is only active when the
“auto up” feature is used by fully
pulling up the switch. The automatic
reverse feature will not operate if the
window is raised using the halfway posi-
tion on the power window switch.
WARNING
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to avoid
injuries or vehicle damage. If an
object less than 0.16 in. (4 mm) in
diameter is caught between the
window glass and the upper win-
dow channel, the automatic reverse
window may not detect the resist-
ance and will not stop and reverse
direction.
OUN026013
Features of your vehicle
284
D080104AUN
Power window lock button
• The driver can disable the power win-
dow switches on the passenger doors
by depressing the power window lock
switch located on the driver’s door to
LOCK (pressed).
• When the power window lock switch
is ON, the driver’s master control
cannot operate the passenger door
power windows.
OEN046016
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do not
open or close two windows or
more at the same time. This will
also ensure the longevity of the
fuse.
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door and
the individual door window
switch in opposing directions at
the same time. If this is done, the
window will stop and cannot be
opened or closed.
WARNING - Windows
• NEVER leave the ignition key in
the vehicle.
• NEVER leave any child unattend-
ed in the vehicle. Even very
young children may inadvertently
cause the vehicle to move, entan-
gle themselves in the windows,
or otherwise injure themselves or
others.
• Always double check to make
sure all arms, hands, head and
other obstructions are safely out
of the way before closing a win-
dow.
• Do not allow children to play with
the power windows. Keep the dri-
ver’s door power window lock
switch in the LOCK position
(depressed). Serious injury can
result from unintentional window
operation by the child.
• Do not extend any head or arms
outside through the window
opening while driving.
429
Features of your vehicle
D090100AEN
Opening the hood
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the
hood. The hood should pop open
slightly.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the
hood slightly, pull the secondary latch
(1) inside of the hood center and lift
the hood (2).
3. Raise the hood. It will raise completely
by itself after it has been raised about
halfway.
D090200AEN
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the fol-
lowing:
• All filler caps in engine compartment
must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be removed
from the engine compartment.
2. Lower the hood halfway and push
down to securely lock in place.
HOOD
OEN046017
OEN046018
WARNING
• Before closing the hood, ensure
that all obstructions are removed
from the hood opening. Closing
the hood with an obstruction
present in the hood opening may
result in property damage or
severe personal injury.
• Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in the
engine compartment. Doing so
may cause a heat-induced fire.
• Always double check to be sure
that the hood is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the hood could open
while the vehicle is being driven,
causing a total loss of visibility,
which might result in an accident.
• Do not move the vehicle with the
hood in the raised position, as
vision is obstructed and the hood
could fall or be damaged.
WARNING
Open the hood after turning off the
engine on a flat surface, shifting
the shift lever to the P(Park) posi-
tion for automatic transaxle and to
the 1st(First) gear or R(Reverse) for
manual transaxle, and setting the
parking brake.
Features of your vehicle
304
D100100AUN
Opening the fuel filler door
The fuel filler door must be opened from
inside the vehicle by pushing the fuel
filler door opener button located on the
driver’s door.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the fuel filler door will not open
because ice has formed around it, tap
lightly or push on the door to break the
ice and release the door. Do not pry on
the door. If necessary, spray around the
door with an approved de-icer fluid (do
not use radiator anti-freeze) or move the
vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice
to melt.
1. Stop the engine.
2.To open the fuel filler door, push the
fuel filler door opener button.
3. Pull the fuel filler door (1) out to fully
open.
4.To remove the cap, turn the fuel tank
cap (2) counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.
D100200AUN
Closing the fuel filler door
1.To install the cap, turn it clockwise until
it “clicks” one time. This indicates that
the cap is securely tightened.
2. Close the fuel filler door and push it
lightly making sure that it is securely
closed.
D100300AEN-EU
FUEL FILLER DOOR
OEN046019
OEN046020
WARNING - Refueling
• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it
can cover your clothes or skin
and thus subject you to the risk
of fire and burns. Always remove
the fuel cap carefully and slowly.
If the cap is venting fuel or if you
hear a hissing sound, wait until
the condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap.
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refueling.
• Tighten the cap until it clicks one
time, otherwise the Check Engine
light will illuminate.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an acci-
dent.
431
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
Use only approved portable plas-
tic fuel containers designed to
carry and store gasoline.
• Do not use cellular phones while
refueling. Electric current and/or
electronic interference from cel-
lular phones can potentially
ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
• When refueling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related to
the engine can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling is
complete, check to make sure the
filler cap and filler door are
securely closed, before starting
the engine.
• DO NOT use matches or a lighter
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit
cigarette in your vehicle while at
a gas station especially during
refueling. Automotive fuel is
highly flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refueling
since you can generate static
electricity by touching, rubbing
or sliding against any item or fab-
ric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)
capable of producing static elec-
tricity. Static electricity discharge
can ignite fuel vapors resulting in
rapid burning. If you must re-
enter the vehicle, you should
once again eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity dis-
charge by touching a metal part
of the vehicle, away from the fuel
filler neck, nozzle or other gaso-
line source.
• When using an approved
portable fuel container, be sure to
place the container on the
ground prior to refueling. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling has
begun, contact with the vehicle
should be maintained until the
filling is complete.
(Continued)
WARNING - Refueling dan-
gers
Automotive fuels are flammable
materials. When refueling, please
note the following guidelines care-
fully. Failure to follow these guide-
lines may result in severe personal
injury, severe burns or death by fire
or explosion.
• Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station facility.
• Before refueling, note the loca-
tion of the Emergency Gasoline
Shut-Off, if available, at the gas
station facility.
• Before touching the fuel nozzle,
you should eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity dis-
charge by touching another metal
part of the vehicle, a safe dis-
tance away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle, or other gas source.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
324
D100500AUN
Emergency fuel filer door release
If the fuel filler door does not open using
the remote fuel filler door release, you
can open it manually. Unsnap and
remove the panel in the cargo area. Pull
the handle outward slightly.
D110000AEN
If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,
you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the
sunroof control lever located on the over-
head console.
The sunroof can only be opened, closed,
or tilted when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
✽✽
NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof
may not work properly due to freez-
ing conditions.
• After washing the car or after there is
rain, be sure to wipe off any water
that is on the sunroof before operating
it.
(Continued)
• If a fire breaks out during refuel-
ing, leave the vicinity of the vehi-
cle, and immediately contact the
manager of the gas station and
then contact the local fire depart-
ment or 911. Follow any safety
instructions they provide.
CAUTION
• Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel require-
ments" suggested in section 1.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, use only a genuine
HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent
specified for your vehicle. An
incorrect fuel filler cap can result
in a serious malfunction of the
fuel system or emission control
system.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type
of fuel spilled on painted surfaces
may damage the paint.
• After refueling, make sure the fuel
cap is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage in the event of
an accident.
CAUTION
Do not pull the handle excessively,
otherwise the luggage area trim or
release handle may be damaged.
OEN046021
SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
OEN046022
433
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
The sunroof cannot slide when it is in
the tilt position nor can it be tilted while
in an open or slide position.
D110100AEN
Sliding the sunroof
To open or close the sunroof (manual
slide feature), pull or push the sunroof
control lever backward or forward to the
first detent position.
Pulling the control lever downward also
closes the sunroof.
To open or close the sunroof completely
even when the lever is released (auto
slide feature), pull or push the sunroof
control lever backward or forward to the
second detent position. The sunroof will
slide all the way open or closed. To stop
the sunroof sliding at any point, pull or
push the sunroof control lever momentar-
ily in the opposite direction of sunroof
movement.
D110101AEN
Automatic reversal
If an object is detected while the sunroof
is closing automatically, it will reverse
direction, and then stop.
The auto reverse function does not work
if a small obstacle is between the sliding
glass and the sunroof sash. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the sunroof before
closing it.
CAUTION
Do not continue to move the sun-
roof control lever after the sunroof
is in the fully open, closed, or tilt
position(s). Damage to the motor or
system components could occur.
WARNING
Never adjust the sunroof or sun-
shade while driving. This could
result in loss of control and an acci-
dent that may cause death, serious
injury, or property damage.
OEN046023 OEN046024
Features of your vehicle
344
D110200AEN
Tilting the sunroof
To open or close the sunroof, push or pull
the sunroof control lever upward or
downward until the sunroof moves to the
desired position.
Pushing the control lever forward also
closes the sunroof.
D110300AEN
Sunshade
The sunshade will automatically open
with the glass panel when the glass
panel moves. Close it manually if you
want it closed.
OEN046025
CAUTION
• Periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the guide rail.
• If you try to open the sunroof when
the temperature is below freezing
or when the sunroof is covered
with snow or ice, the glass or the
motor could be damaged.
• While using sunroof for a long
time, a dust between sunroof and
roof panel can make a noise.
Open the sunroof and remove reg-
ularly the dust using clean cloth.
CAUTION
The sunroof is made to slide
together with the sunshade. Do not
leave the sunshade closed while
the sunroof is open.
OEN046026
WARNING - Sunroof
• Be careful that no heads, hands
and body parts are obstructing a
closing sunroof.
• Do not extend the face, neck,
arms or body outside the sunroof
while driving.
• Make sure your hands and head
are safely out of the way before
closing a sunroof.
435
Features of your vehicle
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is discon-
nected or discharged, or related fuse is
blown, you must reset your sunroof sys-
tem as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position and close the sunroof com-
pletely.
2. Release the control lever.
3. Pull and hold the control lever down-
ward until the sunroof tilts and slightly
moves up and down. Then, release
the lever.
4. Pull and hold the control lever down-
ward until the sunroof is operated as
follows;
TILT DOWN → SLIDE OPEN →
SLIDE CLOSE
Then, release the control lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof sys-
tem is reset.
❈ For more detailed information, contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
If the sunroof is not reset when the
vehicle battery is disconnected or
discharged, or related fuse is
blown, the sunroof may operate
improperly.
Features of your vehicle
364
DRIVER POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
D120000AEN
A driver position memory system is pro-
vided to store and recall the driver seat,
outside rearview mirror and steering
wheel positions with a simple button
operation.By saving the desired positions
into the system memory, different drivers
can reposition the driver seat, outside
rearview mirror and steering wheel based
upon their driving preference. If the bat-
tery is disconnected, the position memo-
ry will be lost and the driving positions
should be restored in the system.
✽✽
NOTICE
The buzzer sounds 10 times if there is a
malfunction of the memory system.
Have the driver position memory system
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Storing positions into memory
using the buttons on the door
D120101AEN
Storing driver’s seat positions
1. Shift the transaxle shift lever into P
while the ignition switch is ON.
2.Adjust the driver seat, outside
rearview mirror and steering wheel to
positions comfortable for the driver.
3. Press SET button on the control panel.
The system will beep once.
4. Press one of the memory buttons (1 or
2) within 5 seconds after pressing the
SET button. The system will beep
twice when memory has been suc-
cessfully stored.
WARNING
Never attempt to operate the driver
position memory system while the
vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of control,
and an accident causing death,
serious injury, or property damage.
OEN036100
437
Features of your vehicle
D120102AHM-EE
Recalling positions from memory
1. Shift the transmisson shift lever into P
(Park) under one of the followings:
• The ignition switch is ON.
• The driver’s door is opened while the
ignition switch is in the LOCK or ACC
position.
• Within 30 seconds after the driver’s
door is closed while the ignition switch
is in the LOCK or ACC position.
2.To recall the position in memory, press
the desired memory button (1 or 2).
The system will beep once, then the
driver seat, outside rearview mirror
and steering wheel will automatically
adjust to the stored positions.
Adjusting one of the control knobs for the
driver seat, outside rearview mirror and
steering wheel while the system is recall-
ing the stored positions will cause the
movement for that component to stop
and move in the direction that the control
knob is moved. Other components will
continue to the recalled position.
D120300AEN-EE
Easy access function
(if equipped)
With the shift lever in P position, the sys-
tem will move the steering wheel forward
or rearward automatically so you can
comfortably enter and exit the vehicle.
• Without smart key system
- It will move the steering wheel away
from the driver when the ignition key
is removed.
- It will move the steering wheel toward
the driver when the ignition key is
inserted.
• With smart key system
- It will move the steering wheel away
from the driver when the ignition
switch is turned to the LOCK position.
- It will move the steering wheel toward
the driver when the ignition switch is
turned to the ACC position.
✽✽
NOTICE
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer can
select the easy access function of the dri-
ver’s power seat.
If you want this feature, consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
D120400AEN
Reverse parking aid function
(if equipped)
While the vehicle is moving backward,
the outside rearview mirror(s) will move
downward to aid reverse parking.
According to the position of the outside
rearview mirror switch (1), the outside
rearview mirror(s) will operate as follows:
Type A
L : When the remote control outside
rearview mirror switch is selected to
the L position, both outside rearview
mirrors will move downward.
R :When the remote control outside
rearview mirror switch is selected to
the R position, only the passenger's
outside rearview mirror will move
downward.
WARNING
Use caution when recalling adjust-
ment memory while sitting in the
vehicle. Push the seat position con-
trol knob to the desired position
immediately if the seat moves too
far in any direction.
OEN037100
Features of your vehicle
384
Neutral : When the remote control out-
side rearview mirror switch is
placed in the middle position,
the outside rearview mirrors
will not operate while the vehi-
cle is moving backward.
Type B
L / R :When the remote control outside
rearview mirror switch is selected
to the L / R position, both outside
rearview mirrors will move down-
ward.
Neutral : When the remote control out-
side rearview mirror switch is
placed in the middle position,
the outside rearview mirrors
will not operate while the vehi-
cle is moving backward.
✽✽
NOTICE
The outside rearview mirrors will auto-
matically revert to their original posi-
tions under the following conditions:
1. Ignition switch is in the LOCK posi-
tion.
2. Shift lever is moved to any position
except R.
3. Remote control outside rearview mir-
ror switch is placed in the middle
position.
D310000AEN
To adjust the position of the accelerator
and brake pedals, turn the ignition switch
to the ON position with the shift lever in
the P position and push the switch.
If you push the portion of the switch,
the pedals move toward the driver.
If you push the portion of the switch,
the pedals move away from the driver.
D310100AEN
Setting the adjustable pedal posi-
tion
1. Be sure the parking brake is engaged.
2. Move the accelerator and brake ped-
als to the front most position by push-
ing the portion of the switch.
3. Adjust the seat position and the steer-
ing wheel angle properly.
4. Move the pedals toward you until you
can fully depress the brake pedal by
pushing the portion of the switch.
5. Depress the pedals a few times to get
used to the feel after adjusting.
OEN046203
POWER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED)
439
Features of your vehicle
D130100AEN
Power steering
Power steering uses energy from the
engine to assist you in steering the vehi-
cle. If the engine is off or if the power
steering system becomes inoperative,
the vehicle may still be steered, but it will
require increased steering effort.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power steer-
ing checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the power steering drive belt breaks
or if the power steering pump malfunc-
tions, the steering effort will greatly
increase.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the vehicle is parked for extended
periods outside in cold weather (below -
14°F/10°C), the power steering may
require increased effort when the engine
is first started. This is caused by
increased fluid viscosity due to the cold
weather and does not indicate a mal-
function.
When this happens, increase the engine
RPM by depressing accelerator until the
RPM reaches 1,500 rpm then release or
let the engine idle for two or three min-
utes to warm up the fluid.
CAUTION
Never hold the steering wheel
against a stop (extreme right or left
turn) for more than 5 seconds with
the engine running. Holding the
steering wheel for more than 5 sec-
onds in either position may cause
damage to the power steering
pump.
WARNING
• Adjust the pedals after parking
the vehicle on level ground.
Never attempt to adjust the ped-
als while the vehicle is moving.
• Never adjust the pedals with your
foot on the accelerator pedal as
this may result in increasing the
engine speed and acceleration.
• Make sure that you can fully
depress the brake pedal before
driving. Otherwise, you may not
be able to hold down the brake
pedal firmly in an emergency
stop.
STEERING WHEEL
Features of your vehicle
404
D130300AEN
Tilt steering
Tilt steering allows you to adjust the
steering wheel before you drive.You can
also raise it to give your legs more room
when you exit and enter the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be positioned
so that it is comfortable for you to drive,
while permitting you to see the instru-
ment panel warning lights and gauges.
D130301AEN
Manual type
To change the steering wheel angle, pull
down the lock-release lever (1), adjust
the steering wheel to the desired angle
(2) and the desired position (3), then pull
up the lock-release lever to lock the
steering wheel in place.Be sure to adjust
the steering wheel to the desired position
before driving.
D130302CEN
Electric type
Adjust the steering wheel angle (2) and
position (3) with the knob (1) while the
ignition switch is ON. Never adjust the
position of the steering wheel while driv-
ing.
OEN046202 OEN046030
WARNING
• Never adjust the angle of the
steering wheel while driving. You
may lose steering control and
cause severe personal injury,
death or accidents.
• After adjusting, push the steering
wheel both up and down to be
certain it is locked in position.
441
Features of your vehicle
D130500AUN
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn sym-
bol on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
✽✽
NOTICE
To sound the horn, press the area indi-
cated by the horn symbol on your steer-
ing wheel (see illustration). The horn
will operate only when this area is
pressed.
D140100AUN
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror to center on
the view through the rear window. Make
this adjustment before you start driving.
CAUTION
Do not strike the horn severely to
operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do
not press on the horn with a sharp-
pointed object.
MIRRORS
WARNING - Rear visibility
Do not place objects in the rear
seat or cargo area which would
interfere with your vision through
the rear window.
OEN046031
WARNING
Do not modify the inside mirror and
do not install a wide mirror. It could
result in injury, during an accident
or deployment of the air bag.
Features of your vehicle
424
D140101AUN
Day/night rearview mirror
Make this adjustment before you start
driving and while the day/night lever is in
the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce glare from the headlights of vehi-
cles behind you during night driving.
Remember that you lose some rearview
clarity in the night position.
D140105AEN
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with
compass and HomeLink
®
system
(if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror with a
Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass Display
and an Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System.During nighttime driving,
this feature will automatically detect and
reduce rearview mirror glare while the
compass indicates the direction the vehi-
cle is pointed. The HomeLink
®
Universal
Transceiver allows you to activate your
garage door(s), electric gate, home light-
ing, etc.
(1) Channel 1 button
(2) Channel 2 button
(3) Status indicator LED
(4) Channel 3 button
(5) Rear light sensor
(6) Dimming ON/OFF button
(7) Compass control button
(8) Compass display
OEN046033NOEN046032
Day
Night
443
Features of your vehicle
Automatic-Dimming Night Vision
Safety™ (NVS
®
) Mirror
The NVS
®
Mirror in your vehicle is the
most advanced way to reduce annoying
glare in the rearview mirror during any
driving situation. For more information
regarding NVS
®
mirrors and other appli-
cations, please refer to the Gentex web-
site:
www.gentex.com
Automatic-dimming function
Your mirror will automatically dim upon
detecting glare from the vehicles travel-
ing behind you. The auto-dimming func-
tion can be controlled by the Dimming
ON/OFF Button:
1. Pressing the button turns the auto-
dimming function OFF which is indicat-
ed by the green Status Indicator LED
turning off.
2. Pressing the button again turns the
auto-dimming function ON which is
indicated by the green Status Indicator
LED turning on.
✽✽
NOTICE
The mirror defaults to the ON position
each time the vehicle is started.
Z-Nav™ Compass Display
The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is also
equipped with a Z-Nav™ Compass that
shows the vehicle Compass heading in
the Display Window using the 8 basic
cardinal headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).
Compass function
The Compass can be turned ON and
OFF and will remember the last state
when the ignition is cycled. To turn the
display feature ON/OFF:
1. Press and release the button to
turn the display feature OFF.
2. Press and release the button again
to turn the display back ON.
Additional options can be set with press
and hold sequences of the button and
are detailed below.
There is a difference between magnetic
north and true north.The compass in the
mirror can compensate for this difference
when it knows the Magnetic Zone in
which it is operating.This is set either by
the dealer or by the user. The operating
Zone Numbers for North America are
shown in the figure on the following sec-
tion.
CAUTION
The NVS
®
Mirror automatically
reduces glare during driving condi-
tions based upon light levels moni-
tored in front of the vehicle and
from the rear of the vehicle. These
light sensors are visible through
openings in the front and rear of the
mirror case. Any object that would
obstructs either light sensor will
degrade the automatic dimming
control feature.
Features of your vehicle
444
To adjust the Zone setting:
1. Determine the desired Zone Number
based upon your current location on
the Zone Map.
2. Press and hold the button for more
than 3 but less than 6 seconds, the
current Zone Number will appear on
the display.
3. Pressing and holding the button
again will cause the numbers to incre-
ment (Note: they will repeat …13, 14,
15, 1, 2, …). Releasing the button
when the desired Zone Number
appears on the display will set the new
Zone.
4.Within about 5 seconds the compass
will start displaying a compass head-
ing again.
There are some conditions that can
cause changes to the vehicle magnets,
such as installing a ski rack or a CB
antenna. Body repair work on the vehicle
can also cause changes to the vehicle's
magnetic field. In these situations, the
compass will need to be re-calibrated to
quickly correct for these changes. To re-
calibrate the compass:
B520C05NF
445
Features of your vehicle
1. Press and hold the button for more
than 6 seconds. When the compass
memory is cleared a "C" will appear in
the display.
2.To calibrate the compass, drive the
vehicle in 2 complete circles at less
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System
The HomeLink® Wireless Control
System provides a convenient way to
replace up to three hand-held radio-fre-
quency (RF) transmitters with a single
built-in device.This innovative feature will
learn the radio frequency codes of most
current transmitters to operate devices
such as gate operators, garage door
openers, entry door locks, security sys-
tems, even home lighting. Both standard
and rolling code-equipped transmitters
can be programmed by following the out-
lined procedures. Additional HomeLink
®
information can be found at: www.home-
link.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
Retain the original transmitter of the RF
device you are programming for use in
other vehicles as well as for future
HomeLink
®
programming. It is also sug-
gested that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed HomeLink
®
buttons be
erased for security purposes.
Programming HomeLink
®
✽✽
NOTICE
• When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park the vehi-
cle outside of the garage.
• It is recommended that a new battery
be placed in the hand-held transmit-
ter of the device being programmed to
HomeLink
®
for quicker training and
accurate transmission of the radio-
frequency signal.
• Some vehicles may require the igni-
tion switch to be turned to the second
(or "accessories") position for pro-
gramming and/or operation of
HomeLink.
• In the event that there are still pro-
gramming difficulties or questions
after following the programming steps
listed below, contact HomeLink
®
at:
www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-
3515.
CAUTION
Before programming HomeLink
®
to
a garage door opener or gate oper-
ator, make sure that people and
objects are out of the way of the
device to prevent potential harm or
damage. Do not use HomeLink
®
with any garage door opener that
lacks the safety stop and reverse
features required by U.S. federal
safety standards (this includes any
garage door opener model manu-
factured before April 1, 1982). A
garage door that cannot detect an
object - signaling the door to stop
and reverse - does not meet current
U.S. federal safety standards. Using
a garage door opener without these
features increases the risk of seri-
ous injury or death.
Features of your vehicle
464
Standard programming
To train most devices, follow these
instructions:
1. For first-time programming, press and
hold the two outside buttons,
HomeLink
®
Channel 1 and Channel 3
Buttons, until the indicator light begins
to flash (after 20 seconds). Release
both buttons. Do not hold the buttons
for longer than 30 seconds.
2. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm) away
from the HomeLink
®
buttons while
keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both
the HomeLink
®
and hand-held trans-
mitter button.DO NOT release the but-
tons until step 4 has been completed.
4.While continuing to hold the buttons
the red Indicator Status LED will flash
slowly and then rapidly after
HomeLink
®
successfully trains to the
frequency signal from the hand-held
transmitter. Release both buttons.
5.Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink
®
button and observe the red
Status Indicator LED. If the indicator
light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and your device should
activate when the HomeLink
®
button is
pressed and released.
6.To program the remaining two
HomeLink
®
buttons, follow steps 2
through 5.
Rolling code programming
Rolling code devices which are "code-
protected" and manufactured after 1996
may be determined by the following:
• Reference the device owner's manual
for verification.
• The handheld transmitter appears to
program the HomeLink
®
Universal
Transceiver but does not activate the
device.
• Press and hold the trained HomeLink
button.The device has the rolling code
feature if the indicator light flashes rap-
idly and then turns solid after 2 sec-
onds.
To train rolling code devices, follow these
instructions:
1. At the garage door opener receiver
(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate
the "learn" or "smart" button. This can
usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the motor-
head unit. Exact location and color of
the button may vary by garage door
opener brand.
If there is difficulty locating the training
button, reference the device owner's
manual or please visit our Web site at
www.homelink.com.
2. Firmly press and release the "learn" or
"smart" button (which activates the
"training light").
✽✽
NOTICE
There are 30 seconds in which to initiate
step3.
3. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for two seconds and then release
the desired HomeLink
®
button. Repeat
the "press/hold/release" sequence a
second time to complete the program-
ming. (Some devices may require you
to repeat this sequence a third time to
complete the programming.)
4.Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink
®
button and observe the red
Status Indicator LED. If the indicator
light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and your device should
activate.
5.To program the remaining two
HomeLink
®
buttons, follow either steps
1 through 4 above for other Rolling
Code devices or steps 2 through 5 in
Standard Programming for standard
devices.
447
Features of your vehicle
Gate operator & Canadian program-
ming
During programming, your handheld
transmitter may automatically stop trans-
mitting. Continue to press the Integrated
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System but-
ton (note steps 2 through 4 in the
Standard Programming portion of this
document) while you press and re-press
("cycle") your handheld transmitter every
two seconds until the frequency signal
has been learned. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly after sever-
al seconds upon successful training.
Operating HomeLink
®
To operate, simply press and release the
programmed HomeLink
®
button.
Activation will now occur for the trained
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate
operator, security system, entry door
lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For con-
venience, the hand-held transmitter of
the device may also be used at any time.
Reprogramming a single HomeLink
®
button
To program a new device to a previously
trained HomeLink
®
button, follow these
steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
®
button. Do NOT release until step 4
has been completed.
2.When the indicator light begins to flash
slowly (after 20 seconds), position the
handheld transmitter 1 to 3 inches
away from the HomeLink
®
surface.
3. Press and hold the handheld transmit-
ter button. The HomeLink
®
indicator
light will flash, first slowly and then rap-
idly.
4.When the indicator light begins to flash
rapidly, release both buttons.
5.Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink
®
button and observe the red
Status Indicator LED. If the indicator
light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and your new device
should activate.
Erasing HomeLink
®
buttons
Individual buttons cannot be erased.
However, to erase all three programmed
buttons:
1.Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink
®
buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash-after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for
longer than 30 seconds.
The Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System is now in the training
(learn) mode and can be programmed at
any time following the appropriate steps
in the Programming sections above.
Features of your vehicle
484
FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3
IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. this device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2.This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
NVS
®
is a registered trademark and Z-
Nav™ is a trademark of the Gentex
Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan.
HomeLink
®
is a registered trademark
owned by Johnson Controls,
Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.
D140300AEN
Conversation mirror (if equipped)
The mirror is a convenient feature to help
the front passenger talk with rear pas-
sengers without turning the head or body
rearward.
To use the mirror, push the cover and
open it.
Adjust mirror angle to the desired posi-
tion.
Close the cover after use.
D140200AUN-EU
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust mirror angles before
driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both left-
hand and right-hand outside rearview
mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted
remotely with the remote switch.The mir-
ror heads can be folded back to prevent
damage during an automatic car wash or
when passing in a narrow street.
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror angle or
talk with rear passengers for a long
time while driving. You may lose
your steering control and cause an
accident that result in severe per-
sonal injury or death.
WARNING
The transceiver has been tested
and complies with FCC and
Industry Canada rules. Changes or
modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the
device.
OEN046146
WARNING - Rearview mir-
rors
• The right outside rearview mirror
is convex. Objects seen in the
mirror are closer than they
appear.
• Use your interior rearview mirror
or direct observation to deter-
mine the actual distance of fol-
lowing vehicles when changing
lanes.
449
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjust-
ing angles, but the motor contin-
ues to operate while the switch is
depressed. Do not depress the
switch longer than necessary, the
motor may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the out-
side rearview mirror by hand.
Doing so may damage the parts.
D140201AEN
Remote control
The electric remote control mirror switch
allows you to adjust the position of the
left and right outside rearview mirrors.To
adjust the position of either mirror, push
the switch (1) to R or L to select the right
side mirror or the left side mirror, then
press a corresponding point on the mirror
adjustment control to position the select-
ed mirror up, down, left or right.
After adjustment, put the switch into neu-
tral (center) position to prevent the inad-
vertent adjustment.
CAUTION
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the surface
of the glass. If ice should restrict
movement of the mirror, do not
force the mirror for adjustment. To
remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a
sponge or soft cloth with very warm
water.
CAUTION
If the mirror is jammed with ice, do
not adjust the mirror by force. Use
an approved spray de-icer (not radi-
ator antifreeze) to release the
frozen mechanism or move the
vehicle to a warm place and allow
the ice to melt.
WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehicle
is moving.This could result in loss
of control, and an accident which
could cause death, serious injury
or property damage.
OEN047037
Features of your vehicle
504
D140202AUN-EU
Folding the outside rearview mirror
To fold the outside rearview mirror, grasp
the housing of the mirror and then fold it
toward the rear of the vehicle.
D140203AEN
Automatic-dimming outside rearview
mirror (AUTO DIM) (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the auto-
matic-dimming outside rearview mirror, it
will operate at the same time you turn on
the auto-dimming function of the electric
chromic inside rearview mirror (ECM).
The automatic-dimming outside rearview
mirror will automatically dim upon detect-
ing glare from vehicles traveling behind
you.
OEN046215
451
Features of your vehicle
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1.Tachometer
2.Turn signal indicators
3. Speedometer
4. Engine temperature gauge
5.Warning and indicator lights
6. Shift position indicator
7. Odometer/Trip computer*
8. Fuel gauge
* : if equipped
OEN049040N-1
D150000AUN-EU
* The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
For more details refer to the "Gauges" in the next pages.
Features of your vehicle
524
D150100AUN
Instrument panel illumination
When the vehicle’s parking lights or
headlights are on, rotate the illumination
control knob to adjust the brightness of
the instrument panel illumination.
Gauges
D150201AUN
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the forward
speed of the vehicle.
The speedometer is calibrated in miles
per hour and/or kilometers per hour.
D150202AUN
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the approxi-
mate number of engine revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the correct
shift points and to prevent lugging and/or
over-revving the engine.
When the door is open, or if the engine is
not started within 1 minute, the tachome-
ter pointer may move slightly in ON posi-
tion with the engine OFF.This movement
is normal and will not affect the accuracy
of the tachometer once the engine is run-
ning.
OEN046181 OEN046044OEN046216
453
Features of your vehicle
D150203AUN
Engine temperature gauge
This gauge shows the temperature of the
engine coolant when the ignition switch
is ON.
Do not continue driving with an overheat-
ed engine.If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “If the engine overheats” in section 6.
OEN046047L
CAUTION
If the gauge pointer moves beyond
the normal range area toward the
“H” position, it indicates overheat-
ing that may damage the engine.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine within
the tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine dam-
age.
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot.The engine
coolant is under pressure and
could cause severe burns. Wait
until the engine is cool before
adding coolant to the reservoir.
Features of your vehicle
544
D150204BUN
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
The fuel tank capacity is given in sec-
tion 8.
The fuel gauge is supplemented by
a low fuel warning light, which will illumi-
nate when the fuel tank is near empty.
On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge
pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel
warning light may come on earlier than
usual due to the movement of fuel in the
tank.
D150205AEN-EU
Odometer/Tripmeter (if equipped)
Odometer
The odometer indicates the total dis-
tance the vehicle has been driven.
You will also find the odometer useful to
determine when periodic maintenance
should be performed.
✽✽
NOTICE
Federal and state laws forbid alteration
of the odometer of any vehicle with the
intent to change the mileage registered
on the odometer. The alteration may
void your warranty coverage.
OEN046048L
WARNING - Fuel gauge
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain addition-
al fuel as soon as possible after the
warning light comes on or when the
gauge indicator comes close to the
E level.
OEN046200N
CAUTION
Avoid driving with a very low fuel
level. If you run out of fuel, it could
cause the engine to misfire and
result in excessive loading of the
catalytic converter.
455
Features of your vehicle
Tripmeter
TRIP A:Tripmeter A
TRIP B:Tripmeter B
The tripmeter indicates the distance of
individual trips selected by the driver.
Tripmeter A or B can be selected by
pressing the TRIP button for less than 1
second.
Tripmeter A or B can be reset to 0.0 by
pressing the RESET button for 1 second
or more, and then releasing.
D150206AEN-EE
Trip computer (if equipped)
The trip computer is a microcomputer-
controlled driver information system that
displays information related to driving,
including odometer, tripmeter, driving
time, average speed, average fuel con-
sumption and distance to empty on the
display when the ignition switch is in the
ON position. All stored driving informa-
tion (except odometer) is reset if the bat-
tery is disconnected.
OEN046053N
OEN046052
OEN046051
OEN046052
Features of your vehicle
564
The odometer is always displayed until
the display is turned off.
Push the TRIP button for less than 1 sec-
ond to select tripmeter, driving time,
average speed, average fuel consump-
tion or distance to empty function as fol-
lows:
Odometer
The odometer indicates the total dis-
tance the vehicle has been driven.
You will also find the odometer useful to
determine when periodic maintenance
should be performed.
Tripmeter
TRIP A :Tripmeter A
TRIP B :Tripmeter B
This mode indicates the distance of indi-
vidual trips selected since the last trip-
meter reset.
The meter's working range is from 0.0 to
999.9 miles (0.0 to 999.9 km).
Pressing the RESET button for more
than 1 second, when the tripmeter (TRIP
A or TRIP B) is being displayed, clears
the tripmeter to zero (0.0).
OEN046049N
Tripmeter B
Average speed
Driving time
Average fuel consumption
Tripmeter A
Distance to empty
OEN046053N
457
Features of your vehicle
Distance to empty
This mode indicates the estimated dis-
tance to empty based on the current fuel
in the fuel tank and the amount of fuel
delivered to the engine. When the
remaining distance is below 30 miles (50
km), “----” will be displayed and the dis-
tance to empty indicator will blink.
The meter’s working range is from 30 to
1500 miles (50 to 1500 km).
Average speed
This mode calculates the average speed
of the vehicle since the last average
speed reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
average speed is calculated while the
engine is running.
Pressing the RESET button for more
than 1 second, when the average speed
is being displayed, clears the average
speed to zero (---).
Driving time
This mode indicates the total time trav-
eled since the last driving time reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
driving time is calculated while the
engine is running.
The meter’s working range is from
0:00~99:59.
Pressing the RESET button for more
than 1 second, when the driving time is
being displayed, clears the driving time to
zero (0:00).
OEN046056N OEN046055N OEN046054N
Features of your vehicle
584
Average fuel consumption
This mode calculates the average fuel
consumption from the total fuel used and
the distance since the last average con-
sumption reset.The total fuel used is cal-
culated from the fuel consumption input.
For an accurate calculation, drive more
than 0.03 miles (50 m).
Pressing the RESET button for more than
1 second, when the average fuel con-
sumption is being displayed, clears the
average fuel consumption to zero (----).
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the vehicle is not on level ground or
the battery power has been interrupt-
ed, the “Distance to empty” function
may not operate correctly.
The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 1.6 gallons (6
liters) of fuel are added to the vehicle.
• The fuel consumption and distance to
empty values may vary significantly
based on driving conditions, driving
habits, and condition of the vehicle.
• The distance to empty value is an esti-
mate of the available driving distance.
This value may differ from the actual
driving distance available.
D150300AEN
Warnings and indicators
All warning lights are checked by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine).Any light that does not illuminate
should be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
After starting the engine, check to make
sure that all warning lights are off. If any
are still on, this indicates a situation that
needs attention. When releasing the
parking brake, the brake system warning
light should go off.The fuel warning light
will stay on if the fuel level is low.
D150302AEN
Air bag warning light
This warning light will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
This light also comes on when the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) is
not working properly. If the AIR BAG
warning light does not come on, or con-
tinuously remains on after operating for
about 6 seconds when you turned the
ignition switch to the ON position or start-
ed the engine, or if it comes on while
driving, have the SRS inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OEN046186N
AIR
BAG
459
Features of your vehicle
D150303AEN
Anti-lock brake system
(ABS) warning light
This light illuminates if the ignition switch
is turned ON and goes off in approxi-
mately 3 seconds if the system is operat-
ing normally.
If the ABS warning light remains on,
comes on while driving, or does not
come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, this indicates
that there may be a malfunction with the
ABS.
If this occurs, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible. The normal braking
system will still be operational, but with-
out the assistance of the anti-lock brake
system.
Electronic brake force distri-
bution (EBD) system warning
light
If two warning lights shown
system illuminate at the
same time while driving, your
vehicle may have a malfunc-
tion with the ABS and EBD
system.
In this case, your ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally. Have the
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the ABS warning light or EBD warn-
ing light is on and stays on, the
speedometer or odometer/tripmeter
may not work. In this case, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
D150304AEN-EU
Seat belt warning
As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt
warning light will blink for approximately
6 seconds each time you turn the ignition
switch ON, regardless of belt fastening.
The warning light will blink again for
approximately 6 seconds when starting
the engine.
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition switch is turned ON
and/or START or if it is disconnected
after the ignition switch is turned ON, the
seat belt warning light and the seat belt
warning chime will operate for approxi-
mately 6 seconds until the belt is fas-
tened. If the driver's seat belt is not fas-
tened when the vehicle speed exceeds 6
mph (10 km/h), the seat belt warning light
and chime will operate for approximately
11 times with a pattern of 6 seconds on
and 24 seconds off until the belt is fas-
tened or the vehicle speed decreases
below 3 mph (5 km/h).
WARNING
If the both ABS and brake warning
lights are on and stay on, your vehi-
cle’s brake system will not work nor-
mally during sudden braking. In this
case, avoid high speed driving and
abrupt braking. Have your vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
Features of your vehicle
604
D150305AFD
Turn signal indicator
The blinking green arrows on the instru-
ment panel show the direction indicated
by the turn signals.If the arrow comes on
but does not blink, blinks more rapidly
than normal, or does not illuminate at all,
a malfunction in the turn signal system is
indicated.Your dealer should be consult-
ed for repairs.
This indicator also blinks when the haz-
ard warning switch is turned on.
D150306AUN
High beam indicator
This indicator illuminates when the head-
lights are on and in the high beam posi-
tion or when the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
D150307AEN
Engine oil pressure
warning light
This warning light indicates the engine oil
pressure is low.
If the warning light illuminates while driv-
ing:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and
stop.
2.With the engine off, check the engine
oil level. If the level is low, add oil as
required.
If the warning light remains on after
adding oil or if oil is not available, call an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
If the oil pressure warning light
stays on while the engine is run-
ning, serious engine damage may
result. The oil pressure warning
light comes on whenever there is
insufficient oil pressure. In normal
operation, it should come on when
the ignition switch is turned on,
then go out when the engine is
started. If the oil pressure warning
light stays on while the engine is
running, there is a serious malfunc-
tion.
If this happens, stop the car as
soon as it is safe to do so, turn off
the engine and check the oil level. If
the oil level is low, fill the engine oil
to the proper level and start the
engine again. If the light stays on
with the engine running, turn the
engine off immediately. In any
instance where the oil light stays on
when the engine is running, the
engine should be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer before
the car is driven again.
CAUTION
If the engine is not stopped imme-
diately after the engine oil pressure
warning light is illuminated, severe
damage could result.
461
Features of your vehicle
D150308AEN-EU
Parking brake & brake fluid
warning light
Parking brake warning
This light is illuminated when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in
the START or ON position. The warning
light should go off when the parking
brake is released while engine is run-
ning.
The parking brake warning chime will
sound to remind you that the parking
brake is applied when you are driving
above 10 km/h (6 mph). Always release
the parking brake before you drive.
Low brake fluid level warning
If the warning light remains on, it may
indicate that the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
If the warning light remains on:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2.With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required.Then check all brake
components for fluid leaks.
3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are
found, the warning light remains on or
the brakes do not operate properly.
Have the vehicle towed to any author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer for a brake sys-
tem inspection and necessary repairs.
Your vehicle is equipped with a dual-
diagonal braking system.This means you
still have braking on two wheels even if
one of the brake circuits is damaged or
malfunctions.With only one of the circuits
working, more than normal pedal travel
and greater pedal pressure are required
to stop the car. Also, the car will not stop
in as short a distance with only a portion
of the brake system working. If the
brakes fail while you are driving, shift to a
lower gear for additional engine braking
and stop the car as soon as it is safe to
do so.
To check bulb operation, check whether
the parking brake and brake fluid warning
light illuminates when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
D150331CEN
Low tire pressure
indicator
The low tire pressure telltale comes on
for 3 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position.
If the warning light does not come on, or
continuously remains on after coming on
for about 3 seconds when you turned the
ignition switch to the ON position, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System is not
working properly.If this occurs, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
This warning light will also illuminate if
one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. You should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible. If
the warning light illuminates while driv-
ing, reduce vehicle speed immediately
and stop the vehicle. Avoid hard braking
and overcorrecting at the steering wheel.
Inflate the tires to the proper pressure as
indicated on the vehicle’s tire information
placard.
✽✽
NOTICE
The TPMS is not a replacement for nor-
mal tire maintenance. Tire inflation
should be checked on a regular basis.
Refer to the TPMS instructions and
warnings in section 5.
WARNING
Driving the vehicle with a warning
light on is dangerous. If the brake
warning light remains on, have the
brakes checked and repaired imme-
diately by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Features of your vehicle
624
D150332AEN
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator comes
on for 3 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position. If the warn-
ing light does not come on, or continu-
ously remains on after coming on for
about 3 seconds when you turned the
ignition switch to the ON position, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System is not
working properly.If this occurs, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
The warning light also comes on and
stays on when there is a problem with the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
If this happens, the system may not mon-
itor the tire pressure. Have the system
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
D150312AUN
Shift pattern indicator
This indicator displays which automatic
transaxle shift position is selected.
D150313AEN
Charging system warning
light
This warning light indicates a malfunction
of either the generator or electrical
charging system.
If the warning light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion:
1. Drive to the nearest safe location.
2.With the engine off, check the genera-
tor drive belt for looseness or break-
age.
3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob-
lem exists somewhere in the electrical
charging system. Have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer correct the problem
as soon as possible.
WARNING - Low tire pres-
sure
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and can
contribute to loss of vehicle control
and increased braking distances.
Continued driving on low pressure
tires will cause the tires to overheat
and fail.
TPMS
WARNING - Safe stopping
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
• If you feel any vehicle instability,
immediately take your foot off the
accelerator, apply the brakes
gradually and with light force,
and slowly move to a safe posi-
tion off the road.
463
Features of your vehicle
D150316AEN
Door and tailgate ajar
warning light
This warning light illuminates when a
door (or tailgate) is not closed securely
with the ignition switch in any position.
The warning light indicates which door
(or tailgate) is open.
D150317DEN-EU
Immobilizer indicator
(if equipped)
If any of the following occurs in a vehicle
equipped with the smart key, the immobi-
lizer indicator illuminates, blinks or the
light goes off.
• When the smart key is in the vehicle, if
the ignition switch is depressed, the
indicator will illuminate for a few min-
utes to indicate that you will be able to
start the engine, and if the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, the
indicator will illuminate until the engine
is started. However, when the smart
key is not in the vehicle, if the ignition
switch is depressed, the indicator will
blink for a few minutes to indicate that
you will not be able to start the engine,
and the ignition switch is not rotated.
• When the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position from the ACC position
without the smart key in the vehicle,
the indicator light turns off after blink-
ing.
• When the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and the indicator turns
off after 2 seconds, the system may
have a problem. Have the vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• When the battery is weak, if the igni-
tion switch is depressed, the indicator
will blink and you will not be able to
start the engine.However, you may still
be able to start the engine by inserting
the smart key in the ignition switch. If
smart key system related parts have a
problem, the indicator blinks.
Features of your vehicle
644
D150318AUN
Low fuel level warning light
This warning light indicates the fuel tank
is nearly empty. When it comes on, you
should add fuel as soon as possible.
Driving with the fuel level warning light on
or with the fuel level below “E” can cause
the engine to misfire and damage the
catalytic converter.
D150319AUN
Low washer fluid level
warning light (if equipped)
This warning light indicates the washer
fluid reservoir is near empty. Refill the
washer fluid as soon as possible.
D150320AEN-EU
Malfunction indicator (MIL)
(check engine light)
This indicator light is part of the Engine
Control System which monitors various
emission control system components. If
this light illuminates while driving, it indi-
cates that a potential malfunction has
been detected somewhere in the emis-
sion control system.
This light will also illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-
tion, and will go out in a few seconds
after the engine is started. If it illuminates
while driving, or does not illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, take your vehicle to your near-
est authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
have the system checked.
Generally, your vehicle will continue to be
drivable, but have the system checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer promptly.
D150323AUN-EU
ESC indicator (Electronic
Stability Control)
Type A
The ESC indicator will illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned ON, but
should go off after approximately 3 sec-
onds. When the ESC is on, it monitors
the driving conditions and under normal
driving conditions, the ESC light will
remain off. When a slippery or low trac-
tion condition is encountered, the ESC
will operate, and the ESC indicator will
blink to indicate the ESC is operating.
Type B
The ESC indicator will illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned ON, but
should go off after approximately 3 sec-
onds. When the ESC is on, it monitors
the driving conditions.Under normal driv-
ing conditions, the ESC indicator will
remain off. When a slippery or low trac-
tion condition is encountered, the ESC
will operate, and the ESC indicator will
blink to indicate the ESC is operating.
But, if the ESC system malfunctions the
indicator illuminates and stays on. Take
your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and have the system checked.
CAUTION
• Prolonged driving with the
Emission Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light illumi-
nated may cause damage to the
emission control systems which
could effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
•
If the
Emission
Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light illumi-
nates, potential catalytic converter
damage is possible which could
result in loss of engine power.
Have the Engine Control System
inspected as soon as possible by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CHECK
CHECK
ESC
465
Features of your vehicle
D150324AEN-EU
ESC OFF indicator
Type A
The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned ON,
but should go off after approximately 3
seconds. To switch to ESC function off,
press the ESC OFF button. The ESC
OFF indicator will illuminate indicating
the ESC is deactivated. If this indicator
stays on when ESC OFF is not selected,
the ESC may have a malfunction. Take
your car to an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er and have the system checked.
Type B
The ESC OFF indicator will illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned ON,
but should go off after approximately 3
seconds. To switch to ESC OFF mode,
press the ESC OFF button. The ESC
OFF indicator will illuminate indicating
the ESC is deactivated.
D150325AEN
Cruise indicator
CRUISE indicator
The indicator light illuminates when the
cruise control system is enabled.
The cruise indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster is illuminated when the
cruise control ON-OFF button on the
steering wheel is pushed.
The indicator light turns off when the
cruise control ON-OFF button is pushed
again. For more information about the
use of cruise control, refer to “Cruise
control system” in section 5.
Cruise SET indicator
The indicator light illuminates when the
cruise function switch (COAST/SET or
RES/ACCEL) is ON.
The cruise SET indicator light in the
instrument cluster is illuminated when
the cruise control switch (COAST/SET or
RES/ACCEL) is pushed.The cruise SET
indicator light does not illuminate when
the cruise control switch (CANCEL) is
pushed or the system is disengaged.
D150327AUN
Key reminder warning chime
If the driver’s door is opened while the
ignition key is left in the ignition switch
(ACC or LOCK position), the key
reminder warning chime will sound. This
is to prevent you from locking your keys
in the vehicle.The chime sounds until the
key is removed from the ignition switch or
the driver’s door is closed.
ESC
OFF
SET
CRUISE
Features of your vehicle
664
D150336BEN-EU
AWD system warning light
(if equipped)
When the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, the AWD system warning
light will come on and then go off in a few
seconds.
D150337AEN-EU
AWD LOCK indicator
(if equipped)
The AWD LOCK indicator light is illumi-
nated when the AWD LOCK button is
pushed.The purpose of this AWD LOCK
mode is to increase the drive power
when driving on wet pavement, snow-
covered roads and/or off-road. The AWD
LOCK indicator light is turned off by
pushing the button again
D150338BEN
KEY OUT indicator
(if equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON position, if any door is open, the sys-
tem checks for the smart key. If the
smart key is not in the vehicle, the indi-
cator will blink, and if all doors are
closed, the chime will also sound for
about 5 seconds. The indicator will turn
off while the vehicle is moving. Keep the
smart key in the vehicle.
CAUTION
If the AWD system warning light
( ) illuminates, this indicates that
there is a malfunction in the AWD
system. If this occurs, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
KEY
OUT
CAUTION
Do not use AWD LOCK mode on dry
paved roads or highway, it can
cause noise, vibration or damage of
AWD related parts.
AWD
LOCK
467
Features of your vehicle
D170000AEN
The rear parking assist system assists
the driver during backward movement of
the vehicle by chiming if any object is
sensed within a distance of 47 in. (120
cm) behind the vehicle. This system is a
supplemental system and it is not intend-
ed to nor does it replace the need for
extreme care and attention of the driver.
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the back sensors are limit-
ed. Whenever backing-up, pay as much
attention to what is behind you as you
would in a vehicle without a rear parking
assist system.
Operation of the rear parking
assist system
D170101AEN
Operating condition
• This system will activate when backing
up with the ignition switch ON.
If the vehicle is moving at a speed over
3 mph (5 km/h), the system may not be
activated correctly.
• The sensing distance while the rear
parking assist system is in operation is
approximately 47 in. (120 cm).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the closest
one will be recognized first.
D170102AUN
Types of warning sound
• When an object is 47 in. to 32 in. (120
cm to 81 cm) from the rear bumper:
Buzzer beeps intermittently.
• When an object is 31 in. to 16 in. (80
cm to 41 cm) from the rear bumper:
Buzzer beeps more frequently.
• When an object is within 15 in. (40 cm)
of the rear bumper:
Buzzer sounds continuously.
REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OEN046058
WARNING
The rear parking assist system is a
supplementary function only. The
operation of the rear parking assist
system can be affected by several
factors (including environmental
conditions). It is the responsibility
of the driver to always check the
area behind the vehicle before and
while backing up.
Sensors
Features of your vehicle
684
D170200AEN
Non-operational conditions of
rear parking assist system
The rear parking assist system may
not operate properly when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will
operate normally when the moisture
has been cleared.)
2.The sensor is covered with foreign
matter, such as snow or water, or the
sensor cover is blocked. (It will operate
normally when the material is removed
or the sensor is no longer blocked.)
3.Driving on uneven road surfaces
(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, gradi-
ent).
4. Objects generating excessive noise
(vehicle horns, loud motorcycle
engines, or truck air brakes) are within
range of the sensor.
5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.
6.Wireless transmitters or mobile phones
are within range of the sensor.
7.The sensor is covered with snow.
8.Trailer towing
The detecting range may decrease
when:
1.The sensor is stained with foreign mat-
ter such as snow or water. (The sens-
ing range will return to normal when
removed.)
2. Outside air temperature is extremely
hot or cold.
The following objects may not be rec-
ognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,
chains or small poles.
2. Objects which tend to absorb the sen-
sor frequency such as clothes, spongy
material or snow.
3. Undetectable objects smaller than 40 in.
(1 m) in height and narrower than 6 in.
(14 cm) in diameter.
D170300AEN
Rear parking assist system pre-
cautions
• The rear parking assist system may
not sound sequentially depending on
the speed and shapes of the objects
detected.
• The rear parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has been
modified or damaged. Any non-factory
installed equipment or accessories
may also interfere with the sensor per-
formance.
• The sensor may not recognize objects
less than 15 in. (40 cm) from the sen-
sor, or it may sense an incorrect dis-
tance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is frozen or stained
with snow, dirt, or water, the sensor
may be inoperative until the stains are
removed using a soft cloth.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the sen-
sor. Sensor damage could occur.
469
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
This system can only sense objects with-
in the range and location of the sensors;
It can not detect objects in other areas
where sensors are not installed. Also,
small or slim objects, such as poles or
objects located between sensors may not
be detected by the sensors.
Always visually check behind the vehi-
cle when backing up.
Be sure to inform any drivers of the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the
system regarding the systems capabili-
ties and limitations.
D170400AEN
Self-diagnosis
If you don’t hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds intermit-
tently when shifting the gear to the R
(Reverse) position, this may indicate a
malfunction in the rear parking assist sys-
tem. If this occurs, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
D180000AUN
The hazard warning flasher should be
used whenever you find it necessary to
stop the car in a hazardous location.
When you must make such an emer-
gency stop, always pull off the road as far
as possible.
The hazard warning lights are turned on
by pushing in the hazard switch. This
causes all turn signal lights to blink. The
hazard warning lights will operate even
though the key is not in the ignition
switch.
To turn the hazard warning lights off,
push the switch a second time.
WARNING
Pay close attention when the vehi-
cle is driven close to objects on the
road, particularly pedestrians, and
especially children. Be aware that
some objects may not be detected
by the sensors, due to the object’s
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effectiveness of
the sensor. Always perform a visu-
al inspection to make sure the vehi-
cle is clear of all obstructions
before moving the vehicle in any
direction.
WARNING
Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to
the vehicle or injuries to its occu-
pants due to a rear parking assist
system malfunction. Always drive
safely and cautiously.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
OEN046059
Features of your vehicle
704
D190100AUN
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to prevent
the battery from being discharged.The
system automatically turns off the park-
ing lights when the driver removes the
ignition key and opens the driver-side
door (in that order).
• With this feature, the parking lights will
be turned off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the ignition key is removed, per-
form the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON
again using the light switch on the
steering column.
D190200AEN
Headlight escort function
(if equipped)
The headlights (and/or taillights) remain
on for approximately 20 minutes after the
ignition key is removed or turned to the
ACC or LOCK position.However, if the dri-
ver’s door is opened and closed, the
headlights are turned off after 30 seconds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the transmit-
ter (or smart key) twice or turning off the
light switch from the headlight or Auto
light position.
D190300AEN
Rescue mode function
(if equipped)
If your vehicle has any problem on the
vehicle network system, the headlights
(low beam) turn on automatically with the
ignition switch in the ON position even
though the headlight switch is not turned
on.At this time, the emergency lighting is
not turned off when the headlight switch
is turned off.
D190400AUN
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and a
Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at the
end of the control lever to one of the fol-
lowing positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Parking light position
(3) Headlight position
(4) Auto light position (if equipped)
LIGHTING
CAUTION
If the rescue mode occurs, have
your vehicle checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as
possible.
OEN0460060N
CAUTION
If the driver gets out of the vehicle
through other doors (except driver's
door), the battery saver function
does not operate and the headlight
escort function does not turn off
automatically. Therefore, it causes
the battery to be discharged. In this
case, make sure to turn off the lamp
before getting out of the vehicle.
471
Features of your vehicle
D190401AUN
Parking light position ( )
When the light switch is in the parking
light position (1st position), the tail, posi-
tion, license and instrument panel lights
are ON.
D190402AUN
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the headlight
position (2nd position), the head, tail,
position, license and instrument panel
lights are ON.
✽✽
NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlights.
D190403AUN
Auto light position (if equipped)
When the light switch is in the AUTO light
position, the taillights and headlights will
be turned ON or OFF automatically
depending on the amount of light outside
the vehicle.
OEN040062OEN040061 OEN040063
Features of your vehicle
724
D190500AUN
High beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you.Pull it back
for low beams.
The high beam indicator will light when
the headlight high beams are switched on.
To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not leave the lights on for a
prolonged time while the engine is not
running.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the normal
(low beam) position when released. The
headlight switch does not need to be on
to use this flashing feature.
CAUTION
• Never place anything over sensor
(1) located on the instrument
panel. This will ensure better
auto-light system control.
• Don’t clean the sensor using a
window cleaner. The cleaner may
leave a light film which could
interfere with sensor operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of metallic coating on
the front windshield, the Auto
light system may not work prop-
erly.
OEN040065 OEN040064
WARNING
Do not use high beam when there
are other vehicles. Using high beam
could obstruct the other driver's
vision.
473
Features of your vehicle
D190600AUN
Turn signals and lane change sig-
nals
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on the
turn signals, move the lever up or down
(A). Green arrow indicators on the instru-
ment panel indicate which turn signal is
operating. They will self-cancel after a
turn is completed. If the indicator contin-
ues to flash after a turn, manually return
the lever to the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the turn
signal lever slightly and hold it in position
(B).The lever will return to the OFF posi-
tion when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the
turn signal bulbs may be burned out and
will require replacement.
✽✽
NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally quick
or slow, a bulb may be burned out or
have a poor electrical connection in the
circuit.
D190700AEN-EU
Front fog light (if equipped)
Fog lights are used to provide improved
visibility when visibility is poor due to fog,
rain or snow, etc. The fog lights will turn
on when fog light switch is pressed after
the headlights (low beam) are turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, press the switch
again.
OEN040066 OEN046067
CAUTION
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lights when visibility is poor.
Features of your vehicle
744
A :Wiper speed control
· MIST – Single wipe
· OFF – Off
· INT – Intermittent wipe
AUTO – AUTO control wipe
· LO – Low wiper speed
· HI – High wiper speed
B : Intermittent or Auto control wipe
time adjustment
C :Wash with brief wipes
D : Rear wiper/washer control
· – Spraying washer fluid
· ON – Intermittent wipe after some
normal wipe
· OFF – Off
· – Wash with brief wipes
WIPERS AND WASHERS
Type A
Type B
OUN028371N/OEN040311/OEN048314N/OEN040313
Windshield wiper/washer Rear window wiper/washer
(if equipped)
Type A
Type B
475
Features of your vehicle
D200100AEN-EU
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the ignition
switch is turned ON.
MIST : For a single wiping cycle, push
the lever upward and release it
with the lever in the OFF position.
The wipers will operate continu-
ously if the lever is pushed
upward and held.
OFF: Wiper is not in operation
INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. Use this
mode in a light rain or mist.To vary
the speed setting, turn the speed
control knob(1).
LO : Normal wiper speed
HI : Fast wiper speed
✽✽
NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of snow
or ice on the windshield, defrost the
windshield for about 10 minutes, or
until the snow and/or ice is removed
before using the windshield wipers to
ensure proper operation.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When you operate the wipers, if your
vehicle has a problem in any part of
the wiper operation system, the wiper
may operate in the LO mode regard-
less of the wiper switch position. In
this case, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
• When the ignition key is removed, the
wiper blade sometimes may move
slightly for reducing the deterioration
of the windshield wipers.
OEN048069N
OUN028227N-1
OEN040315
Type B
Type A
Type C
Fast
Slow
Fast
Fast
Slow
Slow
Features of your vehicle
764
D200101AEN
Auto control (if equipped)
The rain sensor located on the upper end
of the windshield glass senses the
amount of rainfall and controls the wiping
cycle for the proper interval. The more it
rains, the faster the wiper operates.
When the rain stops, the wiper stops.
To vary the speed setting, turn the speed
control knob (1).
If the ignition switch is turned ON when
the wiper switch is set in AUTO mode, or
the wiper switch is set in AUTO mode
when the ignition switch is ON, or the
speed control knob is turned upward
when the wiper switch is in AUTO mode,
the wiper will operate once to perform a
self-check of the system. Set the wiper to
OFF position when the wiper is not in use.
CAUTION
When the ignition switch is ON and
the windshield wiper switch is
placed in the AUTO mode, use cau-
tion in the following situations to
avoid any injury to the hands or
other parts of the body:
• Do not touch the upper end of the
windshield glass facing the rain
sensor.
• Do not wipe the upper end of the
windshield glass with a damp or
wet cloth.
• Do not put pressure on the wind-
shield glass.
CAUTION
When washing the vehicle, set the
wiper switch in the OFF position to
stop the auto wiper operation.
The wiper may operate and be dam-
aged if the switch is set in the AUTO
mode while washing the vehicle.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the pas-
senger side windshield glass.
Damage to system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
When starting the vehicle in winter,
set the wiper switch in the OFF
position. Otherwise, wipers may
operate and ice may damage the
windshield wiper blades. Always
remove all snow and ice and defrost
the windshield properly prior to
operating the windshield wipers.
OEN048187N
OEN048187
Type A
Rain sensor
Rain sensor
Type B
477
Features of your vehicle
D200200AUN
Windshield washers
In the OFF position, pull the lever gently
toward you to spray washer fluid on the
windshield and to run the wipers 1-3
cycles.
Use this function when the windshield is
dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will con-
tinue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check the
washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not
sufficient, you will need to add appropri-
ate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid
to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the
passenger side.
CAUTION
To prevent possible damage to the
washer pump, do not operate the
washer when the fluid reservoir is
empty.
WARNING
Do not use the washer in freezing
temperatures without first warming
the windshield with the defrosters;
the washer solution could freeze on
contact with the windshield and
obscure your vision.
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers or windshield, do not
operate the wipers when the
windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
arms and other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
OUN028229N-1
OEN040070
Type B
Type A
Features of your vehicle
784
D200300AEN-EE
Rear window wiper and washer
switch (if equipped)
The rear window wiper and washer
switch is located at the end of the wiper
and washer switch lever. Turn the switch
to desired position to operate the rear
wiper and washer.
- Spraying washer fluid and wiping
ON - Intermittent wiper operation after
some normal wiper operation
OFF - Wiper is not in operation
- Wash with brief wipes
D210000AEN
INTERIOR LIGHT
CAUTION
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine
is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
OEN048071N
OEN040071
Type A
Type B
WARNING
Do not use the interior lights when
driving in the dark. Accidents could
happen because the view may be
obscured by interior lights.
479
Features of your vehicle
D210100AEN-EU
Map lamp
- 1st row
The light comes on when any door is
opened regardless of the ignition switch
position.
When doors are unlocked by the trans-
mitter (or smart key), the light comes on
for approximately 30 seconds as long as
any door is not open. The light goes out
gradually after approximately 30 seconds
if the door is closed. However, if the igni-
tion switch is ON or all doors are locked,
the light will turn off immediately.
If a door is opened with the ignition
switch in the ACC or LOCK position, the
light stays on for about 20 minutes.
However, if a door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ON position, the
light stays on continuously.
• : Push the switch to turn the
map lamp on or off. This light
produces a spot beam for con-
venient use as a map lamp at
night or as a personal lamp for
the driver and the front pas-
senger.
• MOOD : Push the switch to turn the
mood lamp on or off.
• DOME : Push the switch to turn the
rear room lamp (2nd row) on or
off.
- 2nd row (if equipped)
Push the switch to turn the map lamp on
or off.
This light produces a spot beam for con-
venient use as a map lamp at night or as
a personal lamp for the rear passenger.
OEN046076OEN046074N
Features of your vehicle
804
D210200AEN
Room lamp
- 2nd row
• DOOR : In the DOOR position, the light
comes on when any door is
opened regardless of the igni-
tion switch position.
When doors are unlocked by
the transmitter (or smart key),
the light comes on for approxi-
mately 30 seconds as long as
any door is not open.The light
goes out gradually after
approximately 30 seconds if
the door is closed. However, if
the ignition switch is ON or all
doors are locked, the light will
turn off immediately.
If a door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ACC or
LOCK position, the light stays
on for about 20 minutes.
However, if a door is opened
with the ignition switch in the
ON position, the light stays on
continuously.
• ROOM : In the ROOM position, the light
stays on at all times.
- 3rd row
• : Push the switch to turn the
map lamp on or off. This light
produces a spot beam for con-
venient use as a map lamp at
night or as a personal lamp for
the rear passenger.
• DOOR : The light comes on when the
tailgate is opened.
OEN046078OEN046075
CAUTION
Do not leave the switch in this posi-
tion for an extended period of time
when the vehicle is not running.
481
Features of your vehicle
D210300AEN
Luggage lamp (if equipped)
If the switch is pushed, the light comes
on when the tailgate is opened.
D210600AEN
Puddle lamp (if equipped)
The puddle lamp comes ON when the
door is opened to assist entering or exit-
ing the vehicle.
When doors are unlocked by the trans-
mitter (or smart key), the light comes on
for approximately 30 seconds as long as
any door is not open. The light goes out
gradually after approximately 30 seconds
if the door is closed. However, if the igni-
tion switch is ON or all doors are locked,
the light will turn off immediately.
If a door is opened with the ignition
switch in the ACC or LOCK position, the
light stays on for about 20 minutes.
However, if a door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ON position, the
light stays on continuously.
D210400AEN
Door courtesy lamp
(if equipped)
The door courtesy lamp comes ON when
the door is opened to assist entering or
exiting the vehicle. It also serves as a
warning to passing vehicles that the vehi-
cle door is open.
OEN046077 OEN046189 OEN046188
Features of your vehicle
824
D210500AUN
Glove box lamp
The glove box lamp comes on when the
glove box is opened.
The parking lights or headlights must be
ON for the glove box lamp to function.
D210600AUN
Vanity mirror lamp
Opening the lid of the vanity mirror will
automatically turn on the mirror light.
OEN048080 OEN046081
483
Features of your vehicle
D220000AUN
✽✽
NOTICE
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to “Windshield
defrosting and defogging” in this sec-
tion.
D220100AEN
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from the
rear window, while the engine is running.
To activate the rear window defroster,
press the rear window defroster button
located in the center facia switch panel.
The indicator on the rear window
defroster button illuminates when the
defroster is ON.
If there is heavy accumulation of snow on
the rear window, brush it off before oper-
ating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 20 minutes
or when the ignition switch is turned off.
To turn off the defroster, press the rear
window defroster button again.
D220101AEN
Outside rearview mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the out-
side rearview mirror defrosters, they will
operate at the same time you turn on the
rear window defroster.
D220200AEN
Front windshield deicer
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the front
windshield deicer, it will be operating at
the same time you operate the rear win-
dow defroster.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the conduc-
tors bonded to the inside surface of
the rear window, never use sharp
instruments or window cleaners
containing abrasives to clean the
window.
OEN046090
OEN046091
Type A
Type B
DEFROSTER
Features of your vehicle
844
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OEN046093N/OEN046095
1. Fan speed control knob
2. Mode selection knob
3.Temperature control knob
4. Air conditioning button
5. Air intake control button
6. Rear window defroster button
7. Rear climate control selection button
8. Rear fan speed control knob
9. Rear mode selection button
10. Rear temperature control knob
D230000AEN
■■
Front climate control
■■
Rear climate control (if equipped)
485
Features of your vehicle
D230100AEN
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
5.Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the
air conditioning system on.
OEN046097
Features of your vehicle
864
❈❈
2nd row outlet vents (E)
• The air flow of the 2nd row outlet vents
is controlled by the front climate control
system and delivered through the
inside air duct of the front doors. If the
door is open or not closed completely,
the air flow of the 2nd row outlet vent is
not delivered properly. Make sure the
front doors are closed completely.
• The air flow of the 2nd row outlet vents
may be weaker than the instrument
panel vents for the long air duct in the
front doors.
• Close the air vents in cold weather.The
air flow of the 2nd row outlet vents may
cool a little during heating operation.
(Use the 2nd row outlet vents during
cooling operation.)
D230101AEN-EU
Mode selection
The mode selection knob controls the
direction of the air flow through the venti-
lation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dash-
board outlets, or windshield. Six symbols
are used to represent MAX A/C, Face,
Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost
air position.
The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the
inside of the vehicle faster.
MAX A/C-Level (B, D, E)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face.
In this mode, the air conditioning and the
recirculated air position will be selected
automatically.
Face-Level (B, D, E)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face.Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, D, E, C, F)
Air flow is directed towards the face and
the floor.
Off-Mode
The fan is turned off.
OEN046096N
487
Features of your vehicle
Floor-Level (C, F, A, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air being
directed to the windshield and side win-
dow defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, F, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor
and the windshield with a small amount
directed to the side window defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed
separately using the horizontal thumb-
wheel. To close the vent, rotate it left to
the maximum position.To open the vent,
rotate it right to the desired position.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
D230102AUN
Temperature control
The temperature control knob allows you
to control the temperature of the air flow-
ing from the ventilation system. To
change the air temperature in the pas-
senger compartment, turn the knob to
the right position for warm and hot air or
left position for cooler air.
OEN046100OEN046099
Features of your vehicle
884
D230103AEN
Air intake control
This is used to select the outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
push the control button.
Recirculated air position
The indicator light on the
button illuminates when the
recirculated air position is
selected.
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
the passenger compart-
ment will be drawn through
the heating system and
heated or cooled according
to the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
The indicator light on the
button illuminates when the
outside (fresh) air position is
selected.
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air enters
the vehicle from outside and
is heated or cooled accord-
ing to the function selected.
✽✽
NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in the
recirculated air position (without air
conditioning selected) may cause fog-
ging of the windshield and side windows
and the air within the passenger com-
partment may become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected will result in excessive-
ly dry air in the passenger compart-
ment.
OEN046101
489
Features of your vehicle
D230104AUN-EU
Fan speed control
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control knob allows you to
control the fan speed of the air flowing
from the ventilation system. To change
the fan speed, turn the knob to the right
for higher speed or left for lower speed.
Setting the mode selection knob to the
OFF position turns off the fan.
D230105AUN
Air conditioning
Push the A/C button to turn the air condi-
tioning system on (indicator light will illu-
minate).Push the button again to turn the
air conditioning system off.
WARNING
• Continued use of the climate con-
trol system operation in the recir-
culated air position may allow
humidity to increase inside the
vehicle which may fog the glass
and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the
air conditioning or heating sys-
tem on. It may cause serious
harm or death due to a drop in the
oxygen level and/or body temper-
ature.
• Continued use of the climate con-
trol system operation in the recir-
culated air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the air
intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
OEN046102N
OEN046103N
Features of your vehicle
904
D230200AEN
Rear heating and air conditioning
When the rear climate control selection
button is not pressed (the indicator light
is not illuminated), the temperature, fan
speed and mode of the rear climate con-
trol system is controlled automatically
according to the front climate control sys-
tem operation.
• Rear temperature and fan speed con-
trol: same as the front climate control
• Rear mode control
- Front mode control is MAX A/C,
: Rear mode control is
- Front mode control is
: Rear mode control is
- Front mode control is , ,
: Rear mode control is
To turn off the rear fan during the front cli-
mate control operation, press the rear cli-
mate control selection button (the indica-
tor light is illuminated) and set the rear
fan speed control knob to the OFF posi-
tion.
The temperature, fan speed and mode of
the rear climate control system can be
controlled independently regardless of
the front climate control system opera-
tion.
Press the rear climate control selection
button (the indicator light is illuminated)
and set the rear temperature, fan speed
and mode to the desired position.
However, the front climate control system
should be operated together for rear air
conditioning;
1. Set the front fan speed to the desired
position.
2. Push the air conditioning button.
3. Push the rear climate control selection
button.
4. Set the rear temperature, fan speed
and mode to the desired position.
D230201AEN
Rear mode selection
The rear mode is selected by pushing the
rear mode selection button on the rear
control panel as follows:
OEN046104N OEN046110
491
Features of your vehicle
• : Rear air blows from the upper
vents on the rear ceiling.
• : Rear air blows from the upper
vents on the rear ceiling and the
lower vents on the right rear.
• : Rear air blows from the lower
vents on the right rear trim.
Rear vents
The vent can be adjusted by rotating the
blade.
✽✽
NOTICE
If all the vents are closed, it may cause
some noise. Always open 2 vents or
more.
D230202AEN
Rear temperature control
To change the air temperature in the rear
passenger compartment, turn the knob
to the right for warm and hot air or left for
cooler air.
OEN046111
OEN046112
OEN046114 OEN046108
Features of your vehicle
924
D230203AEN
Rear fan speed control
To change the fan speed, turn the knob
to the right for higher speed or left for
lower speed.
To turn off the fan, turn the knob to the
OFF position.
D230600AEN
Cool box (if equipped)
You can keep beverage cans or other
items warm or cool using the open/close
lever of the vent installed in the center
console box.
1.Turn on the fan and set the tempera-
ture control to the desired position.
2. Set the mode control to the face ( )
or bi-level ( ) position.
3.Turn the open/close lever of the vent
installed in the center console box to
the open position (2).
4.When the cool box is not used, turn
the lever to its closed position (1).
For improving the effectiveness of the
cool box, do as follows;
1.Set the temperature to the hot
(extreme right) position for warm air or
to the cold (extreme left) position for
cool air.
Turn on the air conditioning system for
cooler air.
2.Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
3. Set the mode to the face ( ) posi-
tion.
✽✽
NOTICE
If some items in the cool box block the
vent, the warming or cooling effective-
ness of the cool box is reduced.
OEN046106 OEN046136
WARNING
Do not put the perishable food in
the cool box because it may not be
able to maintain the necessary con-
sistent temperature to keep the
food fresh.
493
Features of your vehicle
System operation
D230501AUN
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4.Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
D230502AEN
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4.Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode
to the
or position.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from
entering the car through the ventilation
system, temporarily set the air intake
control to the recirculated air position.
Be sure to return the control to the
fresh air position when the irritation
has passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver
alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system is
drawn in through the grilles just ahead
of the windshield. Care should be
taken that these are not blocked by
leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to the
fresh air position and fan speed to the
desired position, turn on the air condi-
tioning system, and adjust the temper-
ature control to desired temperature.
D230503AEN
Air conditioning
All HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems
are filled with environmentally friendly
R-134a refrigerant which does not dam-
age the ozone layer.
1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-
tioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside
air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-
perature control to maintain maximum
comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired, set
the temperature control to the extreme
left position, set the mode control to
the MAX A/C position, then set the fan
speed control to the highest speed.
Features of your vehicle
944
✽✽
NOTICE
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, monitor the engine temperature
gauge closely while driving up hills or
in heavy traffic when outside temper-
atures are high. Air conditioning sys-
tem operation may cause engine over-
heating. Continue to use the blower
fan but turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off if the engine temperature
gauge indicates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in humid
weather air conditioning may create
water droplets inside the vehicle.
Since excessive water droplets may
cause damage to electrical equipment,
air conditioning should only be oper-
ated with the windows closed.
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows for a short time to let the hot
air inside the vehicle escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of the
windows on rainy or humid days,
decrease the humidity inside the vehi-
cle by operating the air conditioning
system.
• During air conditioning system opera-
tion, you may occasionally notice a
slight change in engine speed as the
air conditioning compressor cycles.
This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system every
month only for a few minutes to ensure
maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning sys-
tem, you may notice clear water drip-
ping (or even puddling) on the ground
under the passenger side of the vehi-
cle. This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system
in the recirculated air position provides
maximum cooling, however, continual
operation in this mode may cause the
air inside the vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and humid air
intake. This is a normal system opera-
tion characteristics.
495
Features of your vehicle
D230300BEN
Climate control air filter
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the vehi-
cle from the outside through the heating
and air conditioning system. If dust or
other pollutants accumulate in the filter
over a period of time, the air flow from the
air vents may decrease, resulting in
moisture accumulation on the inside of
the windshield even when the outside
(fresh) air position is selected.If this hap-
pens, have the climate control air filter
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the car is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty or rough
roads, more frequent air conditioner
filter inspections and changes are
required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, the system should be
checked at an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
D230400AEN
Checking the amount of air con-
ditioner refrigerant and compres-
sor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is low,
the performance of the air conditioning is
reduced. Overfilling also has a negative
impact on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
It is important when servicing the air
conditioning system that the correct
type and amount of oil and refrigerant is
used. Otherwise, damage to the com-
pressor and abnormal system operation
may occur.
WARNING
The air conditioning system should
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. Improper service
may cause serious injury to the
person performing the service.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
Features of your vehicle
964
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
1. A/C display
2. Driver’s temperature control button
3. Front windshield defrost button
4. Rear window defrost button
5. AUTO (automatic control) button
6. Passenger’s temperature control button
7. Dual temperature control selection button
8. Rear climate control selection button
9. Air quality control system button (if
equipped) or air intake control button
10. OFF button
11. Fan speed control knob
12. Air conditioning button
13. Mode selection button
14. Rear fan speed control knob
15. Rear mode selection button
16. Rear temperature control knob
OEN046116/OEN046095
D240000AEN-EU
■■
Front climate control
■■
Rear climate control (if equipped)
497
Features of your vehicle
D240100AEN
Automatic heating and air condi-
tioning
The automatic climate control system is
controlled by simply setting the desired
temperature.
The Full Automatic Temperature Control
(FATC) system automatically controls the
heating and cooling system as follows;
1. Push the AUTO button. The modes,
fan speeds, air intake and air-condi-
tioning will be controlled automatically
by temperature setting.
2. Push the TEMP button to set the
desired temperature.
If the temperature is set to the lowest
setting (Lo), the air conditioning sys-
tem will operate continuously.
3.To turn the automatic operation off,
press any button or turn any knob
except the temperature control button.
If you press the mode selection button,
air conditioning button, defrost button
or air intake control button, or turn the
fan speed knob, the selected function
will be controlled manually while other
functions operate automatically.
For your convenience and to improve the
effectiveness of the climate control, use
the AUTO button and set the temperature
to 73°F (23°C).
✽✽
NOTICE
Never place anything over the sensor
located on the instrument panel to
ensure better control of the heating and
cooling system.
OEN046121OEN046120
Features of your vehicle
984
Manual heating and air condition-
ing
The heating and cooling system can be
controlled manually by pushing buttons
or turning knob(s) other than the AUTO
button. In this case, the system works
sequentially according to the order of
buttons or knob(s) selected.
✽✽
NOTICE
When pressing any button (or turning
any knob) except the AUTO button
while using automatic operation, the
functions not selected will continue to be
controlled automatically.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
5.Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the
air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to convert
to full automatic control of the system.
D240201AEN
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls the
direction of the air flow through the venti-
lation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted as
follows:
Refer to the illustration in the “Manual cli-
mate control system”.
Face-Level (B, D, E)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, D, E, C, F)
Air flow is directed towards the face and
the floor.
Floor-Level (C, F, A, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air being
directed to the windshield and side win-
dow defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, F, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor
and the windshield with a small amount
directed to the side window defrosters.
OEN046122
499
Features of your vehicle
Defrost-Level (A, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed
separately using the horizontal thumb-
wheel. To close the vent, rotate it left to
the maximum position.To open the vent,
rotate it right to the desired position.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
D240202AEN-EU
Temperature control
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (HI) by pushing the up ( )
button.
The temperature will decrease to the min-
imum (Lo) by pushing the down ( ) but-
ton.
When pushing the button, the tempera-
ture will increase or decrease by
1°F/0.5°C. When set to the lowest tem-
perature setting, the air conditioning will
operate continuously.
OEN046123 OEN046099 OEN046124
Features of your vehicle
1004
Adjusting the driver and passenger side
temperature individually
1. Press the DUAL button to operate the
driver and passenger side temperature
individually. Pressing the right temper-
ature control button will automatically
switch to the DUAL mode as well.
2. Press the left temperature control to
adjust the driver side temperature.
Press the right temperature control to
adjust the passenger side tempera-
ture.
When the driver side temperature is set
to the highest (HI) or lowest (Lo) temper-
ature setting, the DUAL mode is deacti-
vated for maximum heating or cooling.
Adjusting the driver and passenger side
temperature equally
1. Press the DUAL button again to deac-
tivate DUAL mode. The passenger
side temperature will be set to the
same as the driver side temperature.
2. Press the left temperature control but-
ton. The driver and passenger side
temperature will be adjusted equally.
Temperature conversion
If the battery has been discharged or dis-
connected, the temperature mode dis-
play will reset to Fahrenheit.
This is a normal condition.You can switch
the temperature mode between
Fahrenheit to Centigrade as follows;
While pressing the MODE button,
depress the DUAL button for 3 seconds
or more. The display will change from
Fahrenheit to Centigrade, or from
Centigrade to Fahrenheit.
D240203AEN
Air intake control
This is used to select the outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
push the control button.
OEN046125 OEN046126N
4101
Features of your vehicle
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
the passenger compart-
ment will be drawn through
the heating system and
heated or cooled according
to the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air enters
the vehicle from outside and
is heated or cooled accord-
ing to the function selected.
✽✽
NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in the
recirculated air position (without air
conditioning selected) may cause fog-
ging of the windshield and side windows
and the air within the passenger com-
partment may become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air con-
ditioning with the recirculated air posi-
tion selected will result in excessively dry
air in the passenger compartment.
D240204AEN
Air quality control (if equipped)
The air inflow from outside the vehicle
can be automatically controlled. Press
the button to activate the air quality con-
trol system.
When using AQS mode, AQS(Air Quality
Control System) automatically senses
outdoor air pollutants and minimizes
them from entering the vehicle, however,
unpleasant or foul odors that might be
present may still be noticeable within the
vehicle.
WARNING
• Continued use of the climate con-
trol system operation in the recir-
culated air position may allow
humidity to increase inside the
vehicle which may fog the glass
and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the
air conditioning or heating system
on. It may cause serious harm or
death due to a drop in the oxygen
level and/or body temperature.
• Continued use of the climate con-
trol system operation in the recir-
culated air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss
of vehicle control. Set the air intake
control to the outside (fresh) air
position as much as possible while
driving.
OEN046128N
Features of your vehicle
1024
Exhaust gas cutoff mode :
Air enters the vehicle from the outside.
If exhaust gas enters the vehicle from the
outside, the exhaust gas cutoff mode is
automatically converted from the outside
air position to the recirculated air position
to prevent exhaust gas from entering the
vehicle.
✽✽
NOTICE
It should be noted that prolonged oper-
ation of the heating system in recircula-
tion mode will give rise to misting of the
windshield and side windows and the air
within the passenger compartment will
become stale. In addition, prolonged use
of the air conditioning with the recircu-
lation mode selected may result in the
air within the passenger compartment
becoming excessively dry.
D240205AUN
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the desired
speed by turning the fan speed control
knob.
The higher the fan speed is, the more air
is delivered.
Pressing the OFF button turns off the
fan.
D240206AUN
Air conditioning
Push the A/C button to turn the air condi-
tioning system on (indicator light will illu-
minate).
Push the button again to turn the air con-
ditioning system off.
CAUTION
If the windows fog up with the
Recirculation or A.Q.S mode select-
ed, set the air intake control to the
fresh air position or A.Q.S control
to OFF.
OEN046127 OEN046129
4103
Features of your vehicle
D240208AUN
OFF mode
Push the OFF button to turn off the air cli-
mate control system. However, you can
still operate the mode and air intake but-
tons as long as the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
D240300AEN
Rear heating and air conditioning
When the rear climate control selection
button is not pressed (the indicator light
is not illuminated), the temperature, fan
speed and mode of the rear climate con-
trol system is controlled automatically
according to the front climate control sys-
tem operation.
• Rear temperature and fan speed con-
trol: same as the front climate control
• Rear mode control
- Front mode control is
: Rear mode control is
- Front mode control is
: Rear mode control is
- Front mode control is , ,
: Rear mode control is
To turn off the rear fan during the front cli-
mate control operation, press the rear cli-
mate control selection button (the indica-
tor light is illuminated) and set the rear
fan speed control knob to the OFF posi-
tion.
The temperature, fan speed and mode of
the rear climate control system can be
controlled independently regardless of
the front climate control system opera-
tion.
Press the rear climate control selection
button (the indicator light is illuminated)
and set the rear temperature, fan speed
and mode to the desired position.
However, the front climate control system
should be operated together for rear air
conditioning;
1. Set the front fan speed to the desired
position.
2. Push the air conditioning button.
3. Push the rear climate control selection
button.
4. Set the rear temperature, fan speed
and mode to the desired position.
OEN046180
OEN046130
Features of your vehicle
1044
D240301AEN
Rear mode selection
The rear mode is selected by pushing the
rear mode selection button on the rear
control panel as follows:
• : Rear air blows from the upper
vents on the rear ceiling.
• : Rear air blows from the upper
vents on the rear ceiling and the
lower vents on the right rear trim.
• : Rear air blows from the lower
vents on the right rear trim.
Rear vents
The vent can be adjusted by rotating the
blade.
✽✽
NOTICE
If all the vents are closed, it may cause
some noise. Always open 2 vents or
more.
OEN046134 OEN046114
OEN046111
OEN046112
4105
Features of your vehicle
D240302AEN
Rear temperature control
To change the air temperature in the rear
passenger compartment, turn the knob
to the right for warm and hot air or left for
cooler air.
D240303AEN
Rear fan speed control
To change the fan speed, turn the knob
to the right for higher speed or left for
lower speed.
To turn off the fan, turn the knob to the
OFF position.
D240500AEN
❈ For information on “Cool box”, “System
operation”, “Climate control air filter”,
etc., refer to “Manual climate control
system” in this section.
OEN046133 OEN046132
Features of your vehicle
1064
D250000AEN
• For maximum defrosting, set the tem-
perature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired while
defrosting or defogging, set the mode
to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and ice
from the windshield, rear window, out-
side rear view mirrors, and all side win-
dows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the hood
and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve
heater and defroster efficiency and to
reduce the probability of fogging up the
inside of the windshield.
Manual climate control system
D250101AEN-EU
To defog inside windshield
1. Select desired fan speed.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Set the mode to the or posi-
tion.
4.The outside (fresh) air will be selected
automatically.
If the outside (fresh) air position is not
selected automatically, press the corre-
sponding button manually.
If the position is selected, lower fan
speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
OEN046137N
WARNING - Windshield
heating
Do not use the or position
during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The dif-
ference between the temperature of
the outside air and that of the wind-
shield could cause the outer sur-
face of the windshield to fog up,
causing loss of visibility. In this
case, set the mode selection knob
or button to the position and
fan speed control knob or button to
a lower speed.
4107
Features of your vehicle
D250102AEN-EU
To defrost outside windshield
1.Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot
position.
3. Set the mode to the position.
4.The outside (fresh) air will be selected
automatically.
If the position is selected, lower fan
speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.
Automatic climate control system
D250201AEN-EU
To defog inside windshield
1. Select desired fan speed.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defrost button ( ).
4.The outside (fresh) air position will be
selected automatically.
If the outside (fresh) air position is not
selected automatically, adjust the corre-
sponding button manually.
If the position is selected, lower fan
speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.
D250202AEN-EU
To defrost outside windshield
1.Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot
(HI) position.
3. Press the defrost button ( ).
4.The outside (fresh) air position will be
selected automatically.
If the position is selected, lower fan
speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.
OEN046139N OEN046140NOEN046138N
Features of your vehicle
1084
D250300AUN-EU
Defogging logic
To reduce the possibility of fogging up
the inside of the windshield, the air intake
is controlled automatically according to
certain conditions such as or
position. To cancel or return the defog-
ging logic, perform the following steps.
D250301AUN
Manual climate control system
1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
2.Turn the mode selection knob to the
defrost position ( ).
3. Push the air intake control button at
least 5 times within 3 seconds.
The indicator light in the air intake control
button will blink 3 times with 0.5 second
of interval. It indicates that the defogging
logic is canceled or returned to the pro-
grammed status.
If the battery has been discharged or dis-
connected, the system resets to the pre-
programmed defogging logic.
D250302AUN
Automatic climate control system
1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
2. Select the defrost position pressing
defrost button ( ).
3.While holding the air conditioning but-
ton (A/C) pressed, press the air intake
control button at least 5 times within 3
seconds.
The A/C display blinks 3 times with 0.5
second of interval. It indicates that the
defogging logic is canceled or returned to
the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or dis-
connected, the system resets to the pre-
programmed defogging logic.
OEN046141N
OEN046142N
4109
Features of your vehicle
D270000AUN
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the driver
or passengers.
D270100AEN
Center console storage
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the driver
or front passenger.
To open the center console storage, push
the button (1) or pull up the lever (2).
D270200AEN
Glove box
The glove box can be locked and
unlocked with a master key.
To open the glove box, pull the handle
and the glove box will automatically
open. Close the glove box after use.
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders,or other flamma-
ble/explosive materials in the vehi-
cle. These items may catch fire
and/or explode if the vehicle is
exposed to hot temperatures for
extended periods.
CAUTION
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartment.
• Always keep the storage com-
partment covers closed while
driving. Do not attempt to place
so many items in the storage
compartment that the storage
compartment cover cannot close
securely.
OEN048144OEN046143
WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury in an acci-
dent or sudden stop,always keep the
glove box door closed while driving.
WARNING
Do not keep food in the glove box
for a long time.
Features of your vehicle
1104
D270300AUN
Sunglass holder
To open the sunglass holder, press the
cover and the holder will slowly open.
Place your sunglasses in the compart-
ment door with the lenses facing out.
Push to close.
D270400AEN
Multi box
Front/Center
To open the cover, press the button and
the cover will slowly open.
OEN046145
WARNING
• Do not keep objects except sun-
glasses inside the sunglass hold-
er. Such objects can be thrown
from the holder in the event of a
sudden stop or an accident, pos-
sibly injuring the passengers in
the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass holder
while the vehicle is moving. The
rear view mirror of the vehicle
can be blocked by an open sun-
glass holder.
(If equipped)
OEN046151
OEN046173
Center (if equipped)
Front
4111
Features of your vehicle
Rear
To open the cover, lift the cover. It can be
used for storing small items.
D270500AEN
Luggage box
You can place a first aid kit, a reflector tri-
angle, tools, etc. in the box for easy
access.
1. Grasp the handle on the edge of the
cover and lift it.
2. Pull out the support rod and hold the
cover open with the support rod by
inserting the free end of the rod into
the slot on the side of the box.
OEN046147 OEN047148 OEN047149
Features of your vehicle
1124
D280100AEN
Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
For the cigarette lighter to work, the igni-
tion switch must be in the ACC position
or the ON position.
To open the cover, press the cover and it
will slowly open.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the
way into its socket. When the element
has heated, the lighter will pop out to the
“ready” position.
If it is necessary to replace the cigarette
lighter, use only a genuine HYUNDAI
replacement or its approved equivalent.
D280200AEN
Ashtray
To open the cover, press the cover and it
will slowly open.To clean the ashtray, the
plastic receptacle should be removed by
lifting the plastic ash receptacle upward
and pulling it out.
INTERIOR FEATURES
CAUTION
Only a genuine HYUNDAI lighter
should be used in the cigarette
lighter socket. The use of plug-in
accessories (shavers, hand-held
vacuums,and coffee pots, etc.) may
damage the socket or cause electri-
cal failure.
WARNING
• Do not hold the lighter in after it
is already heated because it will
overheat.
• If the lighter does not pop out
within 30 seconds, remove it to
prevent overheating.
OEN046153
WARNING - Ashtray use
• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtrays
as waste receptacles.
• Putting lit cigarettes or matches
in an ashtray with other com-
bustible materials may cause a
fire.
OEN046154
4113
Features of your vehicle
D280300AEN
Cup holder
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
Front
To open the cover, press the cover and it
will slowly open.
Center
To open the cover, press the button and
the cover will slowly open.
Place a cup or small beverage can in the
holder after pulling out the support (1).
WARNING - Hot liquids
• Do not place uncovered cups of
hot liquid in the cup holder while
the vehicle is in motion. If the hot
liquid spills, you burn yourself.
Such a burn to the driver could
lead to loss of control of the vehi-
cle.
• To reduce the risk of personal
injury in the event of sudden stop
or collision, do not place uncov-
ered or unsecured bottles, glass-
es, cans, etc., in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion.
OEN046155
OEN036201
Front
Center
OEN046156
Rear
WARNING
Keep cans or bottles out of direct
sun light and do not put them in a
vehicle that is heated up. It may
explode.
Features of your vehicle
1144
D280400AEN
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull
it downward, unsnap it from the bracket
(1) and swing it to the side (2).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and slide the mirror cover (3).
Adjust the sunvisor extension forward or
backward (4).
The ticket holder (5) is provided for hold-
ing a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)
D280500AEN
Power outlet
The power outlet is designed to provide
power for mobile telephones or other
devices designed to operate with vehicle
electrical systems. The devices should
draw less than 10 amps with the engine
running.
OEN046157
CAUTION - Vanity mirror
lamp
Close the vanity mirror cover
securely and return the sunvisor to
its original position after use. If the
vanity mirror is not closed securely,
the lamp will stay on and could
result in battery discharge and pos-
sible sunvisor damage.
OEN046158
OEN046160
Center (if equipped)
Front
4115
Features of your vehicle
D281300AEN
AC inverter (if equipped)
These supply 115VAC/150W electric
power to operate electric accessories or
equipment when the ignition switch is in
the ON position or engine is running.The
AC inverter is turned on by pushing in the
switch. To turn the AC inverter off, push
the switch a second time.
✽✽
NOTICE
When pushing the AC inverter switch,
the switch indicator illumination is
delayed momentarily while the system
conducts a self-check.
CAUTION
• Use the power outlet only when
the engine is running and remove
the accessory plug after use.
Using the accessory plug for pro-
longed periods of time with the
engine off could cause the bat-
tery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories
which are less than 10A in elec-
tric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet. These devices may
cause excessive audio static and
malfunctions in other electronic
systems or devices used in your
vehicle.
WARNING
Do not put a finger or a foreign ele-
ment (pin, etc.) into a power outlet
and do not touch with a wet hand.
You may get an electric shock.
OEN046203N
OEN048161N
CAUTION
• When not using the AC inverter,
make sure that the switch is
turned off, and is closed the AC
inverter cover.
• Only use when the engine is run-
ning, and remove the plug from the
AC inverter after using the acces-
sory. Using when the engine is not
running or leaving the accessory
plugged in for long time may cause
the battery to discharge.
• Do not use electric accessories
or equipment with maximum elec-
tric power consumption greater
than 150W (115VAC).
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into the AC inverter.
These devices may cause exces-
sive audio noise and malfunctions
in other electronic systems or
devices used in your vehicle.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
1164
D280600AEN
Digital clock
Whenever the battery terminals or relat-
ed fuses are disconnected, you must
reset the time.
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON position, the clock buttons operate as
follows:
D280601AUN
Hour (1)
Pressing the H button with your finger, a
pencil or similar object will advance the
time displayed by one hour.
D280602AUN
Minute (2)
Pressing the M button with your finger, a
pencil or similar object will advance the
time displayed by one minute.
D280603AUN
Reset (3)
To clear away minutes, press the R but-
ton with your finger, a pencil or similar
object.Then the clock will be set precise-
ly on the hour.
For example, if the R button is pressed
while the time is between 9:01 and 9:29,
the display will be reset to 9:00.
9:01 ~ 9:29 display changed to 9:00
9:30 ~ 9:59 display changed to 10:00
D280604AEN
Display conversion
To change the 12 hour format to the 24
hour format, press the R button until the
display blinks.
For example, if the R button is pressed
while the time is 10:15 p.m., the display
will be changed to 22:15.
WARNING
The AC inverter can be dangerous!
When using the AC inverter, care-
fully observe the following precau-
tions to avoid serious injuries.
• Do not use heated electric prod-
ucts (coffeepot, toaster, heater,
iron, etc.).
• Do not insert foreign objects into
or touch the AC inverter; you may
get shocked.
• Do not let children operate or
touch the AC inverter.
• When not using the AC inverter,
close the cover.
(Continued)
• Do not use broken electric acces-
sories or equipment, as they may
damage the AC inverter and vehi-
cle's electrical system.
• Do not use two or more electric
accessories or equipment at the
same time.
• When input voltage is under 11V,
the outlet LED and indicator will
blink, and will automatically turn
off.
OEN046159N
WARNING
Do not adjust the clock while driv-
ing. You may lose your steering
control and cause an accident that
results in severe personal injury or
death.
4117
Features of your vehicle
D281200AEN
Outside thermometer
The current outside temperature is dis-
played in 1°F (1°C) increments.The tem-
perature range is between -30°F~140°F
(-30°C ~ 60°C).
• The outside temperature on the display
may not change immediately like a
general thermometer to prevent the
driver from being inattentive.
• Temperature conversion
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Fahrenheit.
This is a normal condition. You can
switch the temperature mode between
Fahrenheit to Centigrade as follows;
While depressing the R button,
depress the H or M button.The display
will change from Fahrenheit to
Centigrade, or from Centigrade to
Fahrenheit.
D280800AEN
Clothes hanger (if equipped)
OEN046135N
CAUTION
Do not hang heavy clothes, since
those may damage the hook.
OEN046163
OEN049173L
2nd row
3rd row (if equipped)
Features of your vehicle
1184
Floor mat anchor(s) (if equipped)
When using a floor mat on the front floor
carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor
mat anchor(s) in your vehicle.This keeps
the floor mat from sliding forward.
81000AEN
Luggage net (holder)
(if equipped)
To keep items from shifting in the cargo
area, you can use the 6 holders located
in the cargo area to attach the luggage
net.
OEN047164
OEN047165L-1
Type A
Type B
B570A01JM-A
WARNING
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat to
the vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehicle's
floor mat anchor(s) before driving
the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to the
vehicle's floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top of
one another (e.g. all-weather rub-
ber mat on top of a carpeted floor
mat). Only a single floor mat
should be installed in each posi-
tion.
IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was man-
ufactured with driver's side floor
mat anchors that are designed to
securely hold the floor mat in
place. To avoid any interference
with pedal operation, HYUNDAI
recommends that only the
HYUNDAI floor mat designed for
use in your vehicle be installed.
4119
Features of your vehicle
If necessary, contact your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer to obtain a luggage net.
D290100AEN
Roof rack (if equipped)
If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can
load cargo on top of your vehicle.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,
be sure not to position cargo onto the
roof rack in such a way that it could
interfere with sunroof operation.
OEN049175L
EXTERIOR FEATURES
CAUTION
• When carrying cargo on the roof
rack, take the necessary precau-
tions to make sure the cargo does
not damage the roof of the vehicle.
• When carrying large objects on
the roof rack, make sure they do
not exceed the overall roof length
or width.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the goods or
the vehicle, care should be taken
when carrying fragile or bulky
objects in the luggage compart-
ment.
WARNING
Avoid eye injury. DO NOT over-
stretch the luggage net, ALWAYS
keep your face and body out of the
luggage net’s recoil path. DO NOT
use when the strap has visible
signs of wear or damage.
WARNING
• The following specification is the
maximum weight that can be
loaded onto the roof rack.
Distribute the load as evenly as
possible onto roof rack and
secure the load firmly.
Loading cargo or luggage in
excess of the specified weight
limit on the roof rack may dam-
age your vehicle.
(Continued)
ROOF 220 lbs. (100 kg)
RACK EVENLY DISTRIBUTED
Features of your vehicle
1204
✽✽
NOTICE
If you install an aftermarket HID head-
lamp, your vehicle's audio and electron-
ic device may malfunction.
Antenna
D300102AUN
Roof antenna
Your car uses a roof antenna to receive
both AM and FM broadcast signals.This
antenna is a removable type. To remove
the antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To
install the antenna, turn it clockwise.
(Continued)
• The vehicle center of gravity will
be higher when items are loaded
onto the roof rack. Avoid sudden
starts, braking, sharp turns,
abrupt maneuvers or high speeds
that may result in loss of vehicle
control or rollover resulting in an
accident.
• Always drive slowly and turn cor-
ners carefully when carrying
items on the roof rack. Severe
wind updrafts, caused by passing
vehicles or natural causes, can
cause sudden upward pressure
on items loaded on the roof rack.
This is especially true when car-
rying large, flat items such as
wood panels or mattresses. This
could cause the items to fall off
the roof rack and cause damage
to your vehicle or others around
you.
• To prevent damage or loss of
cargo while driving, check fre-
quently before or while driving to
make sure the items on the roof
rack are securely fastened.
AUDIO SYSTEM
OEN046166N
Type A Type B
CAUTION
• Before entering a place with a low
height clearance or a car wash,
remove the antenna by rotating it
counterclockwise. If not, the
antenna may be damaged.
• When reinstalling your antenna, it
is important that it is fully tight-
ened and adjusted to the upright
position to ensure proper recep-
tion. But it could be folded or
removed when parking the vehi-
cle or when loading cargo on the
roof rack.
• When cargo is loaded on the roof
rack, do not place the cargo near
the antenna pole to ensure proper
reception.
4121
Features of your vehicle
D300200AEN
Steering wheel audio control
(if equipped)
The steering wheel audio control button
is installed to promote safe driving.
D300202AEN
MODE
Press the button to select Radio or CD
(compact disc).
D300204AEN
VOLUME (VOL +/-)
• Press the up button (+) to increase vol-
ume.
• Press the down button (-) to decrease
volume.
D300205AEN
MUTE
• Press the MUTE button to cancel the
sound.
• Press the MUTE button again to acti-
vate the sound.
D300203AEN
SEEK/PRESET ( / )
If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed
for 0.8 second or more, it will work as fol-
lows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK select
button.
CDP mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
CDC mode
It will function as the DISC UP/DOWN
button.
If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed
for less than 0.8 second, it will work as
follows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STATION
select buttons.
CDP mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
CDC mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons is described in the following
pages in this section.
OEN046168L
CAUTION
Do not operate audio remote con-
trol buttons simultaneously.
Features of your vehicle
1224
D300600AEN-EU
Aux, USB and iPod
®
port
(if equipped)
If your vehicle has an aux and/or
USB(universal serial bus) port or iPod
®
port, you can use an aux port to connect
audio devices and the USB port to plug
in a USB device.
Both ports are used together with the
accessory iPod
®
cable to connect an
iPod
®
.
✽✽
NOTICE
• To prevent noise, devices connected to
the AUX port should have the volume
adjusted high.
• If an external power connector is con-
nected to the vehicle, static noise may
occur. If noise is heard, verify the
AUX device volume is turned up, then
test the sound with the power cable
disconnected. If necessary, use the
AUX device powered from its internal
battery, or purchase a ground loop
isolator to connect the AUX device to
the vehicle.
❈ iPod
®
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
D300800BEN-EU
How car audio works
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast
from transmitter towers located around
your city. They are intercepted by the
radio antenna on your car. This signal is
then received by the radio and sent to
your car speakers.
When a strong radio signal has reached
your vehicle, the precise engineering of
your audio system ensures the best pos-
sible quality reproduction. However, in
some cases the signal coming to your
vehicle may not be strong and clear.This
can be due to factors such as the dis-
tance from the radio station, closeness of
other strong radio stations or the pres-
ence of buildings, bridges or other large
obstructions in the area.
OEN049170L
JBM001
FM reception
4123
Features of your vehicle
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broadcasts.
This is because AM radio waves are
transmitted at low frequencies. These
long, low frequency radio waves can fol-
low the curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight out into the atmos-
phere. In addition, they curve around
obstructions so that they can provide bet-
ter signal coverage.
FM broadcasts are transmitted at high
frequencies and do not bend to follow the
earth's surface. Because of this, FM
broadcasts generally begin to fade at
short distances from the station. Also,
FM signals are easily affected by build-
ings, mountains, or other obstructions.
These can result in certain listening con-
ditions which might lead you to believe a
problem exists with your radio. The fol-
lowing conditions are normal and do not
indicate radio trouble:
• Fading - As your car moves away from
the radio station, the signal will weaken
and sound will begin to fade.When this
occurs, we suggest that you select
another stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the trans-
mitter and your radio can disturb the
signal causing static or fluttering nois-
es to occur. Reducing the treble level
may lessen this effect until the distur-
bance clears.
JBM002 JBM003
AM reception FM radio station
JBM004
Features of your vehicle
1244
• Station Swapping - As a FM signal
weakens, another more powerful sig-
nal near the same frequency may
begin to play. This is because your
radio is designed to lock onto the clear-
est signal. If this occurs, select anoth-
er station with a stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals
being received from several directions
can cause distortion or fluttering. This
can be caused by a direct and reflect-
ed signal from the same station, or by
signals from two stations with close
frequencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition has
passed.
Satellite radio reception
You may experience receiving difficulties
receiving XM™ satellite radio signals in
the following situations.
• If you are driving in a tunnel or a cov-
ered parking area.
• If you are driving beneath the top level
of a multi-level freeway.
• If you drive under a bridge.
• If you are driving next to a tall vehi-
cle(such as a truck or a bus) that block
the signal.
• If you are driving in a valley where the
surrounding hills or peaks block the
signal from the satellite.
• If you are driving on a mountain road
where the signal is blocked by moun-
tains.
• If you are driving in an area with tall
trees that block the signal (10m or
more) ; for example, on a road through
a dense forest.
• The signal can become weak in some
areas that are not covered by the XM™
repeater network.
NOTE:
There may be other unforeseen cir-
cumstances leading to reception
problems with XM™ satellite radio
signal.
JBM005
4125
Features of your vehicle
Using a cellular phone or a two-way
radio
When a cellular phone is used inside the
vehicle, noise may be produced from the
audio equipment. This does not mean
that something is wrong with the audio
equipment. In such a case, use the cellu-
lar phone at a place as far as possible
from the audio equipment.
Care of discs
• If the temperature inside the car is too
high, open the car windows for ventila-
tion before using your car audio.
• It is illegal to copy and use MP3/WMA
files without permission. Use CDs that
are created only by lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents such as
benzene and thinner, normal cl eaners
and magnetic sprays made for ana-
logue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from get-
ting damaged. Hold and carry CDs by
the edges or the edges of the center
hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece of
soft cloth before playback (wipe it from
the center to the outside edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or paper
onto it.
• Make sure on undesirable matter other
than CDs are inserted into the CD
player (Do not insert more than one
CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use to
protect them from scratches or dirt.
• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-
RW CDs, certain CDs may not operate
normally according to manufacturing
companies or making and recording
methods.In such circumstances, if you
still continue to use those CDs, they
may cause the malfunction of your car
audio system.
✽✽
NOTICE - Playing an
Incompatible Copy
Protected Audio CD
Some copy protected CDs, which do not
comply with the international audio CD
standards (Red Book), may not play on
your car audio. Please note that if you
try to play copy protected CDs and the
CD player does not perform correctly
the CDs maybe defective, not the CD
player.
CAUTION
When using a communication sys-
tem such a cellular phone or a radio
set inside the vehicle, a separate
external antenna must be fitted.
When a cellular phone or a radio set
is used with an internal antenna
alone, it may interfere with the vehi-
cle's electrical system and adverse-
ly affect safe operation of the vehi-
cle.
WARNING
Don't use a cellular phone when
you are driving.You should stop at
a safe place to use a cellular phone.
Features of your vehicle
1264
A-200ENL
1. Power ON/OFF Button & Volume Control
Knob
2. FM/AM Selection Button
3. Automatic Channel Selection Button
4. Preset Button
5. Manual Channel Selection Knob &
SETUP Button
6. SCAN Button
RADIO, SET UP,VOLUME, AUDIO CONTROL(PA710S)
4127
Features of your vehicle
1. Power ON/OFF Button & Volume Control
Knob
2. FM/AM Selection Button
3. Automatic Channel Selection Button
4. Preset Button
5. Manual Channel Selection Knob &
SETUP Button
6. SCAN Button
7. MUTE Button
RADIO, SET UP,VOLUME, AUDIO CONTROL(PA760S)
A-300ENL
Features of your vehicle
1284
1. Power ON/OFF Button & Volume Control
Knob
2. FM/AM Selection Button
3. Automatic Channel Selection Button
4. Preset Button
5. Manual Channel Selection Knob &
SETUP Button
6. SCAN Button
RADIO, SET UP,VOLUME, AUDIO CONTROL(PA760S RSE)
A-350CML
4129
Features of your vehicle
1. Power ON/OFF Button &
Volume Control Knob
Turns the set on/off when the ignition
switch is on ACC or ON. If the button is
turned to the right, it increases the vol-
ume and left, it decreases the volume.
2. FM/AM Selection Button
Turns to FM or AM mode, and toggles in
the order of FM1
➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ FM1...
when the button is pressed each time.
3. Automatic Channel Selection
Button
• When the [SEEK ] button is pressed,
it increases the band frequency to auto-
matically select a channel.
Stops at the previous frequency if no
channel is found.
• When the [TRACK ] button is press-
ed, it reduces the band frequency to
automatically select a channel.
Stops at the previous frequency if no
channel is found.
4. Preset Button
Push [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8 sec-
ond to play the channel saved in each
button. Push Preset button for 0.8 sec-
ond or longer to save current channel to
the respective button with a beep.
5. Manual Channel Selection
Knob & SETUP Button
Manual Channel Selection knob
Turn this control while listening to a radio
channel to manually adjust frequency.
Turn clockwise to increase frequency and
counterclockwise to reduce frequency.
SETUP Button
Press this button to turn to the XM
option, SCROLL and adjustment mode. If
no action is taken for 5 seconds after
pressing the button, it will return to the
play mode.(After entering SETUP mode,
move between items using the left, right
and PUSH functions of the [TUNE] but-
ton.)
The setup item changes from SCROLL
➟ XM...
• PA760S RSE ONLY
Press this button to turn to the XM option,
SCROLL, SURROUND and adjustment
mode. If no action is taken for 5 seconds
after pressing the button, it will return to
the play mode.(After entering SETUP
mode, move between items using the left,
right and PUSH functions of the [TUNE]
button.)
The setup item changes from SCROLL
➟
SURROUND ➟ XM...
Sound Quality Control Knob
Pressing the button changes the TONE
and POSITION mode. The mode select-
ed is shown on the display. After select-
ing each mode, rotate the Audio control
knob clockwise or counterclockwise.
• BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
• MIDDLE Control
To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the MID-
DLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
Features of your vehicle
1304
• TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the TRE-
BLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
• FADER Control
Turn the control knob clockwise to empha-
size rear speaker sound(front speaker
sound will be attenuated). When the con-
trol knob is turned counterclockwise, front
speaker sound will be emphasized(rear
speaker sound will be attenuated).
• BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize
right speaker sound(left speaker sound
will be attenuated). When the control
knob is turned counterclockwise, left
speaker sound will be emphasized(right
speaker sound will be attenuated).
6. SCAN Button
If this button is pressed, the frequencies
will become increased and receive the
corresponding broadcasts. This function
will play the frequencies for 5 seconds
(XM MODE:10 seconds) each and find
other broadcasts as the frequency
increases. Press the button again when
desiring to continue listening to the cur-
rently playing broadcast.
7. MUTE Button
Press [MUTE] button to stop sound and
“Audio Mute” is displayed on the LCD.
4131
Features of your vehicle
A-200ENL
1. CD Loading Slot
2. CD Eject Button
3. CD/AUX Selection Button
4. Automatic Track Selection Button
5. Fast Search Button
6. RANDOM Play Button
7. REPEAT Button
8. CD Indicator
9. SCAN Play Button
10. INFO Button
11. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button
12. FOLDER Moving Button
CDP, AUX(PA710S)
Features of your vehicle
1324
CDC, AUX(PA760S)
A-300ENL
1. CD Loading Slot
2. CD Eject Button
3. CD/AUX Selection Button
4. Automatic Track Selection Button
5. Fast Search Button
6. RANDOM Play Button
7. REPEAT Button
9. SCAN Play Button
10. INFO Button
11. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button
12. FOLDER Moving Button
13. DISC Selection Button
14. MUTE Button
15. CD LOAD Button
4133
Features of your vehicle
CDC, AUX(PA760S RSE)
A-350ENL
1. CD Loading Slot
2. CD Eject Button
3. CD/AUX/RSE Selection Button
4. Automatic Track Selection Button
5. Fast Search Button
6. RANDOM Play Button
7. REPEAT Button
9. SCAN Play Button
10. INFO Button
11. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button
12. FOLDER Moving Button
13. DISC Selection Button
15. CD LOAD Button
Features of your vehicle
1344
1. CD Loading Slot
Please face printed side upward and gen-
tly push in. When the ignition switch is on
ACC or ON and power is off, power is
automatically turned on if the CD is
loaded.This CDP supports only 12cm CD.
If a VCD, Data CD are loaded, "Reading
Error" message will appear and CD will be
ejected.
2. CD Eject Button
Push button for less than 0.8 second
to eject the CD during CD playback.
This button is enabled when ignition
switch is off.
• ALL EJECT(CDC Only)
Press this button for more than 0.8 sec-
ond to eject all discs inside the deck in
respective order.
3. CD or CD/AUX or CD/AUX/RSE
Selection Button
• CD Selection Button
If the CD is loaded, turns to CD mode. If
no CD, it displays "No Disc" for 3 sec-
onds and returns to th previous mode.
• CD/AUX Selection Button
If the auxiliary device is connected, it
switches to the AUX mode from the other
mode to play the sound from the auxiliary
player.
If the CD is loaded, turns to CD mode,
and if a device is connected to AUX then
it toggles. CD
➟ AUX ➟ CD... when the
button is pressed each time.(It will not
turn to AUX if the auxiliary device is not
connected)
If no CD and auxiliary device is connect-
ed, it displays "No Media" for 3 seconds
and returns to the previous mode.
• CD/AUX/RSE Selection Button
If the auxiliary device is connected, it
switches to the AUX mode from the other
mode to play the sound from the auxiliary
player.
If the CD is loaded, turns to CD mode,
and if a device is connected to AUX and
there is a CD in the RSE then it toggles.
CD
➟ AUX ➟ RSE ➟ CD... when the but-
ton is pressed each time.(It will not turn
to AUX and RSE if the auxiliary device is
not connected and there is no CD in the
RSE)
If no CD and auxiliary device is connect-
ed, it displays "No Media" for 3 seconds
and returns to the previous mode.
4. Automatic Track Selection
Button
• Push [TRACK ] button for less than
0.8 second to play from the beginning
of current song.
• Push [TRACK ] button for less than
0.8 second and press again within 1
seconds to play the previous song.
• Push [SEEK ] button for less than 0.8
second to play the next song.
5. Fast Search Button
• Push [FF] button for 0.8 second or
longer to initiate high speed sound
search of current song.
• Push [REW] button for 0.8 second or
longer to initiate reverse direction high
speed sound search of current song.
6. RANDOM Play Button
Press this button for less than 0.8 second
to activate ‘RDM’ mode and more than
0.8 second to activate ‘ALL RDM’ mode.
• RDM : Only files/tracks in a folder/disc
are played back in a random sequence.
• ALL RDM(MP3/WMA Only) : All files in
a disc are played back in the random
sequence.
4135
Features of your vehicle
7. REPEAT Button
Press this button for less than 0.8 second
to activate ‘RPT’mode and more than 0.8
second to activate ‘FLD RPT’ mode.
• RPT : Only a track(file) is repeatedly
played back.
• FLD RPT(MP3/WMA Only) : Only files
in a folder are repeatedly played back.
8. CD Indicator(CDP Only)
When the ignition switch is in ACC or ON
and if the CD is loaded, this indicator is
lighted. If the CD is ejected the light is
turned off.
9. SCAN Play Button
Plays first 10 seconds of each song in
the DISC.To cancel the mode, press the
button once again.
10. INFO Button
Displays the information of the current
CD TRACK(FILE) as below when the
button is pressed each time.
• CDDA : DISC TITLE
➟ DISC ARTIST ➟
TRACK TITLE ➟ TRACK ARTIST ➟
TOTAL TRACK...
• MP3/WMA : FILE NAME
➟ TITLE ➟
ARTIST ➟ ALBUME ➟ FOLDER NAME
➟ TOTAL FILE... (not displayed if the
information is not available on the
DISC.)
11. SEARCH Knob & ENTER
Button
Turn this button clockwise to display the
songs next to the currently played song.
Turn the button counterclockwise to dis-
play the songs before the currently
played song.Press the button to skip and
play the selected song.
12. FOLDER Moving Button
• Moves [FLDR ], [PTY ] button child
folder of the current folder and displays
the first song in the folder. Press
TUNE/ENTER knob to move to the fold-
er displayed. It will play the first song in
the folder.
• Moves [CAT ], [FLDR ] button par-
ent folder and displays the first song in
the folder.
Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move to
the folder displayed.
13. DISC Selection Button
• [DISC ] Change button
Changes disc to the previous disc.
• [DISC ] Change button
Changes disc to the next disc.
14. MUTE Button
Press [MUTE] button to stop sound and
“Audio Mute” is displayed on the LCD.
15. CD LOAD Button
Push [LOAD] button to load CDs to avail-
able CDC deck (from 1~6).
Push [LOAD] button for more than 2 sec-
onds to load into all available decks.
The last CD will play.10 seconds idle sta-
tus will disable loading process.
Features of your vehicle
1364
CAUTION - Using USB
device
• To use an external USB device,
make sure the device is not con-
nected when starting up the vehi-
cle and connect the device after
starting up.
• If you start the engine when the
USB device is wnneeted, it may
damage the USB device. (USB
flashdrives are very sensitive to
electric shock)
• If the vehicle is started up or
turned off while the external USB
device is connected, the external
USB device may not work.
• It may not play inauthentic MP3 or
WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with
the compression rate between
8Kbps~320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music
files with the compression rate
between 8Kbps~320Kbps.
• Take cautions for static electricity
when connecting or disconnect-
ing the external USB device.
• An encoded MP3 PLAYER is not
recognizable.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Depending on the condition of
the external USB device, the con-
nected external USB device can
be unrecognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector
setting of External USB devices is
not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE,
then the device will not be recog-
nized.
• Use only a USB device formatted
to FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB I/F
authentication may not be recog-
nizable.
• Make sure the USB connection
terminal does not come in contact
with the human body or any
object.
• If you repeatedly connecting or
disconnecting USB device in a
short period of time, it may break
the device.
• You might hear a strange noise
when connecting or disconnect-
ing a USB device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If you disconnect the external USB
device during playback in USB
mode,the external USB device can
be damaged or malfunction.
Therefore, disconnect the external
USB device when the qudio is
turned off or in another mode.
• Depending on the type and capac-
ity of the external USB device or
the type of the files stored in the
device, there is a difference in the
time taken for recognition of the
device, but this is not an indicator
of trouble and you only have to
wait.
• Do not use the USB device for par-
pose other than playing music files.
• Use of USB accessories such as
recharger or heater using USB I/F
may lower performance or cause
trouble.
• If you use devices such as a USB
hub you purchased separately,
the vehicle’s audio system may
not recognize the USB device.
Connect the USB device directly
to the multimedia terminal of the
vehicle.
(Continued)
4137
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• If the USB device is divided by
logical drives, only the music files
on the highest-priority drive are
recognized by car audio.
• Devices such as MP3 Player/
Cellular phone/Digital camera and
those that are not recognizable by
standard USB I/F can be unrecog-
nizable.
• USB devices other than standard-
ized goods (METAL COVER TYPE
USB) can be unrecognizable.
• USB flash memory reader (such
as CF, SD, microSD, etc.) or exter-
nal-HDD type devices can be
unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM
(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT)
are not recognizalbe.
• The data in the USB memory may
lost while using this AUDIO, It is
recommeded to back up impor-
tant data on a personal.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Please avoid using USB memory
products which can be used as
key chains or cellular phone
accessories as they could cause
damage to the USB jack. Please
make certain only to use plug type
connector products as shown
below.
Features of your vehicle
1384
A-200ENL
1. INFO Selection Button
2.TRACK Moving Button
3. RANDOM Playback Button
4. REPEAT Button
5. USB Selection Button
6. FOLDER Moving Button
7. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button
8. SCAN Selection Button
9. Fast Search Button
USING USB(PA710S)
4139
Features of your vehicle
USING USB(PA760S)
A-300ENL
1. INFO Selection Button
2.TRACK Moving Button
3. RANDOM Playback Button
4. REPEAT Button
5. USB Selection Button
6. FOLDER Moving Button
7. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button
8. SCAN Selection Button
9. Fast Search Button
10. MUTE Button
Features of your vehicle
1404
USING USB(PA760S RSE)
A-350ENL
1. INFO Selection Button
2.TRACK Moving Button
3. RANDOM Playback Button
4. REPEAT Button
5. USB Selection Button
6. FOLDER Moving Button
7. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button
8. SCAN Selection Button
9. Fast Search Button
4141
Features of your vehicle
1. INFO Selection Button
Displays the information of the file cur-
rently played in the order of FILE NAME
➟ TITLE ➟ ARTIST ➟ ALBUM ➟ FOLD-
ER
➟ TOTAL FILE ➟ NORMAL DISPLAY
➟ FILE NAME ➟... (Displays no informa-
tion if the file has no song information.)
2.TRACK Moving Button
• Press the [TRACK ] button for less
than 0.8 second to play from the begin-
ning of the song currently played.Press
the button for less than 0.8 second and
press it again within 1 seconds to move
and play the previous track.
• Press the [SEEK ] button for less
than 0.8 second to move to the next-
track.
3. RANDOM Playback Button
Press this button for less than 0.8 second
to activate 'RDM' mode and more than
0.8 second to activate 'ALL RDM' mode.
• RDM : Only files in a folder are played
back in a random sequence.
• ALL RDM : All files in a USB memory
are played back in the random
sequence.
4. REPEAT Button
Press this button for less than 0.8 second
to activate 'RPT' mode and more than
0.8 second to activate 'FLD RPT' mode.
• RPT : Only a file is repeatedly played
back.
• FLD RPT : Only files in a folder are
repeatedly played back.
5. USB Selection Button
If USB is connected, it switches to the
USB mode from the other mode to play
the song files stored in the USB.
If no CD and auxiliary device is connect-
ed, it displays "No Media" for 3 seconds
and returns to the previous mode.
6. FOLDER Moving Button
• Moves [FLDR ], [PTY ] button sub
folder of the current folder and displays
the first song in the folder.
Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move to
the folder displayed. It will play the first
song in the folder.
• Moves [CAT ], [FLDR ] button main
folder and displays the first song in the
folder.
Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move to
the folder displayed.
7. SEARCH Knob & ENTER
Button
Turn this button clockwise to display the
songs next to the currently played song.
Turn the button counterclockwise to dis-
play the songs before the currently
played song.
Press the button to skip and play the
selected song.
8. SCAN Selection Button
Plays 10 seconds of each song in the
USB device.
Press the button once again to cancel
scanning.
9. Fast Search Button
Push [FF] button for 0.8 second or longer
to initiate high speed sound search of
current song.
Push [REW] button for 0.8 second or
longer to initiate reverse direction high
speed sound search of current song.
10. MUTE Button
Press [MUTE] to stop sound and “Audio
Mute” is displayed on the LCD.
Features of your vehicle
1424
1. INFO Selection Button
2.TRACK Moving Button
3. RANDOM Playback Button
4. REPEAT Button
5. iPod
®
Selection Button
6. CATEGORY Selection Button
7. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button
8. Fast Search Button
A-200ENL
RUNNING iPod
®
(PA710S)
iPod
®
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
4143
Features of your vehicle
RUNNING iPod
®
(PA760S)
A-300ENL
1. INFO Selection Button
2.TRACK Moving Button
3. RANDOM Playback Button
4. REPEAT Button
5. iPod
®
Selection Button
6. CATEGORY Selection Button
7. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button
8. Fast Search Button
9. MUTE Button
Features of your vehicle
1444
RUNNING iPod
®
(PA760S RSE)
A-350ENL
1. INFO Selection Button
2.TRACK Moving Button
3. RANDOM Playback Button
4. REPEAT Button
5. iPod
®
Selection Button
6. CATEGORY Selection Button
7. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button
8. Fast Search Button
4145
Features of your vehicle
Using an iPod
®
when the exclusive cable
is connected to the multiple terminal
inside the consol on the right hand side of
the driver's seat.
When the iPod
®
is connected, the 'iPod
®
'
icon will be displayed on the top left cor-
ner of the display screen.
1. INFO Selection Button
Displays the information of the file cur-
rently played in the order of TITLE
➟
ARTIST ➟ ALBUM ➟ NORMAL DISPLAY
➟ TITLE ➟... (Displays no information if
the file has no song information.)
2.TRACK Moving Button
• Press the [TRACK ] button for less
than 0.8 second to play from the begin-
ning of the song currently played.Press
the button for less than 0.8 second and
press it again within 1 seconds to move
and play the previous track.
• Press the [SEEK ] button for less
than 0.8 second to move to the next
track.
3. RANDOM Playback Button
Press the button for less than 0.8 second
to activate or deactivate the random play-
back of the songs within the current cat-
egory. Press the button for longer than
0.8 second to randomly play all songs in
the entire album of the iPod
®
.
Press the button once again to cancel
the mode.
4. REPEAT Button
Repeats the song currently played.
5. iPod
®
Selection Button
If iPod
®
is connected, it switches to the
iPod
®
mode from the CD mode to play
the song files stored in the iPod
®
. If no
CD and auxiliary device is connected, it
displays "No Media" for 3 seconds and
returns to the previous mode.
6. CATEGORY Selection Button
Moves to the upper category from cur-
rentlyplayed category of the iPod
®
.
To move to the category displayed, press
SEARCH/ENTER Button.You will be able
to search through the lower category of
the selected category.
The order of iPod
®
's category is SONG,
ALBUMS, ARTISTS, GENRES, and iPod
®
.
7. SEARCH Knob & ENTER
Button
When you turn the button clockwise, it
will display the songs(category) next to
the song currently played(category in the
same level).
Also, when you turn the button counter-
clockwise, it will display the songs(cate-
gory) before the song currently played
(category in the same level).
If you want to listen to the song displayed
in the song category, press the button,
then it will skip to the selected song and
play.
8. Fast Search Button
• Push [FF] button for 0.8 second or
longer to initiate high speed sound
search of current song.
• Push [REW] button for 0.8 second or
longer to initiate reverse direction high
speed sound search of current song.
9. MUTE Button
Press [MUTE] button to stop sound and
“Audio Mute” is displayed on the LCD.
Features of your vehicle
1464
✽✽
NOTICE - Using the iPod
®
device
• Some iPod
®
models might not support
the communication protocol and the
files will not be played. (iPod
®
models
supported: Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G)
• The order of search or playback of
songs in the iPod
®
can be different
from the order searched in the audio
system.
• If the iPod
®
crashes due to its own
trouble, reset the iPod
®
. (Reset: Refer
to iPod
®
manual)
• An iPod
®
may not operate normally
on low battery.
CAUTION IN USING THE
iPod
®
DEVICE
• You need the power cable exclu-
sive for an iPod
®
in order to oper-
ate the iPod
®
with the buttons on
the audio system. The PC cable
provided by Apple may cause a
malfunction and should not be
used in the vehicle.
• When connecting the device with
the iPod
®
cable, push in the jack
fully.
• When adjusting the sound effects
of the iPod
®
and the audio sys-
tem, the sound effects of both
devices may overlap and distort
the quality of the sound.
• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer
function of the iPod
®
when adjust-
ing the audio system's volume,
and turn off the equalizer of the
audio system when using the
equalizer of the iPod
®
.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When the iPod
®
cable is connect-
ed, the system can be switched to
the AUX mode even without the
iPod
®
device and may cause
noise. Disconnect the iPod
®
cable
when not using the iPod
®
device.
• When the iPod
®
is not used with
the audio system, the iPod
®
cable
should be removed from the iPod
®
.
4147
Features of your vehicle
1. XM Selection Button
2. INFO Button
3. Automatic Channel Selection Button
4. SCAN Button
5. CATEGORY Search Button
6. Manual Channel Selection Knob
7. Preset Button
XM SATELLITE RADIO(PA710S)
A-200ENL
Features of your vehicle
1484
XM SATELLITE RADIO(PA760S)
A-300ENL
1. XM Selection Button
2. INFO Button
3. Automatic Channel Selection Button
4. SCAN Button
5. CATEGORY Search Button
6. Manual Channel Selection Knob
7. Preset Button
8. MUTE Button
4149
Features of your vehicle
XM SATELLITE RADIO(PA760S RSE)
A-350ENL
1. XM Selection Button
2. INFO Button
3. Automatic Channel Selection Button
4. SCAN Button
5. CATEGORY Search Button
6. Manual Channel Selection Knob
7. Preset Button
Features of your vehicle
1504
1. XM Selection Button
Turns to XM Satellite Radio Mode. XM
mode toggles in order to XM1
➟ XM2 ➟
XM3 ➟ XM1... when the button is
pressed each time.
2. INFO Button
Displays the information of the current
channel in the order of Artist/Song title
➟
Category/Channel name ➟ Current Play
Channel
➟ Artist/Song title ➟ Category/
Channel name... when the button is
pressed each time. If it can not display
the whole text information, rotate the
tune button to see the next page.
3. Automatic Channel Selection
Button
• Push [TRACK ] button for less than
0.8 second to select previous channel.
• Push [SEEK ] button for less than 0.8
second to select next channel.
• Radio ID : Seek or Tune to XM channel
0 to display the Radio ID.
4. SCAN Button
Press to hear a brief sampling of all
channels.
To cancel the scan mode, press the but-
ton once again.
5. CATEGORY Search Button
• Push [FLDR ] button to search previ-
ous category.
• Push [CAT ] button to search next
category. To listen to the displayed cat-
egory, press the TUNE/ENTER knob.To
scan channel in displayed category,
press the scan button.
To search channel in displayed category,
press seek buttons or turn the tune but-
ton clockwise/counterclockwise.(CATE-
GORY icon will be turned on in Category
mode)
6. Manual Channel Selection
Knob
While listening to XM broadcast, rotate
this control to the right or left to search
other channels while listening to current
channel. (Turn to the right to searchhigh-
er channels and left, lower channels.)
7. Preset Button
Push [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8 sec-
ond to play the channel saved in each
button. Push Preset button for 0.8 sec-
ond or longer to save current channel to
the respective button with a beep.
8. MUTE Button
Press [MUTE] button to stop sound and
“Audio Mute” is displayed on the LCD.
4151
Features of your vehicle
DVDP(PA760S RSE)
A-350ENL
1.TRACK UP/DOWN Button
2. RSE Selection Button
3. RSE Hold and RSE Power Off
4. Folder Moving Button
Features of your vehicle
1524
In case RSE is loaded DVD disc and con-
nected auxiliary device at RSE unit that
is located the rear seat.
1.TRACK UP/DOWN Button
• Push [TRACK ] button for less than
0.8 second to play from the beginning
of current song.
• Push [TRACK ] button for less than
0.8 second and press again within 1
seconds to play the previous song.
• Push [TRACK ] button for 0.8 or
longer to initiate reverse direction high
speed sound search of current song.
• Push [SEEK ] button for less than 0.8
second to play the next song.
• Push [SEEK ] button for 0.8 or longer
to initiate high speed sound search of
current song.
2. RSE Selection Button
When you press this button, the system
will switch to RSE mode and you will be
able to listen to the source played in the
RSE unit. (If RSE unit has no disc, can
not select)
3. RSE Hold and RSE Power Off
If you press and hold this button for less
than 0.8 second, the LED of the button
will light and RSE unit will be locked. If
you press and hold this button for more
than 0.8 second, RSE unit will be turned
off with a beep and [RSE] will disappear
from LCD.
4. Folder Moving Button
• Moves [FLDR ], button child folder of
the current folder and displays the first
song in the folder.
• Moves [CAT ] button parent folder
and displays the first song in the folder.
CAUTION - Using RSE
device
When listening to the CD on the
Audio H/UNIT in RSE, the mode can-
not be converted to USB on the
Audio H/UNIT and will be dis-
played on the LCD.
4153
Features of your vehicle
D320000AEN
Important Safety Information
It is always important to operate your
vehicle in a safe manner and to avoid dis-
traction while driving. This manual pro-
vides information that will help you safely
operate your Rear Seat Entertainment
System (RSE). Please read it completely
before using the system.
This device complies with part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2.This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Welcome
The Rear Seat Entertainment System is
a compact, built-in, easy-to-use enter-
tainment system designed to provide
family fun while you are on the road.
Enjoy great quality sound from the vehi-
cle speakers, or have a private, quiet lis-
tening with the wireless headphones.
The overhead display unit is mounted to
the ceiling in the rear passenger area of
the vehicle, allowing rear-seat passen-
gers to play DVD movies, video CDs or
music CDs. Users may also plug in a
game platform or VHS player into an aux-
iliary input to show the programs through
the RSE display. The RSE can also
access to the vehicle's front radio pro-
grams.
System Overview
Connections / Setup
Your Rear Seat Entertainment system
will play DVD movies, video CDs, music
CDs or music MP3 discs and Mix CD
(Regarding Mix CD, only the CD track
can be played by system.), and is
designed to make your time on the road
more enjoyable. Please follow these
instructions carefully to get the most out
of your RSE.
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (RSE) (IF EQUIPPED)
CAUTION
• Avoid having food or drinks near,
in or on the RSE, the wireless
headphones or the remote con-
troller.
• Direct sunlight may interfere with
the headphone's operation and
performance.
• Normal RSE operation cannot be
guaranteed with unofficially
duplicated discs.
(Continued)
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
Features of your vehicle
1544
✽✽
NOTICE
The RSE requires a few seconds of set
up time after the ignition switch is
turned ON or to ACC mode.
Your RSE system is already set up and
ready for use, and can be turned on by
pushing the POWER/VOLUME knob on
the RSE control panel or the POWER
ON/OFF button on the remote
controller. The vehicle's ignition must be
turned on or in accessory power mode.
The RSE system can also be turned OFF
by the Audio Unit.
Components
Your RSE consists of several compo-
nents:
Monitor (LCD display)
The Monitor (LCD display) where video
is viewed, is attached to the ceiling in the
rear of the vehicle.
(Continued)
• To prevent inadvertent vehicle
battery discharge when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the igni-
tion ON position or Accessory
mode, a battery drain warning
message will flash on the RSE
monitor screen.
• Use of rear seat entertainment
system without the engine run-
ning will reduce vehicle battery
power.
• The RSE system is programmed
to the assigned DVD format for
your region.Please note that your
RSE will not read or play DVDs
from a different region.
RSE-AUDIO-3
4155
Features of your vehicle
RSE Control Panel
The RSE Control Panel, which includes
a digital display and the RSE control but-
tons, is located in the rear of the armrest
console between the front seats.
DVD Player
The DVD Player, where CDs, DVDs and
other discs are inserted, is located below
the RSE control panel located in the rear
of the armrest console between the front
seats.
Wireless headphones
The Wireless headphones allows you
to hear the audio from the RSE without
disturbing other passengers. Two sets,
with batteries, are provided.
RSE-AUDIO-4 RSE-AUDIO-5 RSE-AUDIO-6
Features of your vehicle
1564
Remote control
The Remote control allows you to con-
trol RSE functions. Batteries are includ-
ed.
Opening and Closing the Monitor
To view the monitor, locate the latch on
the bottom-center of the ceiling-mounted
unit and pull it forward. This will release
the monitor from its locked, stow-away
position.
Adjust the monitor to the best viewing
angle. Do not touch the LCD panel itself
to avoid damage or smudging.
Adjusting the Monitor
Press the DISP button on the RSE con-
trol panel to adjust the parameters of the
monitor. To adjust the brightness, firstly,
select the brightness item, then, press
the < REW (dimmer) or FF > (brighter)
buttons. The next time the RSE is turned
on, the monitor will return to the bright-
ness level it was adjusted to when last
used.Brightness can be adjusted regard-
less of whether the RSE is playing an
audio or video source.
While the RSE is playing a video signal,
press DISP and then press the
NEXT or PREV buttons to cycle
through other monitor adjustments
including SCREEN SIZE, CONTRAST,
CHROMA and HUE. With any of these
settings displayed on the monitor, press
the < REW or FF > buttons to adjust
these settings.
To close the monitor, pull the bottom
edge towards you and push it up until it
clicks and locks into the stow-away posi-
tion.
RSE-AUDIO-7 ACT-1
4157
Features of your vehicle
Cleaning the Display
If the LCD display becomes dusty or
dirty, clean it by wiping gently with a soft,
dry, clean cloth. Do not use chemical
cleanser to clean the screen.
Loading a Disc
To load a disc in the player, insert it part
way into the loading slot. The player will
automatically grip the disc and pull it the
rest of the way in.
Disc Protection
The player has an Auto-Reload Disc
Protection feature to protect discs from
accidental damage. If a disc is not
removed within 12 seconds after being
ejected, it will be pulled back into the
player.
Audio via Vehicle Speakers
To hear the audio from the RSE through
the vehicle's speakers, the RSE button
(located in the front radio control) must
be selected. Regardless of whether RSE
audio is selected for the vehicle speakers
or not, when the RSE audio is playing it
can be heard in the headphones.
Volume Control
You can adjust the volume of the audio
heard in the vehicle speakers from the
RSE control panel or the remote control.
From the RSE control panel, rotate the
POWER/VOLUME knob. From the
remote control, press "VOL +" to
increase the volume and "VOL -" to
decrease the volume.
Adjusting the volume in this way will not
affect the wireless headphone volume.To
adjust the headphones, turn the VOL
control wheel on the headphones.
Headphones
Your RSE comes with two (2) sets of
wireless headphones and four (4) AAA
1.5V batteries. To install the batteries,
press the button below the battery com-
partment on the right side of each set of
headphones and insert each of the bat-
teries, observing the correct polarity as
shown in the headphone battery com-
partment. Each set of headphones
requires two batteries.
To turn the headphones on, push the
POWER button on the left side of the
headphones. Push the button again to
turn the headphones off. Adjust the vol-
ume by turning the Volume control. The
headphones can be adjusted for size,
and can be stored more compactly by
folding them.
RSE-AUDIO-9
Features of your vehicle
1584
✽✽
NOTICE
• Conserve the energy of your batteries
by turning the headphones off when
they are not in use. Headphone bat-
teries will typically work for 48 hours,
depending on the volume setting.
• The headphone has an automatic
shutoff feature to extend battery life.
The headphones will automatically
turn off after 20 seconds if they don't
detect a signal from the RSE.
• In case of poor headphone reception
performance, please check the battery
condition.
The headphones perform best when
used within 2 - 8 feet (0.6-2 m) of the
RSE LCD display. Getting too close or
too far away will cause poor reception.
• Audio from the vehicle's CD/radio
cannot be heard through the head-
phones.
Connecting Other Devices to the
RSE
Electronic devices such as video game
systems or VHS players can be played
through the RSE.These external devices
can be connected to the unit via RCA
plugs available in the vehicle.
Press the SOURCE button on the remote
control, or the SRC button on the RSE
control panel, to select and switch to the
external device inputs.
Once the RSE has switched to the exter-
nal device audio and/or video sources,
you can operate the device using its con-
trols. The RSE controls will not control
external devices.
For example, to control or play a video
game after the RSE has recognized it as
the source, you must use the game con-
trols, not the RSE controls.
✽✽
NOTICE
• To prevent noise, devices connected to
the AUX port should have the volume
adjusted high.
• If an external power connector is con-
nected to the vehicle, static noise may
occur. If noise is heard, verify the
AUX device volume is turned up, then
test the sound with the power cable
disconnected. If necessary, use the
AUX device powered from its internal
battery, or purchase a ground loop
isolator to connect the AUX device to
the vehicle.
RSE-EN-10
CAUTION
Connect only appropriate input
sources to the RSE jacks. Be sure
to connect audio outputs from the
external device to audio inputs in
your vehicle, and video outputs to
video inputs. Connecting an incor-
rect input may cause damage to the
RSE and/or the external electronic
device.
4159
Features of your vehicle
RSE Lock Function
Front seat passengers can prevent rear-
seat passengers from operating the RSE
with the RSE Lock function. To lock the
RSE, press the " " button located
in the front radio control.
"Lock" will appear on the RSE monitor,
as well as on the RSE control panel.
None of the RSE control panel or remote
control buttons will function while the
RSE is locked except for the POWER
button on the RSE control panel and the
remote control. Rear seat passengers
will still be able to eject or insert a disc in
the player.
Press this button again to turn off the
RSE lock.
Battery Discharge Warning
To prevent inadvertent vehicle battery
discharge when the ignition switch is
turned to the ignition ON position or ACC
mode, a battery drain warning message
will flash on the RSE monitor screen.
RSE-AUDIO-10RSE-EN-10A
Features of your vehicle
1604
1. ON/OFF and Speaker Volume
2. RSE Display
3. MENU Button
4. DISP (Display) Button
5. SRC (Source) Button
6. Play/Pause Button
7 - 11 Next / Prev (Next/Previous)
and < REW/FF > (Rewind/Fast
Forward) and ENTER Buttons
Most RSE functions are available through the RSE control panel.
RSE-EN001
RSE Control Panel Operation
4161
Features of your vehicle
1. ON/OFF and Speaker Volume
Press the POWER/VOLUME knob to
turn the RSE on or off.
Rotate the knob to adjust the speaker
volume. Note that changing the volume
by using the POWER/VOLUME knob
affects only the vehicle speakers. The
wireless headset volume is not affected.
See the "Headphones" section of this
manual for more information.
2. RSE Display
This RSE control panel display indicates
the current selected source, mode of
operation in the current disc, and other
information. It will display FRONT to indi-
cate that the selected source is the front
vehicle radio and REAR to indicate that
the RSE player is the current source.
The display will indicate DISC IN when a
disc is in loaded the RSE player.
3. MENU Button
DVD can be controlled, and any special
programming or features accessed, by
using the DVD menu. To access the
menu while playing a DVD, press the
MENU button.Press the button a second
time to exit the menu and return to the
DVD program at the point it was being
viewed.
While viewing the menu, press the
NEXT button to move the cursor up and
the PREV button to move the cursor
down the menu. Press the FF > button
to move the cursor to the right, and the
< REW button to move the cursor to the
left.
❇ For more details, see the "DVD -
Menu" section of this manual.
4. DISP (Display) Button
Pressing DISP enables you to adjust the
parameters of the LCD monitor.For more
information on how to make these adjust-
ments, see the "Display" section of this
manual.
EN-DEL-2A
Features of your vehicle
1624
5. SRC (Source) Button
After inserting a disc in the RSE, it will
automatically use that as the source and
begin playing that disc. The RSE control
panel will display "DISC IN" when there is
disc loaded in the player.
Pressing the SRC button will bring out
the Source Change Operation. All avail-
able modes are presented. You can
select any available mode by using the
four direction arrow buttons and press
the ENTER button for completing the
selection.
While the RSE is selected as the source
by the front vehicle radio, the front vehi-
cle radio will be able to control some
RSE functions (e.g. Fast Forward /
Reverse, Previous / Next Track, etc.).See
your vehicle radio user manual for more
information.
✽✽
NOTICE
When switching from the vehicle radio
to the RSE, there is a slight delay while
the RSE initializes. The RSE control
panel will display "READ" while the
disc initializes, then begin playing the
disc.
The RSE control panel will display
"REAR" if the current source is the RSE
player, "FRONT" if the current source is
the front vehicle radio.
6. Play/Pause Button
You do not need to press the PLAY/
PAUSE button after loading a disc
to begin playing the disc. The player will
start playing automatically.
While a disc is playing, press to
pause.While paused, the elapsed time of
the current disc will blink on the monitor
status display, and "PAUSE" will be dis-
played on the RSE control panel. Press
the button again to resume play.
✽✽
NOTICE
The RSE will enter standby mode when
the vehicle ignition is turned off. When
the vehicle is turned back on within 30
seconds, the RSE will turn on and the
DVD/VCD will automatically begin
playing again at the point where it
paused. If the vehicle is turned off for
longer than 30 seconds, the RSE system
will not turn on automatically when the
vehicle is restarted.
EN-DEL-3A
4163
Features of your vehicle
7 - 11 Next / Prev (Next/Previous)
and < REW/FF > (Rewind/Fast
Forward) and ENTER Buttons
The NEXT/ PREV and <REW/FF>
buttons provide a variety of functions,
depending on the media currently being
played in the RSE or the source selected.
For some of the functions, you will use
these buttons to navigate to the desired
location or option, then press the ENTER
button in the center to confirm your
selection.
For specific information about using
these buttons, see the appropriate sec-
tion for the various media types in this
manual.
DVD/VCD Player Operation
Disc/Format Compatibility
Your RSE player accepts and plays all
DVDs in 4:3 (normal) and 16:9
(widescreen) video formats. With DVDs
that offer multiple formats, the default for-
mat is 16:9 and will stay that way unless
changed by the user. See "Adjusting the
Monitor" to learn how to adjust the for-
mat.
The DVD player has the capability to play
DVD-Video, DVD-R, DVD-RW, CD-DA,
CD-R, CD-RW, VCD and Video-CD.
The DVD player was factory programmed
with a region code for the assigned mar-
ket or country. If a DVD is inserted for a
region code that doesn't match with the
player, an error message will be shown
on the overhead monitor and the RSE
control panel display.
✽✽
NOTICE
Because there is no universal standard
for DVD/VCD programming, your disc
may behave differently. Some DVDs
may present warning messages about
unauthorized duplication, some will go
directly to a menu, some may have dif-
ferent on-disc menu and start playing
the movie immediately, and some may
be unreadable or damaged and an error
message will be shown on the monitor.
✽✽
NOTICE
While the player will accept DVD ROM
and CD ROM discs, the RSE cannot
play discs in these formats.
Features of your vehicle
1644
The player is only capable of reading the
bottom side of a disc. When inserting a
single-sided disc, the label side should
be up. When inserting a two-sided disc,
the desired play side should be down.
Press DISP on the RSE control panel or
the remote controller, then press the
NEXT or PREV buttons to cycle
through monitor adjustments (SCREEN
SIZE, BRIGHTNESS, CONTRAST,
CHROMA, HUE). When the adjustment
for the SCREEN SIZE, use the < REW or
FF > buttons to select the preferred
screen size.
Menu
DVDs can be controlled, and any special
programming or features accessed, by
using the menu. To access the menu
while playing a DVD, press the MENU
button.Press the button a second time to
exit the menu and return to the DVD pro-
gram at the point it was being viewed.
The menu is not available during disc ini-
tialization, the beginning credits or any
copyright and FBI warnings.
While viewing the menu, press the
NEXT button to move the cursor up and
the PREV button to move the cursor
down the menu. Press the FF > button
to move the cursor to the right, and the
< REW button to move the cursor to the
left.
✽✽
NOTICE
You must repeatedly push any button to
move through several items. Pressing
and holding a button will not advance
the cursor beyond the first item.
Press ENTER or Play/Pause to select the
desired menu choice.
Playing a DVD/VCD
You can control your DVD or VCD by
using the buttons on the RSE control
panel or by using the remote control.
Instructions for the controls listed below
are the same whether using the RSE
control panel or the remote control.
However, there are some additional func-
tions that are only available from the
remote control. These buttons and their
functions are discussed in the "Remote
Control" section of this manual.
4165
Features of your vehicle
Play/Pause Button
You do not need to press the
PLAY/PAUSE button after loading a disc
to begin playing the disc. The player will
start playing automatically.
While a disc is playing, press PLAY/
PAUSE to pause. While paused, the
elapsed time of the current disc will blink
on the monitor status display, and
"PAUSE" will be displayed on the RSE
control panel. Press the button again to
resume play.
✽✽
NOTICE
The RSE will enter standby mode when
the vehicle ignition is turned off. When
the vehicle is turned back on within 30
seconds, the RSE will turn on and the
CD will automatically begin playing
again at the point where it paused. If the
vehicle is turned off for longer than 30
seconds, the RSE system will not turn on
automatically when the vehicle is
restarted.
Fast Forward/Reverse
Press and hold the FF > or < REW but-
ton and the player will fast forward or
reverse at 32 times the normal speed.
Release the FWD > or < REW button to
return to normal speed play.
Previous/Next Chapter
While a DVD/VCD is playing, press the
NEXT button to skip to the next chapter.
Press the PREV button to jump to
the beginning of the current chapter.
Press PREV again to go move
through earlier chapters. Press the but-
ton repeatedly to move quickly through
chapters.
✽✽
NOTICE
Some VCDs do not have track informa-
tion. If the VCD has no chapter infor-
mation, pressing either of these buttons
will restart the VCD.
While pressing the NEXT or
PREV buttons, the Status Display, includ-
ing the current medium (DVD or VCD),
chapter and title information is displayed.
It will automatically disappear after five
seconds.
✽✽
NOTICE
Some DVDs do not permit chapter nav-
igation.
Instead of using the PREV /
NEXT buttons, you can also enter the
chapter number using the numbers on
the remote controller. While a DVD/VCD
is playing, press the number button(s)
that correspond to the desired chapter
and press ENTER.
Features of your vehicle
1664
Stop a Disc
The disc will automatically stop when any
other source (e.g. the vehicle radio or an
external game) is selected. When you
switch back to the DVD, it will begin play-
ing at the point where it stopped.
While the player is running, press the
RSE control panel POWER/VOLUME
knob, or the POWER ON/OFF button
on the remote control, to stop a
disc and turn off the RSE system and the
DVD player. When the RSE is turned on
again, the disc will begin playing at the
point where it stopped.
Eject a Disc
To eject a disc press the button. A
disc can be ejected even when the unit is
not turned on.
✽✽
NOTICE
The player has an Auto-Reload Disc
Protection feature to protect discs from
accidental damage. If a disc is not
removed within 12 seconds after being
ejected, it will be pulled back into the
player.
CD Player Operation
The RSE will play audio CDs and mix
CDs in standard (12 cm) format.
✽✽
NOTICE
While the player will accept DVD ROM
and CD ROM discs, the RSE cannot
play discs in these formats.
While the player is playing mix CD, only
the audio track will be played. The data
file will not be played by system.
4167
Features of your vehicle
Volume Control
You can adjust the volume of the audio
heard in the vehicle speakers from the
RSE control panel or the remote control.
From the RSE control panel, rotate the
POWER/VOLUME knob. From the
remote control, press "VOL +" to
increase and "VOL -" to decrease the
volume.
Adjusting the volume in this way will not
adjust the wireless headphone volume.
To adjust the headphones, roll the VOL
control wheel.
Play/Pause
When a CD is inserted, the RSE will
automatically begin playing the first track.
Press the PLAY/PAUSE button to
pause the CD. Press the button again to
resume play. While paused, the elapsed
time in the status display at the top of the
monitor will blink. The RSE control will
display "PAUSE."
When the player reaches the end of the
disc, the player will automatically return
to the first track and continue playing.
Fast Forward / Reverse
Press and hold the FF > or < REW but-
ton and the player will fast forward or
reverse at 10 times the normal speed.
Release the button to return to normal
speed play.
The audio is muted while the player fast
forwards or fast reverses.
Previous/Next Track
While a CD is playing, press the
PREV button to jump to the beginning of
the current track. If less than 10 seconds
has elapsed on the current track, press-
ing PREV will go to the previous
track.Press the button repeatedly to con-
tinue moving through previous tracks.
Press the NEXT button to jump to the
beginning of the next track. Press the
button repeatedly to continue moving
through the following tracks.
Instead of using the PREV /
NEXT buttons, you can also enter the
track number using the numbers on the
remote control. While a CD is playing,
press the number button(s) that corre-
spond to the desired track and press
ENTER.
The current track number is shown in the
Status Display at the top of the monitor.
Stop
The CD will automatically stop when any
other source (e.g. the vehicle radio or an
external game) is selected. When you
switch back to the CD, it will begin play-
ing at the point where it stopped.
While a CD is playing, you can stop the
CD by pressing the POWER ON/OFF
button on the remote control or the
POWER/VOLUME knob on the RSE
control panel.When the RSE is turned on
again, it will automatically begin playing
the CD at the point where it was stopped.
Turning the vehicle off, or selecting a dif-
ferent RSE Source, will also stop playing
the CD.
Eject
Press the EJECT button to eject the
CD. Discs can be ejected even when the
unit is not turned on.
✽✽
NOTICE
The player has an Auto-Reload Disc
Protection feature to protect discs from
accidental damage. If a disc is not
removed within 12 seconds after being
ejected, it will be pulled back into the
player. This is to protect the disc from
accidental damage.
Features of your vehicle
1684
Using the MP3 Player
Most RSE functions work the same for
audio CDs and MP3 discs.The major dif-
ference is that audio CDs are organized
by "tracks," while MP3 discs are organ-
ized using folders and files. Therefore,
the navigation functions are somewhat
different for MP3 discs. If the discs
including CD and MP3 file, the system
only will play the CD track, not the MP3
data file.
✽✽
NOTICE
While the player will accept DVD ROM
and CD ROM discs, the RSE cannot
play discs in these formats.
Pause/Play
When an MP3 disc is inserted, the RSE
will automatically begin playing the first
file in the disc. Press the PLAY/PAUSE
button to pause the file. Press the
button again to resume play. While
paused, the elapsed time in the status
display at the top of the monitor will blink.
The RSE control panel will display
"PAUSE."
At the end of the disc, the player will
automatically return to the first file and
continue playing.
Fast Forward/Reverse
Press and hold the FF > or < REW but-
ton and the player will fast forward or
reverse at 10 times the normal speed.
Release the button to return to normal
speed play.
The audio is muted while the player fast
forwards or fast reverses.
Song List : Navigating Folders and
Files
MP3 discs are organized by named fold-
ers, with each folder containing a collec-
tion of named music files.You can quick-
ly navigate through the folders and files
using the Song List function.
Press the MENU button on the RSE con-
trol panel or remote control to display the
song list. The focused song will be high-
lighted. And the music note icon appears
to left of the song currently playing.
To navigate through the folders, press
the < REW or FF > button to highlight the
FOLDER UP, FOLDER DOWN, or
HOME buttons on the monitor, the press
ENTER to move up or down the folders.
Press ENTER repeatedly to move
through all the folders.
When you reach the desired folder, press
the PREV or NEXT buttons to
scroll through the list of files in that folder
and press ENTER to select the desired
file.The player will switch to the selected
folder and begin playing the desired file.
4169
Features of your vehicle
Selecting the HOME button on the dis-
play and pressing ENTER will bring the
Song List to the screen with the song
currently playing.
Press MENU again to leave the Song
List.The Song List will automatically dis-
appear after five seconds if no buttons
are pressed.
While in normal play mode, press the
A.LANG (FOLD-) button at any time to
jump to the first file in the previous folder,
press S.TITLE (FOLD+) to jump to the
first file in the next folder.
Previous/Next File
While a disc is playing, press the
PREV button to jump to the beginning of
the current file. If less than 10 seconds
has elapsed on the current file, pressing
PREV will go to the previous file.
Press it again to select previous files.
Press the button repeatedly to continue
moving through previous files.
Press the NEXT button to jump to the
beginning of the next file. Press the but-
ton repeatedly to continue moving
through the following files.
The current folder name and file name
are shown in the Status Display at the
top of the monitor.
EN-DEL-4A
Features of your vehicle
1704
Stop
The disc will automatically stop when any
other source (e.g. the vehicle radio or an
external game) is selected. When you
switch back to the disc, it will begin play-
ing at the point where it stopped.
While a disc is playing, you can stop the
disc by pressing the POWER ON/OFF
button on the remote control or the
POWER/VOLUME knob on the RSE
control panel.When the RSE is turned on
again, it will automatically begin playing
the disc at the point where it was
stopped.
Turning the vehicle off, or selecting a dif-
ferent RSE Source, will also stop playing
the disc. When the vehicle is turned on
again, or the disc is again selected as the
source, the disc will begin playing at the
point where it was stopped. The player
will automatically resume play at the
point where it was stopped unless the
disc is ejected.
✽✽
NOTICE
The player has an Auto-Reload Disc
Protection feature to protect discs from
accidental damage. If a disc is not
removed within 12 seconds after being
ejected, it will be pulled back into the
player. This is to protect the disc from
accidental damage.
Eject
Press the EJECT button to eject the
disc.Discs can be ejected even when the
unit is not turned on.
Using the XM radio
All the preset channels have been listed
on the XM operation interface. You can
use the FF > or < REW button to select a
preset station. Press the ENTER button
to complete this selection. After the
desired station has been selected, the
information of this station will be listed in
the information display area.
When the focus is on the CATEGORY or
CHANNEL button, after you press the
NEXT or PREV button, the CAT-
EGORY up/down or CHANNEL up/down
function are activated.
EN-DEL-5A
4171
Features of your vehicle
In addition, if you press the ENTER but-
ton when the focus is on the CATEGORY
or CHANNEL button, after you press and
hold the NEXT or PREV button,
the Fast Tune function is activated. Fast
Tune makes it easy for you to search for
a favorite channel. After you find a
favorite channel, press the ENTER but-
ton to complete this selection.
When the CATEGORY button is high-
lighted, moving the focus to CHANNEL
button and using the NEXT or
PREV button also will allow you to select
the next channel and previous channel in
the same category. If you put the focus
on the SCAN button not the CHANNEL
button, after pressing the ENTER button,
the SCAN category function also can be
activated.
Listening to the Vehicle Radio
To control the vehicle radio from the RSE
control panel or remote control, press the
SOURCE button on the remote control or
the SRC button on the RSE control
panel, then select the desired play mode
on the source change operation. Finally,
press the ENTER button to complete the
selection.
The RSE monitor status display and the
RSE control panel will indicate the
selected source.
Tuning a Station
While the vehicle radio is the current
source, press the NEXT or PREV
button on the RSE control panel or
remote control once to search up or
down for the next available station.When
the tuner finds a station it will stop at the
station and start to play.
Press the NEXT or PREV button
to seek up or down through all radio sta-
tions. When the radio finds a station, it
will stop and play that station.
Press the FF > or < REW button to man-
ually tune up or down one channel.Press
and hold the FF > or < REW button to
continue tuning up or down.
Pressing a number on the remote control
keypad will tune to the corresponding
preset station. For example, if 89.7 has
been stored as preset 1 (CH1), then
pressing the 1 button on the keypad will
tune to that station.
Features of your vehicle
1724
AM, FM1 and FM2 Selection
While the vehicle radio is the current
source, press the MODE button to cycle
through each of the available radio
bands, AM, FM1, FM2 and other avail-
able radio modes.
All of the RSE control panel and remote
control navigation functions can be used
to control the front radio when the vehicle
front radio is also playing the same radio
mode.
Viewing Front CD and MP3
Programs
The RSE can be used to control discs
that are loaded and playing in the vehicle
radio. To control these discs, you must
first select the vehicle radio as the
source. Press the SOURCE button on
the remote control, or the SRC button on
the RSE control panel, Meanwhile, the
Source Change UI will bring out. Use the
four direction arrow buttons to select the
source of vehicle radio. And press the
ENTER button for completing the selec-
tion.
Then the Disc Selection UI will bring out.
Also using the four direction arrow but-
tons to select the disc which is you
favorite.
CD/CD-MP3 Control
While the vehicle radio is playing a CD or
MP3 audio disc, all of the RSE control
panel and remote control navigation
functions can be used to control the vehi-
cle radio.This includes:
• Pause/Play
• Fast Forward/Reverse
• Previous/Next Track (CD) and
Previous/Next File (MP3)
See these sections of the Users Manual
for information on using these functions.
All of the RSE control panel and remote
control navigation functions can be used
to control the front radio when the vehicle
front radio is also playing the CD or CD-
MP3 mode.
AUX Audio and Video Input
Controls
This allows you to display the video out-
put on the RSE monitor, and listen to the
audio through the wireless headsets and
the vehicle speakers.
To switch to an external auxiliary device,
press the SOURCE button on the remote
control or SRC on the RSE control panel,
then select the AUX icon button. And
press the ENTER button for completing.
EN-DEL-6A
4173
Features of your vehicle
1. POWER ON/OFF Button
2. Mute Button
3. Number Buttons
4. Source Button
5. A.LANG-Alternate Language, Folder -
6. S.Title – Subtitles, Folders +
7. Menu Button
8.Title/PBC Button
9. Return Button
10. Speaker Volume "VOL +" and "VOL –"
In addition to buttons and functions available from the RSE control panel, the remote control has several additional buttons and operation control
functions.The remote control is an infrared device and should be pointed at the RSE monitor for best results.
RSE-EN004-RE
Using the Remote Control
Features of your vehicle
1744
1. POWER On/Off
Press the RSE control panel POWER
button or the POWER ON/OFF button
on the remote control to turn the
RSE on or off. If a disc is loaded and
playing when the RSE is turned off, when
the RSE is turned back on the disc will
automatically resume playback at the
point where it was stopped.
2. Mute
Press the MUTE button to mute the
audio in the vehicle speakers.The MUTE
button has no effect on the wireless
headphones.
While muted, the RSE control panel,
vehicle radio and RSE monitor will all dis-
play "MUTE." Press the button again, or
adjust the volume at RSE control panel
or vehicle radio, to un-mute the audio.
3. Number Buttons ~
The number buttons (0 through 9) can
be used to directly enter information such
as chapters in a DVD, track or file num-
bers for audio CDs, and preset radio.
To select a DVD or VCD chapter, while a
DVD/VCD is playing, press the number
button(s) that correspond to the desired
chapter and press ENTER.
To select a CD track, while a CD is play-
ing press the number button(s) that cor-
respond to the track and press ENTER.
To select a radio station preset, while the
desired band (AM, FM1 or FM2) is
selected, press the numbered button that
corresponds to the preset on the vehicle
radio.There is no need to press ENTER.
4. Source
Pressing this SOURCE button will bring
out the Source Change selection opera-
tion. You can select any available mode
by using the four direction arrow buttons
and press the ENTER button for com-
pleting the selection.
The RSE control panel will display
"REAR" if the current source is the RSE
player, and will display "FRONT" if the
current source is the vehicle radio.
5. A.LANG - Alternate Language
Folder -
Where alternate languages are available
on a DVD, pressing the A.LANG button
will allow you to select your preferred lan-
guage. Press the button repeatedly to
cycle through the available languages.
When the desired language is displayed,
press ENTER.
Pressing the A.LANG (or FOLD-) button
during MP3 normal play will immediately
bring the player to the first file of the pre-
vious folder.
Pressing the A.LANG (or FOLD-) button
during CD or VCD play will do nothing.
4175
Features of your vehicle
6. S.Title - Subtitles, Folders +
The S.TITLE button allows you to display
or remove language subtitles while play-
ing DVDs. If no language subtitles are
available, the display will show an invalid
icon. Press the S. TITLE button repeat-
edly to cycle through all of the available
languages.
Pressing the S.TITLE (or FOLD+) button
during MP3 normal play will immediately
bring the player to the first file of the next
folder.
Pressing the S.TITLE (or FOLD+) button
during CD or VCD play will do nothing.
7. Menu
Pressing the MENU button during DVD
play will present the DVD menu.
Pressing the MENU button during MP3
disc play will display the Song List on the
monitor.
Pressing the MENU button during CD or
VCD play has no effect.
Press the button again to return to the
program. After five seconds with no but-
ton press, the menu will automatically
close and the program begin playing.
8.Title/PBC
While viewing a DVD, press the TITLE
button on the remote control to jump to
the top menu.Press the < REW / FF > or
PREV / NEXT buttons to highlight
the desired selection, then press ENTER
to make your selection.
Press TITLE again to return to the DVD.
While viewing a VCD, pressing the
TITLE/PBC button will switch the PBC
function on and off.
9. Return
While viewing any operation, pressing
the RETURN button will exit the current
operation on screen display and resume
last play.
10. Speaker Volume
"VOL +" and "VOL -"
If the audio from the RSE is being played
through the vehicle speakers, you can
adjust the volume of the speakers with
the "VOL +" and "VOL -" buttons.
Adjusting the volume in this way will not
adjust the wireless headphone volume.
To adjust the headphones, roll the VOL
control wheel.
Batteries
The remote control requires a CR2025
battery (included).
Features of your vehicle
1764
Troubleshooting
Problem
Possible causes / solutions
The disc is automati-
cally pulled back into
the player.
The disc becomes
stuck or blocked.
There is no audio in
the headphones.
The RSE does not
work.
The remote control
does not work.
The Auto-Reload Disc Protection feature pulls discs back into the
player after 12 seconds to protect them from accidental damage.
Press the Eject button to release the disc from the player.
Press the Eject button to release the disc.The player will attempt to
eject the disc up to three times before performing the Auto-Reload
function.Once the Auto-Reload function is complete, press the Eject
button again to try to release the disc from the player.
Verify that the headphone is equipped with batteries, and that the
batteries are in good condition. Insert or replace 2 AAA batteries to
resume headphone function.
Press the PLAY button. If the display does not show "NO DISC,"
then there is no power.
Check the power connection.
Check the fuse.
Turn the vehicle ignition off and back on to reset the RSE.
If the RSE still does not work, contact your HYUNDAI dealer.
Make sure you are pointing the remote control at the face of the RSE
at a 45° angle.
Change the battery. [Device requires one (1) CR2025 battery.]
Use the control buttons on the RSE display panel.
If the remote control still does not work, contact your HYUNDAI dealer.
5
Before driving / 5-3
Key positions / 5-4
Starting the engine / 5-6
Automatic transaxle / 5-8
All wheel drive (AWD) / 5-14
Brake system / 5-21
Cruise control system / 5-31
Economical operation / 5-35
Special driving conditions / 5-37
Winter driving / 5-42
Trailer towing / 5-46
Vehicle load limit / 5-54
Vehicle weight / 5-58
Driving your vehicle
Driving your vehicle
25
E010000AEN-EU
WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!
Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the win-
dows immediately.
• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxia-
tion.
• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear
a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the
exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your
garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.
• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area
with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
If you must drive with the tailgate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are
kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
53
Driving your vehicle
E020100AUN
Before entering vehicle
• Be sure that all windows, outside mir-
ror(s), and outside lights are clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles behind
you if you intend to back up.
E020200AUN
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid
should be checked on a regular basis,
with the exact interval depending on the
fluid. Further details are provided in sec-
tion 7, “Maintenance”.
E020300BUN
Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all controls are
easily reached.
• Adjust the inside and outside rearview
mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and make
sure the brake warning light goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are famil-
iar with your vehicle and its equipment.
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result
in a loss of vehicle control, that
may lead to an accident, severe
personal injury, and death.
(Continued)
(Continued)
The driver’s primary responsibility
is in the safe and legal operation of
a vehicle, and use of any handheld
devices, other equipment, or vehi-
cle systems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehicle
or which are not permissible by law
should never be used during oper-
ation of the vehicle.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSI-
TION 65 WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide variety
of automobile components and
parts, including components found
in the interior furnishings in a vehi-
cle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and
reproductive harm. In addition, cer-
tain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component
wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm.
Driving your vehicle
45
E030100AEN
Illuminated ignition switch
Whenever a front door is opened, the
ignition switch will be illuminated for your
convenience, provided the ignition switch
is not in the ON position.The light will go
off immediately when the ignition switch
is turned on or go off after about 30 sec-
onds when the door is closed.
OEN056001
WARNING - Driving under
the influence of alcohol or
drugs
Drinking and driving is dangerous.
Drunk driving is the number one
contributor to the highway death
toll each year. Even a small amount
of alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgment. Driving
while under the influence of drugs
is as dangerous or more dangerous
than driving drunk.
(Continued)
(Continued)
You are much more likely to have a
serious accident if you drink or
take drugs and drive.
If you are drinking or taking drugs,
don’t drive. Do not ride with a driv-
er who has been drinking or taking
drugs. Choose a designated driver
or call a cab.
KEY POSITIONS
WARNING
• When you intend to park or stop
the vehicle with the engine on, be
careful not to depress the accel-
erator pedal for a long period of
time. It may overheat the engine
or exhaust system and cause fire.
• When you make a sudden stop or
turn the steering wheel rapidly,
loose objects may drop on the
floor and it could interfere with the
operation of the foot pedals, pos-
sibly causing an accident.Keep all
things in the vehicle safely stored.
• If you do not focus on driving, it
may cause an accident. Be care-
ful when operating what may dis-
turb driving such as audio or
heater. It is the responsibility of
the driver to always drive safely.
WARNING
All passengers must be properly
belted whenever the vehicle is mov-
ing. Refer to “Seat belts” in section
3 for more information on their
proper use.
WARNING
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for people,
especially children,before putting a
car into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
55
Driving your vehicle
Ignition switch position
E030201AUN
LOCK
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft. The ignition key can be
removed only in the LOCK position.
When turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, push the key inward at
the ACC position and turn the key toward
the LOCK position.
E030202AUN
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked and elec-
trical accessories are operative.
✽✽
NOTICE
If difficulty is experienced turning the
ignition switch to the ACC position, turn
the key while turning the steering wheel
right and left to release the tension.
E030203AUN
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is the
normal running position after the engine
is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the
engine is not running to prevent battery
discharge.
E030204AUN
START
Turn the ignition switch to the START
position to start the engine. The engine
will crank until you release the key; then
it returns to the ON position. The brake
warning lamp can be checked in this
position.
E030205AUN-EU
WARNING - Ignition
switch
• Never turn the ignition switch to
LOCK or ACC while the vehicle is
moving.This would result in loss of
directional control and braking func-
tion,which could cause an accident.
• The anti-theft steering column lock
is not a substitute for the parking
brake. Before leaving the driver's
seat, always make sure the shift
lever is engaged in P (Park) for the
automatic transaxle, set the park-
ing brake fully,and shut the engine
off. Unexpected and sudden vehi-
cle movement may occur if these
precautions are not taken.
• Never reach for the ignition switch,
or any other controls through the
steering wheel while the vehicle is in
motion. The presence of your hand
or arm in this area could cause a
loss of vehicle control, an accident
and serious bodily injury or death.
• Do not place any movable objects
around the driver’s seat as they may
move while driving, interfere with
the driver and lead to an accident.
OUN036002
Driving your vehicle
65
E040000AUN-EU
E040100AUN-EU
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park). Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
3.Turn the ignition switch to START and
hold it there until the engine starts (a
maximum of 10 seconds), then
release the key.
4.In extremely cold weather (below
-18°C / 0°F) or after the vehicle has
not been operated for several days, let
the engine warm up without depress-
ing the accelerator.
Whether the engine is cold or warm, it
should be started without depressing
the accelerator.
E040300BEN
Starting the engine with a smart
key (if equipped)
When starting the engine without insert-
ing the smart key
1. Make sure the parking brake is firmly
applied.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in the
P(park) position.
STARTING THE ENGINE
WARNING
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots,etc.) may interfere with your
ability to use the brake and acceler-
ator pedal.
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while you are in
motion, do not attempt to move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position. If
traffic and road conditions permit,
you may put the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position while the vehicle
is still moving and turn the ignition
switch to the START position in an
attempt to restart the engine.
CAUTION
Do not engage the starter for more
than 10 seconds. If the engine stalls
or fails to start, wait 5 to 10 seconds
before re-engaging the starter.
Improper use of the starter may
damage it.
OEN056008
57
Driving your vehicle
3. Carry the smart key or leave it inside
the vehicle.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Depress and hold the ignition switch.
Make sure that the immobilizer indica-
tor ( ) illuminates on the instru-
ment panel.
6.With the ignition switch depressed and
held, start the engine by turning the
ignition switch on.
• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle,
if it is far away from you, the engine
may not start.
• When the ignition switch is in the ACC
or ON position, if any door is open, the
system checks for the smart key. If the
smart key is not in the vehicle, the indi-
cator will blink, and if all doors are
closed, the chime will also sound for
about 5 seconds.The indicator will turn
off while the vehicle is moving. Keep
the smart key in the vehicle.
If the battery is weak or the smart key
does not work correctly, you can start the
engine by inserting the smart key in the
ignition switch.
OEN056009
WARNING
The ignition switch will turn, and
the engine will start, only when the
smart key is in the vehicle and the
brake has been depressed.
Never allow children or any person
who is unfamiliar with the vehicle
to touch the ignition switch or relat-
ed parts.
Driving your vehicle
85
E060000AUN-EU
E060100AEN
Automatic transaxle operation
The automatic transaxle has 6 forward
speeds and one reverse speed.The indi-
vidual speeds are selected automatically,
depending on the position of the shift
lever.
✽✽
NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle, if
the battery has been disconnected, may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and the shifting sequence will
adjust after shifts are cycled a few times
by the TCM (Transaxle Control
Module) or PCM (Powertrain Control
Module).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
OEN056002
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
Depress the brake pedal when shifting.
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
59
Driving your vehicle
For smooth operation, depress the brake
pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a
forward or reverse gear.
E060101BEN
Transaxle ranges
The indicator in the instrument cluster
displays the shift lever position when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into P (Park). This position locks
the transaxle and prevents the front
wheels from rotating.
WARNING - Automatic
transaxle
• Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for peo-
ple, especially children, before
shifting a car into D (Drive) or R
(Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position; then
set the parking brake fully and
shut the engine off. Unexpected
and sudden vehicle movement
can occur if these precautions
are not followed in the order iden-
tified.
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to your
transaxle, do not accelerate the
engine in R (Reverse) or any for-
ward gear position with the
brakes on.
• When stopped on an incline, do
not hold the vehicle stationary
with engine power. Use the serv-
ice brake or the parking brake.
• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P
(Park) into D (Drive), or R
(Reverse) when the engine is
above idle speed.
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion will cause the
drive wheels to lock which will
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
• Do not use the P (Park) position
in place of the parking brake.
Always make sure the shift lever
is latched in the P (Park) position
and set the parking brake fully.
• Never leave a child unattended in
a vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
105
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transaxle are not
engaged.The vehicle will roll freely even
on the slightest incline unless the parking
brake or service brakes are applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving posi-
tion.The transaxle will automatically shift
through a 6-gear sequence, providing the
best fuel economy and power.
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing grades, depress the
accelerator fully, at which time the
transaxle will automatically downshift to
the next lower gear (or gears, as appro-
priate).
✽✽
NOTICE
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into D (Drive).
CAUTION
The transaxle may be damaged if
you shift into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion.
CAUTION
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transaxle if you shift into R while
the vehicle is in motion, except as
explained in “Rocking the vehicle”
in this section.
511
Driving your vehicle
Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in
motion, sports mode is selected by push-
ing the shift lever from the D (Drive) posi-
tion into the manual gate.To return to D
(Drive) range operation, push the shift
lever back into the main gate.
In sports mode, moving the shift lever
backwards and forwards will allow you to
make gearshifts rapidly. In contrast to a
manual transaxle, the sports mode
allows gearshifts with the accelerator
pedal depressed.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to
shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once
to shift down one gear.
✽✽
NOTICE
• In sports mode, the driver must exe-
cute upshifts in accordance with road
conditions, taking care to keep the
engine speed below the red zone.
• In sports mode, only the 6 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse or
park the vehicle, move the shift lever
to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position
as required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are made
automatically when the vehicle slows
down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear
is automatically selected.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• In sports mode, when the engine rpm
approaches the red zone the transaxle
will upshift automatically.
• If the driver press the lever to +(up) or
-(Down) position, the transaxle may
not make the requested gear change if
the next gear is outside of the allow-
able engine rpm range.
• When starting from a stopped posi-
tion in slippery conditions, push the
shift lever forward into the +(up) posi-
tion. This causes the transaxle to shift
into the 2nd (or 3rd) gear which will
make it easier to control wheel spin.
Push the shift lever back to the D
(Drive) once the vehicle is moving.
OEN056003
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
Sports mode
Driving your vehicle
125
E060102AEN
Shift lock system
For your safety, the automatic transaxle
has a shift lock system which prevents
shifting the transaxle from P (Park) or N
(Neutral) into R (Reverse) unless the
brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park) or N
(Neutral) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering
noise near the shift lever may be heard.
This is a normal condition.
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake pedal
depressed, continue depressing the
brake, then do the following:
1. Carefully remove the cap covering the
shift-lock override access hole.
2. Insert a screwdriver (or key) into the
access hole and press down on the
screwdriver (or key).
3. Move the shift lever.
4. Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer immedi-
ately.
E060103AUN
Ignition key interlock system
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P (Park)
position. If the ignition switch is in any
other position, the key cannot be
removed.
WARNING
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting out
of the P (Park) position into anoth-
er position to avoid inadvertent
motion of the vehicle which could
injure persons in or around the car.
OEN056004
513
Driving your vehicle
E060200AEN
Good driving practices
• Never move the gear shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other posi-
tion with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the gear shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in motion.
• Be sure the car is completely stopped
before you attempt to shift into R
(Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Never take the car out of gear and
coast down a hill. This may be
extremely hazardous.Always leave the
car in gear when moving.
• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and malfunc-
tion. Instead, when you are driving
down a long hill, slow down and shift to
a lower gear.When you do this, engine
braking will help slow the car.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may
not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do not
depend on placing the transaxle in P
(Park) to keep the car from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the accelera-
tor pedal.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision,
an unbelted occupant is signifi-
cantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when corner-
ing or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver over-
steers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed lim-
its.
Driving your vehicle
145
E060203AUN
Moving up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start
To move up a steep grade from a stand-
ing start, depress the brake pedal, shift
the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the
appropriate gear depending on load
weight and steepness of the grade, and
release the parking brake. Depress the
accelerator gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
When accelerating from a stop on a
steep hill, the vehicle may have a ten-
dency to roll backwards. Shifting the
shift lever into 2 (Second Gear) will
help prevent the vehicle from rolling
backwards.
E170000AEN-EU
Engine power can be delivered to all front
and rear wheels for maximum traction.
Full-time AWD is useful when extra trac-
tion is required on road, such as, when
driving on slippery, muddy, wet, or snow-
covered roads. These vehicles are not
designed for challenging off-road use.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward or backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD)
(IF EQUIPPED)
1KMA3053
AWD
1KMA3054
2WD
Front wheel
Front wheel
Rear wheel
515
Driving your vehicle
Occasional off-road use such as estab-
lished unpaved roads and trails is OK. It
is always important when traveling off-
highway that the driver carefully reduce
speed to a level that does not exceed the
safe operating speed for those condi-
tions. In general, off-road conditions pro-
vide less traction and braking effective-
ness than normal road conditions. The
driver must be especially alert to avoid
driving on slopes which tilt the vehicle to
either side.
These factors must be carefully consid-
ered when driving off-road. Keeping the
vehicle in contact with the driving surface
and under control in these conditions is
always the driver's responsibility for the
safety of him/herself and his or her pas-
sengers.
E170201AEN-EU
Tight corner brake effect
This is called tight corner brake effect.
Tight corner brake effect is a unique
characteristic of all wheel drive vehicles
caused by the difference in tire rotation at
the four wheels and the zero-degree
alignment of the front wheels and sus-
pension.
Sharp turns at low speeds should be car-
ried out with caution.
WARNING - Off road driv-
ing
This vehicle is designed primarily
for on road use although it can
operate effectively off road.
However it was not designed for
driving in challenging off-road con-
ditions. Driving in conditions that
exceed the vehicle's intended
design or the driver's experience
level may result in severe injury or
death.
CAUTION - AWD
When turning sharply on a paved
road at low speed while in all wheel
drive, steering control will be diffi-
cult.
Driving your vehicle
165
Transfer mode Selection button Indicator light Description
• This mode is used for climbing or descending sharp grades,
off-road driving, driving on sandy and muddy roads, etc., to
maximize traction.
• This mode automatically begins to deactivate at speeds
above 19 mph (30 km/h) and is shifted to AWD AUTO mode
at speed above 25 mph (40 km/h). If the vehicle decelerates
to speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h), however, the transfer
mode is shifted into AWD LOCK mode again.
• When driving in AWD AUTO mode, the vehicle operates sim-
ilar to conventional 2WD vehicles under normal operating
conditions. However, if the system determines that there is a
need for the AWD mode, the engine’s driving power is dis-
tributed to all four wheels automatically without driver inter-
vention.
• When driving on normal roads and pavement, the vehicle
moves similar to conventional 2WD vehicles.
AW D
LOCK
AWD LOCK
AWD AUTO
(AWD LOCK is
deactivated)
(Indicator light is
not illuminated)
(Indicator light is
illuminated)
✽✽
NOTICE
• When driving on normal roads, deactivate the AWD LOCK mode by pushing the AWD LOCK button(the indicator light goes
off). Driving on normal roads with AWD LOCK mode(especially, when cornering) may cause mechanical noise or vibration.
The noise and vibration will disappear when the AWD LOCK mode is deactivated. Some parts of the power train may be dam-
aged by prolonged driving with the noise and vibration.
• When the AWD LOCK mode is deactivated, a shock may be felt as the drive power is delivered entirely to the front wheels.
This shock is not a mechanical failure.
E170200AEN-EU
All Wheel Drive (AWD) transfer mode selection
517
Driving your vehicle
E170300AEN-EU
For safe all wheel drive operation
• Do not try to drive in deep standing
water or mud since such conditions
can stall your engine and clog your
exhaust pipes. Do not drive down
steep hills since it requires extreme
skill to maintain control of the vehicle.
• When you are driving up or down hills
drive as close to straight up and down
the hill as possible. Use extreme cau-
tion in going up or down steep hills,
since you may flip your vehicle over
depending on the grade, terrain and
water/mud conditions.
WARNING - All wheel driv-
ing
The conditions on-road or off-road
that demand all wheel drive mean
all functions of your vehicle are
more exposed to more extreme
stress than under normal road con-
ditions. Slow down and be ready for
changes in the composition and
traction of the surface under your
tires. If you have any doubt about
the safety of the conditions you are
facing, stop and consider the best
way to proceed. Do not exceed the
ability of yourself or your vehicle to
operate safely.
WARNING - Hills
Driving across the contour of steep
hills can be extremely dangerous.
This danger can come from slight
changes in the wheel angle which
can destabilize the vehicle or, even
if the vehicle is maintaining stabili-
ty under power, it can lose that sta-
bility if the vehicle stops its forward
motion. Your vehicle may roll over
without warning and without time
for you to correct a mistake that
could cause serious injury or
death.
HILL1 HILL2
Driving your vehicle
185
• You must consciously take the effort to
learn how to corner in an AWD vehicle.
Do not rely on your experience in con-
ventional 2WD vehicles in choosing
safe cornering speed in AWD mode.
For starters, you must drive more slow-
ly in AWD.
• Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees.Become familiar with the
off-road conditions where you are
going to drive before you begin driving.
• Always hold the steering wheel firmly
when you are driving off-road.
• Make sure all passengers are wearing
seat belts.
• If you need to drive in water, stop your
vehicle, set your transfer to the AWD
LOCK mode and drive at less than 5
mph (8 km/h).
WARNING -
AWD
Reduce speed when you turn cor-
ners. The center of gravity of AWD
vehicles is higher than that of con-
ventional 2WD vehicles, making
them more likely to roll over when
you turn corners too fast.
WARNING - Steering
wheel
Do not grab inside of the steering
wheel when you are driving off-
road. Your arm may be hurt by a
sudden steering maneuver or from
steering wheel rebound due to
impact with objects on the ground.
You could lose control of the steer-
ing wheel.
WARNING - Wind danger
If you are driving in heavy wind, the
vehicle's higher center of gravity
decreases your steering control
capacity and requires you to drive
more slowly.
WARNING - Driving
through water
Drive slowly. If you are driving too
fast in water, the water spray can
get into the engine compartment
and wet the ignition system, caus-
ing your vehicle to suddenly stall. If
this happens and your vehicle is in
a tilted position, your vehicle may
roll over.
Excessive water in the engine can
cause irreversible engine damage,
which is not covered under warranty.
OHM058102
519
Driving your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
• Do not drive in water if the level is
higher than the bottom of the vehicle.
• Check your brake condition once you
are out of mud or water. Press the
brake pedal several times as you move
slowly until you feel normal braking
forces return.
• Shorten your scheduled maintenance
interval if you drive in off-road condi-
tions such as sand, mud or water (see
“Maintenance under severe usage
conditions” in section 7). Always wash
your car thoroughly after off road use,
especially cleaning the under side of
the vehicle.
• Since the driving torque is always
applied to the 4 wheels the perform-
ance of the AWD vehicle is greatly
affected by the condition of the tires.
Be sure to equip the vehicle with four
tires of the same size and type.
• A full time all wheel drive vehicle can-
not be towed by an ordinary tow
truck. Make sure that the vehicle is
placed on a flat bed truck for moving.
WARNING - AWD driving
• Avoid high cornering speed.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at high speed.
• In a collision, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die
compared to a person wearing a
seat belt.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver over
steers to re-enter the roadway. In
the event your vehicle leaves the
roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
CAUTION - Mud or snow
If one of the front or rear wheels
begins to spin in mud, snow, etc.
the vehicle can sometimes be driv-
en out by depressing the accelera-
tor pedal further; however avoid
running the engine continuously at
high rpm because doing so could
damage the AWD system.
Driving your vehicle
205
E170400AEN E170600AEN-EU
E170700AEN-EU
• Full-time AWD vehicles must be tested
on a special four wheel chassis
dynamometer.
✽✽
NOTICE
Never engage the parking brake while
performing these tests.
• An AWD vehicle should not be tested
on a 2WD drive roll tester.If a 2WD roll
tester must be used, perform the fol-
lowing:
1. Check the tire pressures recommend-
ed for your vehicle.
2. Place the front wheels on the roll
tester for a speedometer test as shown
in the illustration.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Place the rear wheels on the tempo-
rary free roller as shown in the illustra-
tion.
WARNING - Dynamometer
testing
Keep away from the front of the
vehicle while the vehicle is in gear
on the dynamometer. This is very
dangerous as the vehicle can jump
forward and cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING - Jacked vehicle
While a full-time AWD vehicle is
raised on a jack, never start the
engine or cause the tires to rotate.
There is a danger that rotating tires
touching the ground could cause
the vehicle to fall off the jack and to
jump forward or rearward.
OCM051013
Roll tester (speedometer)
Temporary free roller
WARNING
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide for safe ride
and handling capability. Do not use
a size and type of tire and wheel
that is different from the one that is
originally installed on your vehicle.
It can affect the safety and perform-
ance of your vehicle, which could
lead to handling failure or rollover
and serious injury. When replacing
the tires, be sure to equip all four
tires with the tire and wheel of the
same size, type, tread, brand and
load-carrying capacity.If you never-
theless decide to equip your vehi-
cle with any tire/wheel combination
not recommended by HYUNDAI for
off road driving,you should not use
these tires for highway driving.
521
Driving your vehicle
E070100AUN
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes
that adjust automatically through normal
usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a stalled
engine or some other reason, you can
still stop your vehicle by applying greater
force to the brake pedal than you nor-
mally would.The stopping distance, how-
ever, will be longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially depleted
each time the brake pedal is applied. Do
not pump the brake pedal when the
power assist has been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when neces-
sary to maintain steering control on slip-
pery surfaces.
E070101AUN
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while the
vehicle is in motion, you can make an
emergency stop with the parking brake.
The stopping distance, however, will be
much greater than normal.
BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING - Brakes
• Do not drive with your foot rest-
ing on the brake pedal. This will
create abnormal high brake tem-
peratures, excessive brake lining
and pad wear, and increased
stopping distances.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When descending a long or steep
hill, shift to a lower gear and avoid
continuous application of the
brakes. Continuous brake applica-
tion will cause the brakes to over-
heat and could result in a tempo-
rary loss of braking performance.
• Wet brakes may impair the vehi-
cle’s ability to safely slow down;
the vehicle may also pull to one
side when the brakes are applied.
Applying the brakes lightly will
indicate whether they have been
affected in this way. Always test
your brakes in this fashion after
driving through deep water. To
dry the brakes, apply them lightly
while maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance
returns to normal.
• Always, confirm the position of
the brake and accelerator pedal
before driving. If you don't check
the position of the accelerator
and brake pedal before driving,
you may depress the accelerator
instead of the brake pedal. It may
cause a serious accident.
WARNING - Parking brake
Applying the parking brake while
the vehicle is moving at normal
speeds can cause a sudden loss of
control of the vehicle. If you must
use the parking brake to stop the
vehicle, use great caution in apply-
ing the brake.
Driving your vehicle
225
E070102AUN
Disc brakes wear indicator
Your vehicle has disc brakes.
When your brake pads are worn and new
pads are required, you will hear a high-
pitched warning sound from your front
brakes or rear brakes.You may hear this
sound come and go or it may occur
whenever you depress the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving con-
ditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when you first apply (or lightly
apply) the brakes.This is normal and does
not indicate a problem with your brakes.
Parking brake
E070201AEN
Applying the parking brake
To engage the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and then depress the park-
ing brake pedal down as far as possible.
In addition it is recommended that when
parking the vehicle on an incline, the shift
lever should be in the P (Park) position
for automatic transaxle vehicles.
WARNING - Brake wear
This brake wear warning sound
means your vehicle needs service.
If you ignore this audible warning,
you will eventually lose braking
performance, which could lead to a
serious accident.
CAUTION
• To avoid costly brake repairs, do
not continue to drive with worn
brake pads.
• Always replace brake pads as
complete front or rear axle sets.
CAUTION
• Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive brake
pad and brake rotor wear.
• Do not operate the parking brake
while the vehicle is moving except
in an emergency situation. It could
damage the vehicle system and
make endanger driving safety.
OEN056005
523
Driving your vehicle
E070202AEN
Releasing the parking brake
To release the parking brake, depress
the parking brake pedal a second time
while applying the foot brake. The pedal
will automatically extend to the fully
released position. If the parking brake
pedal does not release or does not
release all the way, have the system
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Check the brake warning light by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine).This light will be illuminated when
the parking brake is applied with the igni-
tion switch in the START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking brake
is fully released and the brake warning
light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on after
the parking brake is released while engine
is running, there may be a malfunction in
the brake system. Immediate attention is
necessary.
If at all possible, cease driving the vehi-
cle immediately. If that is not possible,
use extreme caution while operating the
vehicle and only continue to drive the
vehicle until you can reach a safe loca-
tion or repair shop.
WARNING
• To prevent unintentional move-
ment when stopped and leaving
the vehicle, do not use the
gearshift lever in place of the
parking brake. Set the parking
brake AND make sure the
gearshift lever is securely posi-
tioned in P (Park) for automatic
transaxle equipped vehicles.
• Never allow anyone who is unfa-
miliar with the vehicle to touch
the parking brake. If the parking
brake is released unintentionally,
serious injury may occur.
• All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the car which
can injure occupants or pedestri-
ans.
OEN056006
W-75
Driving your vehicle
245
E070300AEN-EU
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The ABS continuously senses the speed
of the wheels. If the wheels are going to
lock, the ABS system repeatedly modu-
lates the hydraulic brake pressure to the
wheels.
When you apply your brakes under con-
ditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum benefit
from your ABS in an emergency situa-
tion, do not attempt to modulate your
brake pressure and do not try to pump
your brakes. Press your brake pedal as
hard as possible or as hard as the situa-
tion warrants and allow the ABS to con-
trol the force being delivered to the
brakes.
WARNING
ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci-
dents due to improper or danger-
ous driving maneuvers. Even
though vehicle control is improved
during emergency braking, always
maintain a safe distance between
you and objects ahead. Vehicle
speeds should always be reduced
during extreme road conditions.
The braking distance for cars
equipped with an anti-lock braking
system (or Electronic Stability
Control System) may be longer
than for those without it in the fol-
lowing road conditions.
During these conditions the vehicle
should be driven at reduced
speeds:
• Rough, gravel or snow-covered
roads.
• With tire chains installed.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• On roads where the road surface
is pitted or has different surface
height.
The safety features of an ABS (or
ESC) equipped vehicle should not
be tested by high speed driving or
cornering.This could endanger the
safety of yourself or others.
525
Driving your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is start-
ed. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the anti-lock brake system
is functioning properly.
• Even with the anti-lock brake system,
your vehicle still requires sufficient
stopping distance. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot pre-
vent accidents resulting from exces-
sive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake system
may result in a longer stopping dis-
tance than for vehicles equipped with a
conventional brake system.
✽✽
NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the engine
may not run as smoothly and the ABS
warning light may turn on at the same
time. This happens because of the low
battery voltage. It does not mean your
ABS is malfunctioning.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
W-78
CAUTION
• If the ABS warning light is on and
stays on, you may have a problem
with the ABS. In this case, howev-
er, your regular brakes will work
normally.
• The ABS warning light will stay on
for approximately 3 seconds after
the ignition switch is ON. During
that time, the ABS will go through
self-diagnosis and the light will go
off if everything is normal. If the
light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS. Contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
CAUTION
• When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and operate your brakes continu-
ously, the ABS will be active con-
tinuously and the ABS warning
light may illuminate. Pull your car
over to a safe place and stop the
engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your
ABS system is normal.
Otherwise, you may have a prob-
lem with the ABS. Contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
Driving your vehicle
265
E070500AUN-EU
Electronic stability control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability control (ESC)
system is designed to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering maneuvers.ESC checks
where you are steering and where the
vehicle is actually going. ESC applies the
brakes at individual wheels and
intervenes in the engine management
system to stabilize the vehicle.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is an electronic system designed
to help the driver maintain vehicle control
under adverse conditions. It is not a
substitute for safe driving practices.
Factors including speed, road conditions
and driver steering input can all affect
whether ESC will be effective in
preventing a loss of control. It is still your
responsibility to drive and corner at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under con-
ditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ESC is active.
✽✽
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is start-
ed. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the Electronic Stability
Control System is functioning properly.
OEN056007N
WARNING
Never drive too fast for the road
conditions or too quickly when cor-
nering. Electronic stability control
(ESC) will not prevent accidents.
Excessive speed in turns, abrupt
maneuvers and hydroplaning on
wet surfaces can still result in seri-
ous accidents. Only a safe and
attentive driver can prevent acci-
dents by avoiding maneuvers that
cause the vehicle to lose traction.
Even with ESC installed, always fol-
low all the normal precautions for
driving - including driving at safe
speeds for the conditions.
527
Driving your vehicle
E070501AUN-EU
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESC and ESC OFF indi-
cator lights illuminate for
approximately 3 seconds,
then ESC is turned on.
• Press the ESC OFF button
for at least half a second after
turning the ignition ON to turn
ESC off. (ESC OFF indicator
will illuminate). To turn the
ESC on, press the ESC OFF
button (ESC OFF indicator
light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight ticking
sound. This is the ESC per-
forming an automatic system
self-check and does not indi-
cate a problem.
When operating
When the ESC is in operation,
the ESC indicator light blinks.
• When the Electronic Stability
Control is operating properly,
you can feel a slight pulsation
in the vehicle. This is only the
effect of brake control and
indicates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the mud
or driving on a slippery road,
pressing the accelerator
pedal may not cause the
engine rpm (revolutions per
minute) to increase.
E070502AUN-EU
ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
• To cancel ESC operation,
press the ESC OFF button
(ESC OFF indicator light illu-
minates).
• If the ignition switch is turned
to LOCK position when ESC
is off, ESC remains off. Upon
restarting the engine, the
ESC will automatically turn
on again.
-
ESC
ESC
OFF
Driving your vehicle
285
E070503AEN-EU
Indicator light
When the ignition switch is turned ON,
the indicator light illuminates, then goes
off if ESC system is operating normally.
Type A
The ESC indicator light blinks whenever
ESC is operating.
The ESC OFF indicator light comes on
when either the ESC is turned off with
the button, or ESC fails to operate when
turned on.
Type B
The ESC indicator light blinks whenever
ESC is operating or illuminates when
ESC fails to operate.
ESC OFF indicator light comes on when
the ESC is turned off with the button.
E070504AEN-EU
ESC OFF usage
When driving
• It’s a good idea to keep the ESC turned
on for daily driving whenever possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press the
ESC OFF button while driving on a flat
road surface.
Never press the ESC OFF button while
ESC is operating (ESC indicator light
blinks).
If ESC is turned off while ESC is operat-
ing, the vehicle may slip out of control.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, ensure that the ESC is
turned off (ESC OFF light illuminat-
ed). If the ESC is left on, it may pre-
vent the vehicle speed from increas-
ing, and result in false diagnosis.
• Turning the ESC off does not affect
ABS or brake system operation.
ESC
ESC
OFF
■ ESC indicator light
■ ESC OFF indicator light
CAUTION
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the ESC system to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are the same size as
your original tires.
Never operate the vehicle with dif-
ferent diameter tires installed at the
same time.
WARNING
The Electronic Stability Control sys-
tem is only a driving aid; use pre-
cautions for safe driving by slowing
down on curved, snowy, or icy
roads. Drive slowly and don’t
attempt to accelerate whenever the
ESC indicator light is blinking, or
when the road surface is slippery.
529
Driving your vehicle
E070600BEN
Good braking practices
• After parking the vehicle, check to be
sure the parking brake is not engaged
and that the parking brake indicator
light is out before driving away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the car is washed. Wet brakes
can be dangerous! Your car will not
stop as quickly if the brakes are wet.
Wet brakes may cause the car to pull
to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns to
normal, taking care to keep the car
under control at all times.If the braking
action does not return to normal, stop
as soon as it is safe to do so and call
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
assistance.
WARNING
Never press the ESC OFF button
while ESC is operating.
If the ESC is turned off while ESC is
operating, the vehicle may go out of
control.
To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving
on a flat road surface.
WARNING
• Whenever leaving vehicle or
parking, always set the parking
brake as far as possible and fully
engage the vehicle's transaxle
into the park position. Vehicles
not fully engaged in park with the
parking brake set are at risk for
moving inadvertently and injur-
ing yourself or others.
• All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the car which
can injure occupants or pedestri-
ans.
Driving your vehicle
305
• Don't coast down hills with the car out
of gear. This is extremely hazardous.
Keep the car in gear at all times, use
the brakes to slow down, then shift to a
lower gear so that engine braking will
help you maintain a safe speed.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting
your foot on the brake pedal while driv-
ing can be dangerous because it can
result in the brakes overheating and
losing their effectiveness. It also
increases the wear of the brake com-
ponents.
• If a tire goes flat while you are driving,
apply the brakes gently and keep the
car pointed straight ahead while you
slow down. When you are moving
slowly enough for it to be safe to do so,
pull off the road and stop in a safe
place.
• If your car is equipped with an auto-
matic transaxle, don't let your car
creep forward. To avoid creeping for-
ward, keep your foot firmly on the
brake pedal when the car is stopped.
• Use caution when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake and
place the gear selector lever in P (auto-
matic transaxle). If your car is facing
downhill, turn the front wheels into the
curb to help keep the car from rolling.If
your car is facing uphill, turn the front
wheels away from the curb to help
keep the car from rolling. If there is no
curb or if it is required by other condi-
tions to keep the car from rolling, block
the wheels.
• Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged posi-
tion.This is most likely to happen when
there is an accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if the
brakes are wet.If there is a risk that the
parking brake may freeze, apply it only
temporarily while you put the gear
selector lever in P (automatic transaxle)
and block the rear wheels so the car
cannot roll. Then release the parking
brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade
with the accelerator pedal. This can
cause the transaxle to overheat.
Always use the brake pedal or parking
brake.
531
Driving your vehicle
E090000AEN
The cruise control system allows you to
program the vehicle to maintain a con-
stant speed without pressing the acceler-
ator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
✽✽
NOTICE
During normal cruise control operation,
when the SET switch is activated or
reactivated after applying the brakes,
the cruise control will energize after
approximately 3 seconds. This delay is
normal.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNING
• If the cruise control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminated)
the cruise control can be
switched on accidentally. Keep
the cruise control system off
(CRUISE indicator light OFF)
when the cruise control is not in
use, to avoid inadvertently set-
ting a speed.
• Use the cruise control system
only when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use the cruise control
when it may not be safe to keep
the car at a constant speed, for
instance, driving in heavy or
varying traffic, or on slippery
(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or
winding roads or over 6% up-hill
or down-hill roads.
• Pay particular attention to the
driving conditions whenever
using the cruise control system.
• Be careful when driving downhill
using the cruise control system,
which may increase the vehicle
speed.
Driving your vehicle
325
E090100AEN
To set cruise control speed:
1. Push the CRUISE ON-OFF button on
the steering wheel to turn the system
on. The CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which
must be more than 25 mph (40 km/h).
3.Push the COAST/SET switch, and
release it at the desired speed.The SET
indicator light in the instrument cluster
will illuminate. Release the accelerator
at the same time.The desired speed will
automatically be maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow
down or speed up slightly while going
downhill.
E090200AUN-EU
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the RES/ACCEL switch and hold
it. Your vehicle will accelerate. Release
the switch at the speed you want.
• Push the RES/ACCEL switch and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will increase by 1.0 mph (1.6
km/h) each time the RES/ ACCEL
switch is operated in this manner.
OEN056012 OEN056013OEN056011
533
Driving your vehicle
E090300AUN-EU
To decrease the cruising speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push the COAST/SET switch and hold
it. Your vehicle will gradually slow
down. Release the switch at the speed
you want to maintain.
• Push the COAST/SET switch and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will decrease by 1.0 mph (1.6
km/h) each time the COAST/SET
switch is operated in this manner.
E090400AUN
To temporarily accelerate with the
cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily when
the cruise control is on, depress the
accelerator pedal. Increased speed will
not interfere with cruise control operation
or change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your foot
off the accelerator.
E090500AEN
To cancel cruise control, do one
of the following:
• Press the brake pedal.
• Shift into N (Neutral) with an automatic
transaxle.
• Press the CANCEL switch located on
the steering wheel.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower than
the memory speed by 9 mph (15
km/h).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
OEN056014OEN056012
Driving your vehicle
345
Each of these actions will cancel cruise
control operation (the SET indicator light
in the instrument cluster will go off), but it
will not turn the system off. If you wish to
resume cruise control operation, push
the RES/ACCEL switch located on your
steering wheel. You will return to your
previously preset speed.
E090600AUN
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h):
If any method other than the CRUISE
ON-OFF switch was used to cancel
cruising speed and the system is still
activated, the most recent set speed will
automatically resume when the
RES/ACCEL switch is pushed.
It will not resume, however, if the vehicle
speed has dropped below approximately
25 mph (40 km/h).
E090700AEN
To turn cruise control off, do one
of the following:
• Push the CRUISE ON-OFF button (the
CRUISE indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster will go off).
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions cancel cruise con-
trol operation. If you want to resume
cruise control operation, repeat the steps
provided in “To set cruise control speed”
on the previous page.
OEN056013
535
Driving your vehicle
E100000AEN
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where you
drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how many
miles (kilometers) you can get from a gal-
lon (liter) of fuel. To operate your vehicle
as economically as possible, use the fol-
lowing driving suggestions to help save
money in both fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly.Accelerate at a moder-
ate rate.Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts
or full-throttle shifts and maintain a
steady cruising speed. Don't race
between stoplights. Try to adjust your
speed to that of the other traffic so you
don't have to change speeds unneces-
sarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever
possible. Always maintain a safe dis-
tance from other vehicles so you can
avoid unnecessary braking. This also
reduces brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The faster
you drive the more fuel your vehicle
uses. Driving at a moderate speed, in
the highest gear appropriate for the
conditions, especially on the highway,
is one of the most effective ways to
reduce fuel consumption.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This can
increase fuel consumption and also
increase wear on these components.
In addition, driving with your foot rest-
ing on the brake pedal may cause the
brakes to overheat, which reduces
their effectiveness and may lead to
more serious consequences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pressure.
Incorrect inflation, either too much or
too little, results in unnecessary tire
wear. Check the tire pressures at least
once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are aligned
correctly. Improper alignment can
result from hitting curbs or driving too
fast over irregular surfaces. Poor align-
ment causes faster tire wear and may
also result in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
• Keep your car in good condition. For
better fuel economy and reduced
maintenance costs, maintain your car
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in section 7. If you drive your
car in severe conditions, more frequent
maintenance is required (see section 7
for details).
• Keep your car clean. For maximum
service, your vehicle should be kept
clean and free of corrosive materials.It
is especially important that mud, dirt,
ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate
on the underside of the car. This extra
weight can result in increased fuel con-
sumption and also contribute to corro-
sion.
• Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary
weight in your car.Weight reduces fuel
economy.
• Don't let the engine idle longer than
necessary. If you are waiting (and not
in traffic), turn off your engine and
restart only when you're ready to go.
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Driving your vehicle
365
• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After the
engine has started, allow the engine to
run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to plac-
ing the vehicle in gear. In very cold
weather, however, give your engine a
slightly longer warm-up period.
• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in too high
a gear resulting in the engine bucking.
If this happens, shift to a lower gear.
Over-revving is racing the engine
beyond its safe limit.This can be avoid-
ed by shifting at the recommended
speeds.
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is operat-
ed by engine power so your fuel econ-
omy is reduced when you use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds.To help offset some of
this loss, slow down when driving in
these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating con-
dition is important both for economy and
safety. Therefore, have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer perform scheduled
inspections and maintenance.
WARNING - Engine off dur-
ing motion
Never turn the engine off to coast
down hills or anytime the vehicle is
in motion. The power steering and
power brakes will not function
properly without the engine run-
ning. Instead, keep the engine on
and downshift to an appropriate
gear for engine braking effect. In
addition, turning off the ignition
while driving could engage the
steering wheel lock resulting in
loss of vehicle steering which
could cause serious injury or
death.
537
Driving your vehicle
E110100AUN
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions are
encountered such as water, snow, ice,
mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow
these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-
tance for braking.
• Avoid sudden movements in braking or
steering.
• When braking with non-ABS brakes
pump the brake pedal with a light up-
and-down motion until the vehicle is
stopped.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use
second gear. Accelerate slowly to
avoid spinning the drive wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or
other non-slip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction when stalled
in ice, snow, or mud.
E110200AEN-EU
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to free
it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the
area around your front wheels.Then, shift
back and forth between R (Reverse) and
any forward gear in vehicles equipped
with an automatic transaxle. Do not race
the engine, and spin the wheels as little
as possible. If you are still stuck after a
few tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a
tow vehicle to avoid engine overheating
and possible damage to the transaxle.
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
1VQA3002
WARNING - ABS
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.
WARNING
- Downshifting
Downshifting with an automatic
transaxle, while driving on slippery
surfaces can cause an accident.
The sudden change in tire speed
could cause the tires to skid. Be
careful when downshifting on slip-
pery surfaces.
CAUTION
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine over-heating, transaxle dam-
age or failure, and tire damage.
Driving your vehicle
385
✽✽
NOTICE
The ESC system should be turned OFF
prior to rocking the vehicle.
E110300AUN
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in cor-
ners, especially when roads are wet.
Ideally, corners should always be taken
under gentle acceleration. If you follow
these suggestions, tire wear will be held
to a minimum.
E110400AUN-EU
Driving at night
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight, here
are some important tips to remember:
• Slow down and keep more distance
between you and other vehicles, as it
may be more difficult to see at night,
especially in areas where there may
not be any street lights.
WARNING - Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, especially
at speeds more than 35 mph (56
km/h). Spinning the wheels at high
speeds when the vehicle is station-
ary could cause a tire to overheat
which could result in tire damage
that may injure bystanders.
ORV047004 OCM053010
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward or backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
539
Driving your vehicle
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare
from other driver's headlights.
• Keep your headlights clean and prop-
erly aimed. Dirty or improperly aimed
headlights will make it much more diffi-
cult to see at night.Headlight operation
when using windshield wipers is
mandatory in some states.
• Avoid staring directly at the headlights
of oncoming vehicles. You could be
temporarily blinded, and it will take
several seconds for your eyes to read-
just to the darkness.
E110500AUN
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not pre-
pared for the slick pavement. Here are a
few things to consider when driving in the
rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to
see and will increase the distance
needed to stop your vehicle, so slow
down.
• Keep your windshield wiping equip-
ment in good shape. Replace your
windshield wiper blades when they
show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condition,
making a quick stop on wet pavement
can cause a skid and possibly lead to
an accident. Be sure your tires are in
good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it eas-
ier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large puddles
can affect your brakes. If you must go
through puddles, try to drive through
them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking oper-
ation returns.
E110600AUN
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no high-
er than the bottom of the wheel hub.
Drive through any water slowly. Allow
adequate stopping distance because
brake performance may be affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them several
times while the vehicle is moving slowly.
1VQA3003
Driving your vehicle
405
E110700AUN
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pressures
will result in overheating and possible
failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires which
may result in reduced traction or tire fail-
ure.
✽✽
NOTICE
Never exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure shown on the tires.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil
High speed travel consumes more fuel
than urban motoring. Do not forget to
check both engine coolant and engine
oil.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may result
in overheating of the engine.
WARNING
• Underinflated or overinflated
tires can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and sud-
den tire failure leading to acci-
dents, injuries, and even death.
Always check tires for proper
inflation before driving. For prop-
er tire pressures, refer to “Tires
and wheels” in section 8.
• Driving on tires with no or insuffi-
cient tread is dangerous. Worn-
out tires can result in loss of
vehicle control, collisions, injury,
and even death. Worn-out tires
should be replaced as soon as
possible and should never be
used for driving. Always check
the tire tread before driving your
car. For further information and
tread limits, refer to “Tires and
wheels” in section 7.
1VQA1004
541
Driving your vehicle
E111000AEN
Reducing the risk of a rollover
This multi-purpose passenger vehicle is
defined as a Sports Utility Vehicle (SUV).
SUV’s have higher ground clearance and
a narrower track to make them capable
of performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design characteris-
tics give them a higher center of gravity
than ordinary cars. An advantage of the
higher ground clearance is a better view
of the road, which allows you to antici-
pate problems.They are not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as con-
ventional passenger drive vehicles, any
more than low-slung sports cars are
designed to perform satisfactorily in off-
road conditions. Due to this risk, driver
and passengers are strongly recom-
mended to buckle their seat belts. In a
rollover crash, an unbelted person is
more likely to die than a person wearing
a seat belt. There are steps that a driver
can make to reduce the risk of a rollover.
If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers, do not load your roof
rack with heavy cargo, and never modify
your vehicle in any way.
WARNING - Rollover
As with other Sports Utility Vehicle
(SUV), failure to operate this vehi-
cle correctly may result in loss of
control, an accident or vehicle
rollover.
• Utility vehicles have a significant-
ly higher rollover rate than other
types of vehicles.
• Specific design characteristics
(higher ground clearance, nar-
rower track, etc.) give this vehicle
a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.
• A SUV is not designed for corner-
ing at the same speeds as con-
ventional vehicles.
• Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers.
• In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more like-
ly to die than a person wearing a
seat belt. Make sure everyone in
the vehicle is properly buckled
up.
Driving your vehicle
425
E120000AUN
The more severe weather conditions of
winter result in greater wear and other
problems. To minimize the problems of
winter driving, you should follow these
suggestions:
E120100AUN
Snowy or icy conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may
be necessary to use snow tires or to
install tire chains on your tires. If snow
tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and type of the
original equipment tires. Failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and han-
dling of your car. Furthermore, speeding,
rapid acceleration, sudden brake appli-
cations, and sharp turns are potentially
very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine braking
to the fullest extent. Sudden brake appli-
cations on snowy or icy roads may cause
skids to occur. You need to keep suffi-
cient distance between the vehicle in
operation in front and your vehicle. Also,
apply the brake gently. It should be noted
that installing tire chains on the tire will
provide a greater driving force, but will
not prevent side skids.
✽✽
NOTICE
Tire chains are not legal in all states.
Check state laws before fitting tire
chains.
E120101AUN
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehicle,
make sure they are radial tires of the
same size and load range as the original
tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels
to balance your vehicle’s handling in all
weather conditions.Keep in mind that the
traction provided by snow tires on dry
roads may not be as high as your vehi-
cle's original equipment tires.You should
drive cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for max-
imum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without first
checking local, state and municipal regu-
lations for possible restrictions against
their use.
WINTER DRIVING
WARNING - Snow tire size
Snow tires should be equivalent in
size and type to the vehicle's stan-
dard tires. Otherwise, the safety
and handling of your vehicle may
be adversely affected.
1VQA3005
543
Driving your vehicle
E120102AEN-EU
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner, they can be damaged by mount-
ing some types of snow chains on them.
Therefore, the use of snow tires is rec-
ommended instead of snow chains. Do
not mount tire chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels; snow
chains may cause damage to the wheels.
If snow chains must be used, use wire-
type chains with a thickness of less than
0.59 in (15 mm). Damage to your vehicle
caused by improper snow chain use is
not covered by your vehicle manufactur-
ers warranty.
When using tire chains, attach them to
the drive wheels as follows.
2WD : Front wheels
AWD : All four wheels
If a full set of chains is not avail-
able for an AWD vehicle, chains
may be installed on the front
wheels only.
Chain installation
When installing chains, follow the manu-
facturer's instructions and mount them as
tightly as you can. Drive slowly with
chains installed. If you hear the chains
contacting the body or chassis, stop and
tighten them. If they still make contact,
slow down until it stops. Remove the
chains as soon as you begin driving on
cleared roads.
CAUTION
• Make sure the snow chains are
the correct size and type for your
tires. Incorrect snow chains can
cause damage to the vehicle body
and suspension and may not be
covered by your vehicle manufac-
turer warranty. Also, the snow
chain connecting hooks may be
damaged from contacting vehicle
components causing the snow
chains to come loose from the
tire. Make sure the snow chains
are SAE class “S” certified.
• Always check chain installation
for proper mounting after driving
approximately 0.3 to 0.6 miles (0.5
to 1 km) to ensure safe mounting.
Retighten or remount the chains
if they are loose.
WARNING
- Mounting chains
When mounting snow chains, park
the vehicle on level ground away
from traffic. Turn on the vehicle
Hazard Warning flashers and place
a triangular emergency warning
device behind the vehicle if avail-
able. Always place the vehicle in P
(Park), apply the parking brake and
turn off the engine before installing
snow chains.
1VQA3007
Driving your vehicle
445
E120200AUN
Use high quality ethylene glycol
coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high quality
ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling
system. It is the only type of coolant that
should be used because it helps prevent
corrosion in the cooling system, lubri-
cates the water pump and prevents
freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish
your coolant in accordance with the
maintenance schedule in section 7.
Before winter, have your coolant tested to
assure that its freezing point is sufficient
for the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
E120300AEN
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on the
battery system. Visually inspect the bat-
tery and cables as described in section
7.The level of charge in your battery can
be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer or a service station.
E120400BEN
Change to "winter weight" oil if
necessary
In some climates it is recommended that
a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be
used during cold weather. See section 8
for recommendations. If you aren't sure
what weight oil you should use, consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
E120500AUN
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Inspect your spark plugs as described in
section 7 and replace them if necessary.
Also check all ignition wiring and compo-
nents to be sure they are not cracked,
worn or damaged in any way.
WARNING - Tire chains
• The use of chains may adversely
affect vehicle handling.
• Do not exceed 20 mph (30 km/h)
or the chain manufacturer’s rec-
ommended speed limit, whichev-
er is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,
holes, sharp turns, and other
road hazards, which may cause
the vehicle to bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked-
wheel braking.
CAUTION
• Chains that are the wrong size or
improperly installed can damage
your vehicle's brake lines, sus-
pension, body and wheels.
• Stop driving and retighten the
chains any time you hear them
hitting the vehicle.
545
Driving your vehicle
E120600AUN
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an
approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into
the key opening. If a lock is covered with
ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing
fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is
frozen internally, you may be able to thaw
it out by using a heated key. Handle the
heated key with care to avoid injury.
E120700AEN
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window washer
system from freezing, add an approved
window washer anti-freeze solution in
accordance with instructions on the con-
tainer. Window washer anti-freeze is
available from an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and most auto parts outlets. Do
not use engine coolant or other types of
anti-freeze as these may damage the
paint finish.
E120800AEN
Don't let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged position.
This is most likely to happen when there
is an accumulation of snow or ice around
or near the rear brakes or if the brakes
are wet. If there is a risk the parking
brake may freeze, apply it only temporar-
ily while you put the gear selector lever in
P (automatic transaxle) and block the
rear wheels so the car cannot roll. Then
release the parking brake.
E120900AUN
Don't let ice and snow accumu-
late underneath
Under some conditions, snow and ice
can build up under the fenders and inter-
fere with the steering. When driving in
severe winter conditions where this may
happen, you should periodically check
underneath the car to be sure the move-
ment of the front wheels and the steering
components is not obstructed.
E121000AUN
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the weath-
er where you drive your car, you should
carry appropriate emergency equipment.
Some of the items you may want to carry
include tire chains, tow straps or chains,
flashlight, emergency flares, sand, a
shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper,
gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket,
etc.
Driving your vehicle
465
E140000AEN
If you are considering towing with with
your car, you should first check with your
state’s Department of Motor Vehicles to
determine their legal requirements.
Since laws vary from state to state the
requirements for towing trailers, cars, or
other types of vehicles or apparatus may
differ. Ask an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er for further details before towing.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify
what the vehicle trailering capacity is for
your vehicle, you should read the infor-
mation in “Weight of the trailer” that
appears later in this section.
Remember that trailering is different than
just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling,
durability, and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering requires correct equip-
ment, and it has to be used properly.
This section contains many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your
safety and that of your passengers.
Please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the
engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies, and
tires are forced to work harder against
the load of the added weight.The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher
speeds and under greater loads. This
additional burden generates extra heat.
The trailer also adds considerably to
wind resistance, increasing the pulling
requirements.
TRAILER TOWING
WARNING - Towing a trail-
er
If you don't use the correct equip-
ment and drive improperly, you can
lose control when you pull a trailer.
For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work
well - or even at all. You and your
passengers could be seriously or
fatally injured. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in
this section.
WARNING - Weight limits
Before towing, make sure the total
trailer weight, gross combination
weight, gross vehicle weight, gross
axle weight and trailer tongue load
are all within the limits.
CAUTION
Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result in
costly repairs not covered by your
warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section.
547
Driving your vehicle
E140100AEN
Hitches
It's important to have the correct hitch
equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks
going by, and rough roads are a few rea-
sons why you’ll need the right hitch.Here
are some rules to follow:
• Will you have to make any holes in the
body of your vehicle when you install a
trailer hitch? If you do, then be sure to
seal the holes later when you remove
the hitch.
If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can
get into your vehicle, as well as dirt and
water.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are not
intended for hitches. Do not attach
rental hitches or other bumper-type
hitches to them. Use only a frame-
mounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
• HYUNDAI trailer hitch accessory is
available at an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
E140200AUN
Safety chains
You should always attach chains
between your vehicle and your trailer.
Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not
drop to the road if it becomes separated
from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be
provided by the hitch manufacturer or by
the trailer manufacturer. Follow the man-
ufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your trailer.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
E140300AUN-EU
Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking
system, make sure it conforms to federal
and/or local regulations and that it is
properly installed and operating correctly.
If your trailer weighs more than the max-
imum trailer weight without trailer brakes
loaded, then it needs its own brakes and
they must be adequate. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
• Don’t tap into your vehicle's brake sys-
tem.
WARNING - Trailer brakes
Do not use a trailer with its own
brakes unless you are absolutely
certain that you have properly set
up the brake system. This is not a
task for amateurs. Use an experi-
enced, competent trailer shop for
this work.
Driving your vehicle
485
E140400AUN
Driving with a trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Before setting out
for the open road, you must get to know
your trailer. Acquaint yourself with the
feel of handling and braking with the
added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not
nearly so responsive as your vehicle is
by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch
and platform, safety chains, electrical
connector(s), lights, tires and mirror
adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer mov-
ing and then apply the trailer brake con-
troller by hand to be sure the brakes are
working.This lets you check your electri-
cal connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be
sure that the load is secure, and that the
lights and any trailer brakes are still work-
ing.
E140401AUN
Following distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehi-
cle ahead as you would when driving
your vehicle without a trailer. This can
help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
E140402AUN
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up
ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And,
because of the increased vehicle length,
you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to
your lane.
E140403AUN
Backing up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel
with one hand. Then, to move the trailer
to the left, just move your hand to the left.
To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly
and, if possible, have someone guide
you.
E140404AUN
Making turns
When you’re turning with a trailer, make
wider turns than normal. Do this so your
trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs,
road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid
jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well
in advance.
E140405AEN
Turn signals when towing a trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has
to have a different turn signal flasher and
extra wiring. The green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash whenever you
signal a turn or lane change. Properly
connected, the trailer lights will also flash
to alert other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green arrows
on your instrument panel will flash for
turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signals
when, in fact, they are not. It’s important
to check occasionally to be sure the trail-
er bulbs are still working. You must also
check the lights every time you discon-
nect and then reconnect the wires.
Do not connect a trailer lighting system
directly to your vehicle’s lighting system.
Use only an approved trailer wiring har-
ness.
549
Driving your vehicle
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer can
assist you in installing the wiring harness.
E140406AUN
Driving on grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear
before you start down a long or steep
downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you
might have to use your brakes so much
that they would get hot and no longer
operate efficiently.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and
reduce your speed to around 45 mph (70
km/h) to reduce the possibility of engine
and transaxle overheating.
If your trailer weighs more than the max-
imum trailer weight without trailer brakes
and you have an automatic transaxle,
you should drive in D (Drive) when tow-
ing a trailer.
Operating your vehicle in D (Drive) when
towing a trailer will minimize heat build up
and extend the life of your transaxle.
E140407BUN
Parking on hills
Generally, if you have a trailer attached to
your vehicle, you should not park your
vehicle on a hill. People can be seriously
or fatally injured, and both your vehicle
and the trailer can be damaged if unex-
pectedly roll down hill.
However, if you ever have to park your
trailer on a hill, here's how to do it:
1. Pull the vehicle into the parking space.
Turn the steering wheel in the direction
of the curb (right if headed down hill,
left if headed up hill).
2. If the vehicle has a manual transaxle,
place the car in neutral. If the vehicle
has an automatic transaxle, place the
car in P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake and shut off the
vehicle.
4. Place chocks under the trailer wheels
on the down hill side of the wheels.
5. Start the vehicle, hold the brakes, shift
to neutral, release the parking brake
and slowly release the brakes until the
trailer chocks absorb the load.
6. Reapply the brakes, reapply the park-
ing brake and shift the vehicle to R
(Reverse) for manual transaxle or P
(Park) automatic transaxle.
CAUTION
• When towing a trailer on steep
grades (in excess of 6%) pay
close attention to the engine
coolant temperature gauge to
ensure the engine does not over-
heat. If the needle of the coolant
temperature gauge moves across
the dial towards “H” (HOT), pull
over and stop as soon as it is safe
to do so, and allow the engine to
idle until it cools down. You may
proceed once the engine has
cooled sufficiently.
• You must decide driving speed
depending on trailer weight and
uphill grade to reduce the possi-
bility of engine and transaxle
overheating.
WARNING
Failure to use an approved trailer
wiring harness could result in dam-
age to the vehicle electrical system
and/or personal injury.
WARNING - Parking on a
hill
Parking your vehicle on a hill with a
trailer attached could cause seri-
ous injury or death, should the trail-
er break loose.
Driving your vehicle
505
7. Shut off the vehicle and release the
vehicle brakes but leave the parking
brake set.
When you are ready to leave after park-
ing on a hill
1.With the automatic transaxle in P
(Park), apply your brakes and hold the
brake pedal down while you:
• Start your engine;
• Shift into gear; and
• Release the parking brake.
2.Slowly remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of
the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and
store the chocks.
E140500AUN
Maintenance when trailer towing
Your vehicle will need service more often
when you regularly pull a trailer.
Important items to pay particular atten-
tion to include engine oil, automatic
transaxle fluid, axle lubricant and cooling
system fluid. Brake condition is another
important item to frequently check. Each
item is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review
these sections before you start your trip.
Don’t forget to also maintain your trailer
and hitch. Follow the maintenance
schedule that accompanied your trailer
and check it periodically. Preferably, con-
duct the check at the start of each day’s
driving. Most importantly, all hitch nuts
and bolts should be tight.
WARNING - Parking brake
It can be dangerous to get out of
your vehicle if the parking brake is
not firmly set.
If you have left the engine running,
the vehicle can move suddenly.You
or others could be seriously or
fatally injured.
CAUTION
• Due to higher load during trailer
usage, overheating might occur
in hot days or during uphill driv-
ing. If the coolant gauge indicates
over-heating, switch off the A/C
and stop the vehicle in a safe area
to cool down the engine.
• When towing check transaxle
fluid more frequently.
• If your vehicle is not equipped
with air conditioning, you should
install a condenser fan to improve
engine performance when towing
a trailer.
551
Driving your vehicle
E140600AEN
If you do decide to pull a trailer
Here are some important points if you
decide to pull a trailer:
• Consider using a sway control.You can
ask a hitch dealer about sway control.
• Do not do any towing with your car dur-
ing its first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) in
order to allow the engine to properly
break in. Failure to heed this caution
may result in serious engine or
transaxle damage.
• When towing a trailer, be sure to con-
sult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
further information on additional
requirements such as a towing kit, etc.
• Always drive your vehicle at a moder-
ate speed (less than 60 mph / 100
km/h).
• On a long uphill grade, do not exceed
45 mph (70 km/h) or the posted towing
speed limit, whichever is lower.
• The chart contains important consider-
ations that have to do with weight:
Item
Maximum Towable Weight
Trailer Tongue
With Brake 3,500 (1,588) 350 (159)
Without Brake 1,650 (748) 165 (75)
lbs. (kg)
❈ Boat Trailer Weight (with brake) : 4,500 lbs (2,041 kg)
❈ Maximum Towable Weight : 2 person (Driver and 1 passenger)
Driving your vehicle
525
E140601AUN
Weight of the trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be? It
should never weigh more than the maxi-
mum trailer weight with trailer brakes.But
even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your
trailer. For example, speed, altitude, road
grades, outside temperature and how
often your vehicle is used to pull a trailer
are all important. The ideal trailer weight
can also depend on any special equip-
ment that you have on your vehicle.
E140602AEN
Weight of the trailer tongue
The tongue load of any trailer is an
important weight to measure because it
affects the total gross vehicle weight
(GVW) of your vehicle. This weight
includes the curb weight of the vehicle,
any cargo you may carry in it, and the
people who will be riding in the vehicle.
And if you will tow a trailer, you must add
the tongue load to the GVW because
your vehicle will also be carrying that
weight.
The trailer tongue should weigh a maxi-
mum of 10% of the total loaded trailer
weight, within the limits of the maximum
trailer tongue load permissible. After
you've loaded your trailer, weigh the trail-
er and then the tongue, separately, to
see if the weights are proper. If they
aren’t, you may be able to correct them
simply by moving some items around in
the trailer.
C190E01JM
Tongue Load Total Trailer Weight
WARNING - Trailer
• Never load a trailer with more
weight in the rear than in the
front. The front should be loaded
with approximately 60% of the
total trailer load; the rear should
be loaded with approximately 40%
of the total trailer load.
• Never exceed the maximum
weight limits of the trailer or trail-
er towing equipment. Improper
loading can result in damage to
your vehicle and/or personal
injury. Check weights and loading
at a commercial scale or highway
patrol office equipped with scales.
• An improperly loaded trailer can
cause loss of vehicle control.
C190E02JM
Gross Axle Weight
Gross Vehicle Weight
553
Driving your vehicle
E140700AEN
Trailer connector
A : Power connector
B : Signal connector
C : Connector Cap
1 : Power supply for trailer lamp (30A/B+)
2 : Ground
3 : Signal (Right turn signal light)
4 : Signal (Tail light)
5 : Signal (Left turn signal light)
6 : Signal (Stop light)
The power connector (A) that is connect-
ed with a controller to operate the trailer
lamp and the connector (B) used to judge
whether the vehicle lamp operates prop-
erly is installed in the right bottom back of
the vehicle.
You can use it, when needed.
OEN066017N
CAUTION
• The rear parking assist system
connectors are installed in the
left bottom back of vehicle. Do
not touch the connectors.
• When using the trailer pack, open
the cap(C) and then connect it to
the connector. After using the
connector, disconnect it and
always put the cap(C) back on the
corresponding connector. If the
cap is not replaced, foreign ele-
ments such as dust or liquid may
damage the vehicle.
• You must use a separate con-
troller to use the power connec-
tor(A) to operate the trailer lamp.
• The connector B is only for the
vehicle lamp. Therefore, do not
use the connector B to operate
the trailer lamp. It may blow out
the fuse and damage the vehicle.
• While the connector is connected
to the trailer, make sure the con-
nector wire does not go near the
muffler. The heat from the muffler
may damage the wire.
CLIP CONNECTING PART
CONNECTOR-A CONNECTOR-B
CLIP CONNECTING PART
Driving your vehicle
545
E150100AUN
Tire and loading information label
The label located on the driver's door
sill gives the original tire size, cold
tire pressures recommended for your
vehicle, the number of people that
can be in your vehicle and vehicle
capacity weight.
E150101AEN
Vehicle capacity weight:
1160 lbs. (526 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-
mum combined weight of occupants
and cargo.If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight
includes the tongue load.
E150102AEN
Seating capacity:
Total : 7 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 5 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
of the cargo being carried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there
is a limit to the total weight, or load
limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.
E150103AEN
Towing capacity:
Without trailer brakes:
1650 lbs (748 kg)
With trailer brakes:
3500 lbs (1588 kg)
Towing capacity is the maximum
trailer weight including its cargo
weight, your vehicle can tow.
E150104AUN
Cargo capacity:
The cargo capacity of your vehicle
will increase or decrease depending
on the weight and the number of
occupants and the tongue load, if
your vehicle is equipped with a trail-
er.
E150104AMG
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit -
1. Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's
placard.
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
OEN050100N
OEN050101N
555
Driving your vehicle
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4.The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity.For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 1400
lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity is 650 lb
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-
er, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle.Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific informa-
tion about your vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions. The com-
bined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle's capacity weight.
C190F01JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs
Weight (635 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
300 lbs
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2
(136 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
1100 lbs
Luggage weight (499 kg)
Example 1
ABC
C190F02JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs
Weight (635 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
750 lbs
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5
(340 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
650 lbs
Luggage weight (295 kg)
ABC
Example 2
Driving your vehicle
565
E150200AUN
Certification label
The certification label is located on
the driver's door sill at the center pil-
lar.
This label shows the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle. This is called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The
GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
cargo.
This label also tells you the maxi-
mum weight that can be supported
by the front and rear axles, called
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your
front and rear axles, you need to go
to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle.Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the center-
line.
C190F03JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs
Weight (635 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
860 lbs
172 lbs (78 kg) × 5
(390 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
540 lbs
Luggage weight (245 kg)
ABC
Example 3
OEN056020
WARNING - Over loading
• Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle, the GAWR for
either the front or rear axle
and vehicle capacity weight.
Exceeding these ratings can
cause an accident or vehicle
damage.You can calculate the
weight of your load by weigh-
ing the items (or people)
before putting them in the
vehicle.Be careful not to over-
load your vehicle.
(Continued)
557
Driving your vehicle
The label will help you decide how
much cargo and installed equipment
your vehicle can carry.
If you carry items inside your vehicle
- like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else - they are moving as
fast as the vehicle.If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,
the items will keep going and can
cause an injury if they strike the driv-
er or a passenger.
(Continued)
• Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR, either
the maximum front or rear
GAWR and vehicle capacity
weight. If you do, parts,
including tires on your vehicle
can break, and it can change
the way your vehicle handles
and braking ability.This could
cause you to lose control and
crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehi-
cle.
WARNING
• Overloading your vehicle can
cause heat buildup in your
vehicle's tires and possible
tire failure that could lead to a
crash.
• Overloading your vehicle can
cause increased stopping dis-
tances that could lead to a
crash.
• A crash resulting from poor
handling vehicle damage, tire
failure, or increased stopping
distances could result in seri-
ous injury or death.
WARNING - Loose cargo
Items you carry inside your
vehicle can strike and injure
occupants in a sudden stop or
turn, or in a crash.
• Put items in the cargo area of
your vehicle.Try to spread the
weight evenly.
• Never stack items, like suit-
cases, inside the vehicle
above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured
child restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure it.
• Do not drive with a seat folded
down unless necessary.
CAUTION
• Overloading your vehicle may
cause damage. Repairs would
not be covered by your warran-
ty.Do not overload your vehicle.
• Using heavier suspension com-
ponents to get added durability
might not change your weight
ratings. Ask your dealer to help
you load your vehicle the right
way.
Driving your vehicle
585
E160000AUN
This section will guide you in the proper
loading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to
keep your loaded vehicle weight within its
design rating capability, with or without a
trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of the vehicle
design performance. Before loading your
vehicle, familiarize yourself with the fol-
lowing terms for determining your vehi-
cle's weight ratings, with or without a
trailer, from the vehicle's specifications
and the certification label:
E160100AUN
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle including
a full tank of fuel and all standard equip-
ment. It does not include passengers,
cargo, or optional equipment.
E160200AUN
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your dealer
plus any aftermarket equipment.
E160300AUN
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added to
the Base Curb Weight, including cargo
and optional equipment.
E160400AUN
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) - including vehicle
curb weight and all payload.
E160500AUN
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle (front
or rear). These numbers are shown on
the certification label.
The total load on each axle must never
exceed its GAWR.
E160600AUN
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual
Cargo Weight plus passengers.
E160700AUN-EU
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers and
cargo). The GVWR is shown on the cer-
tification label located on the driver’s
door sill.
VEHICLE WEIGHT
6
Road warning / 6-2
In case of an emergency while driving / 6-2
If the engine will not start / 6-3
Emergency starting / 6-4
If the engine overheats / 6-6
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) / 6-7
If you have a flat tire / 6-12
Towing / 6-21
What to do in an emergency
What to do in an emergency
26
ROAD WARNING
F010100AUN
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves as a
warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme caution when approaching,
overtaking, or passing your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emergency
repairs are being made or when the vehi-
cle is stopped near the edge of a road-
way.
Depress the flasher switch with the igni-
tion switch in any position. The flasher
switch is located in the center console
switch panel. All turn signal lights will
flash simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher operates
whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when the
hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using the
hazard warning flasher while the vehi-
cle is being towed.
F020100AUN-EU
If the engine stalls at a crossroad
or crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the vehi-
cle to a safe place.
F020200AUN-EU
If you have a flat tire while driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
1.Take your foot off the accelerator pedal
and let the car slow down while driving
straight ahead.Do not apply the brakes
immediately or attempt to pull off the
road as this may cause a loss of con-
trol. When the car has slowed to such
a speed that it is safe to do so, brake
carefully and pull off the road. Drive off
the road as far as possible and park on
firm, level ground.If you are on a divid-
ed highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
WHILE DRIVING
OEN046059
63
What to do in an emergency
2.When the car is stopped, turn on your
emergency hazard flashers, set the
parking brake and put the transaxle in
P (automatic transaxle).
3.Have all passengers get out of the car.
Be sure they all get out on the side of
the car that is away from traffic.
4.When changing a flat tire, follow the
instruction provided later in this sec-
tion.
F020300AEN
If engine stalls while driving
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place.
2.Turn on your emergency flashers.
3.Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.
F030100AUN
If engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
1. If your car has an automatic transaxle,
be sure the gear selector lever is in N
(Neutral) or P (Park) and the emer-
gency brake is set.
2. Check the battery connections to be
sure they are clean and tight.
3.Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate the
starter, the battery is discharged.
4. Check the starter connections to be
sure they are securely tightened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start
it. See instructions for "Jump starting".
F030200AEN
If engine turns over normally but
does not start
1. Check fuel level.
2.With the ignition switch in the LOCK
position, check all connectors at igni-
tion coils and spark plugs. Reconnect
any that may be disconnected or
loose.
3. Check the fuel line in the engine com-
partment.
4. If the engine still does not start, call an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
WARNING
If the engine will not start, do not
push or pull the car to start it. This
could result in a collision or cause
other damage. In addition, push or
pull starting may cause the catalyt-
ic converter to be overloaded and
create a fire hazard.
What to do in an emergency
46
EMERGENCY STARTING
F040000AUN
Connect cables in numerical order and
disconnect in reverse order.
F040100AEN
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if done
incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to
yourself or damage to your vehicle or
battery, follow the jump starting proce-
dures. If in doubt, we strongly recom-
mend that you have a competent techni-
cian or towing service jump start your
vehicle.
CAUTION
Use only a 12-volt jumper system.
You can damage a 12-volt starting
motor, ignition system, and other
electrical parts beyond repair by
use of a 24-volt power supply (either
two 12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
WARNING - Battery
• Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery pro-
duces hydrogen gas which may
explode if exposed to flame or
sparks.
If these instructions are not fol-
lowed exactly, serious personal
injury and damage to the vehicle
may occur! If you are not sure
how to follow this procedure,
seek qualified assistance.
Automobile batteries contain sul-
furic acid. This is poisonous and
highly corrosive. When jump
starting, wear protective glasses
and be careful not to get acid on
yourself, your clothing or on the
car.
• Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery
is frozen or if the electrolyte level
is low; the battery may rupture or
explode.
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the elec-
trolyte level of the battery as this
may cause the battery to rupture or
explode causing serious injury.
1VQA4001
Discharged
battery
Jumper Cables
Booster
battery
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
65
What to do in an emergency
F040101AEN
Jump starting procedure
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-
volt and that its negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
3.Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact
sequence shown in the illustration.
First connect one end of a jumper
cable to the positive terminal of the
discharged battery (1), then connect
the other end to the positive terminal
on the booster battery (2).
Proceed to connect one end of the
other jumper cable to the negative ter-
minal of the booster battery (3), then
the other end to a solid, stationary,
metallic point (for example, the engine
lifting bracket) away from the battery
(4). Do not connect it to or near any
part that moves when the engine is
cranked.
Do not allow the jumper cables to con-
tact anything except the correct battery
terminals or the correct ground. Do not
lean over the battery when making
connections.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and let it run at 2,000
rpm, then start the engine of the vehi-
cle with the discharged battery.
If the cause of your battery discharging is
not apparent, you should have your vehi-
cle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
F040200AUN-EU
Push-starting
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle cannot be push-started.
Follow the directions in this section for
jump-starting.
CAUTION - Battery cables
Do not connect the jumper cable
from the negative terminal of the
booster battery to the negative ter-
minal of the discharged battery.
This can cause the discharged bat-
tery to overheat and crack, releas-
ing battery acid.
WARNING
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge forward
when the engine starts could cause
a collision with the tow vehicle.
What to do in an emergency
66
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
F050000AEN
If your temperature gauge indicates over-
heating, you experience a loss of power,
or hear loud pinging or knocking, the
engine is probably too hot. If this hap-
pens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it
is safe to do so.
2. Place the gear selector lever in P (auto-
matic transaxle) and set the parking
brake. If the air conditioning is on, turn
it off.
3. If engine coolant is running out under
the car or steam is coming out from
underneath the hood, stop the engine.
Do not open the hood until the coolant
has stopped running or the steaming
has stopped. If there is no visible loss
of engine coolant and no steam, leave
the engine running and check to be
sure the engine cooling fan is operat-
ing. If the fan is not running, turn the
engine off.
4. Check to see if the water pump drive
belt is missing. If it is not missing,
check to see that it is tight. If the drive
belt seems to be satisfactory, check for
coolant leaking from the radiator,
hoses or under the car. (If the air con-
ditioning had been in use, it is normal
for cold water to be draining from it
when you stop).
5. If the water pump drive belt is broken
or engine coolant is leaking out, stop
the engine immediately and call the
nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer
for assistance.
6.If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine tem-
perature has returned to normal.Then,
if coolant has been lost, carefully add
coolant to the reservoir to bring the
fluid level in the reservoir up to the
halfway mark.
7.Proceed with caution, keeping alert for
further signs of overheating. If over-
heating happens again, call an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
WARNING
While the engine is running, keep
hair, hands and clothing away from
moving parts such as the fan and
drive belts to prevent injury.
CAUTION
Serious loss of coolant indicates
there is a leak in the cooling system
and this should be checked as soon
as possible by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. This may
result in coolant being blown out of
the opening and cause serious
burns.
67
What to do in an emergency
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
(1) TPMS malfunction indicator
(2) Low tire pressure telltale
F060000BEN
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is provided by a
separate telltale, which displays the
symbol "TPMS" when illuminated.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pres-
sure as intended. TPMS malfunc-
tions may occur for a variety of rea-
sons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function proper-
ly.
OEN059100N
What to do in an emergency
86
✽✽
NOTICE
If the TPMS and Low Tire Pressure
indicators do not illuminate for 3
seconds when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position or the
engine is running, or if it remains
illuminated after coming on for
approximately 3 seconds, take your
car to your nearest authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys-
tem checked.
F060100BEN
Low tire pressure tell-
tale
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicators are illumi-
nated, one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
Immediately reduce your speed,
avoid hard cornering and anticipate
increased stopping distances. You
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible. Inflate the tires to
the proper pressure as indicated on
the vehicle’s placard or tire inflation
pressure label located on the driver’s
side center pillar outer panel. If you
cannot reach a service station or if
the tire cannot hold the newly added
air, replace the low pressure tire with
the compact spare tire.
Then the TPMS malfunction indicator
may turn on and the Low Tire
Pressure telltale still turn on after
restarting and about 20 minutes of
continuous driving before you have
the low-pressure tire repaired and
replaced on the vehicle.
✽✽
NOTICE
The compact spare tire is not
equipped with a tire pressure sensor.
69
What to do in an emergency
F060200BEN
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator
comes on and stays on when there is
a problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System. If the system is
able to correctly detect an under-
inflation warning at the same time as
system failure then it will illuminate
both the TPMS malfunction and the
low tire pressure telltale e.g. if Front
Left sensor fails, the TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator illuminates, but if the
Front Right, Rear Left, or Rear Right
tire is under-inflated, the low tire
pressure telltale may illuminate
together with the TPMS malfunction
indicator.
Have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible to determine the cause
of the problem.
WARNING - Low pressure
damage
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tires can cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
CAUTION
In winter or cold weather, the
low tire pressure telltale may be
illuminated if the tire pressure
was adjusted to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunction-
ing because the decreased tem-
perature leads to a proportional
lowering of tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
is greatly higher or lower, you
should check the tire inflation
pressure and adjust the tires to
the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
TPMS
What to do in an emergency
106
F060300BEN
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure warning indicator will turn
on. Have the flat tire repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible or replace the flat tire
with the compact spare tire.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem.You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-
ommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Even if you replace the low pressure
tire with the compact spare tire, the
Low Tire Pressure warning indicator
will remain on until the low pressure
tire is repaired and placed on the
vehicle.
After you replace the low pressure
tire with the compact spare tire, the
TPMS malfunction indicator may be
illuminated after a few minutes
because the compact spare tire does
not have a sensor.
Once the low pressure tire is re-
inflated to the recommended pres-
sure and installed on the vehicle, the
TPMS malfunction indicator and the
low tire pressure telltale will extin-
guish within a few minutes.
If the indicators do not extinguish
after a few minutes, please visit an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
You may not be able identify a low
tire by simply looking at it. Always
use a good quality tire pressure
gauge to measure the tire's inflation
pressure. Please note that a tire that
is hot (from being driven) will have a
higher pressure measurement than a
tire that is cold (from sitting station-
ary for at least 3 hours and driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) during that
3 hour period).
CAUTION
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may be illuminated if the
vehicle is moving around elec-
tric power supply cables or
radios transmitter such as at
police stations, government
and public offices, broadcast-
ing stations, military installa-
tions, airports, or transmitting
towers, etc. This can interfere
with normal operation of the
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS).
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may be illuminated if snow
chains are used or some sep-
arate electronic devices such
as notebook computer, mobile
charger, remote starter or nav-
igation etc., are used in the
vehicle.This can interfere with
normal operation of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS).
CAUTION
NEVER use a puncture-repair-
ing agent to repair and/or inflate
a low pressure tire. The tire
sealant can damage the tire
pressure sensor. If used, you
will have to replace the tire pres-
sure sensor.
611
What to do in an emergency
Allow the tire to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3
hour period.
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
CAUTION
Do not use any tire sealant if
your vehicle is equipped with a
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System. The liquid sealant can
damage the tire pressure sen-
sors.
WARNING - Protecting
TPMS
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
components may interfere with
the system's ability to warn the
driver of low tire pressure con-
ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-
tions. Tampering with, modify-
ing, or disabling the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) components may void
the warranty for that portion of
the vehicle.
WARNING - TPMS
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire dam-
age caused by external fac-
tors such as nails or road
debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually and with
light force,and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority
to operate the equipment.
What to do in an emergency
126
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
F070100BEN
Jack and tools
The jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut
wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment. Pull up the luggage
box cover to reach this equipment.
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
F070101AUN
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
WARNING - Changing tires
• Never attempt vehicle repairs
in the traffic lanes of a public
road or highway.
• Always move the vehicle com-
pletely off the road and onto
the shoulder before trying to
change a tire.The jack should
be used on level firm ground.
If you cannot find a firm, level
place off the road, call a tow-
ing service company for
assistance.
(Continued)
OEN069001L
613
What to do in an emergency
F070200AEN
Removing and storing the spare
tire
Your spare tire is stored underneath
your vehicle, directly below the cargo
area.
To remove the spare tire:
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Find the plastic hex bolt cover and
remove the cover.
3. Use the wheel lug nut wrench to
loosen the bolt enough to lower
the spare tire.
Turn the wrench counterclockwise
until the spare tire reaches the
ground.
OEN067002L-1 OEN067003
(Continued)
• Be sure to use the correct
front and rear jacking posi-
tions on the vehicle; never
use the bumpers or any other
part of the vehicle for jack
support.
• The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack causing serious
injury or death. No person
should place any portion of
their body under a vehicle that
is supported only by a jack;
use vehicle support stands.
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Make sure any children pres-
ent are in a secure place away
from the road and from the
vehicle to be raised with the
jack.
What to do in an emergency
146
4. After the spare tire reaches the
ground, continue to turn the
wrench counterclockwise, and
draw the spare tire outside. Never
rotate the wrench excessively, oth-
erwise the spare tire carrier may
be damaged.
5. Remove the retainer (1) from the
center of the spare tire.
To store the spare tire:
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the
valve stem facing up.
2. Place the wheel under the vehicle
and install the retainer (1) through
the wheel center.
3.Turn the wrench clockwise until it
clicks.
F070300BEN
Changing tires
1. Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2. Shift the transaxle shift lever into P
(Park).
3. Activate the hazard warning flash-
er.
OEN066004 OEN066005
WARNING
Ensure the spare tire retainer is
properly aligned with the center
of the spare tire to prevent the
spare tire “rattling”. Otherwise,
it may cause the spare tire to
fall off the carrier and lead to an
accident.
1VQA4022
615
What to do in an emergency
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-
terclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
1VQA4023 OEN066006
WARNING -
Changing a tire
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully,
and always block the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
• We recommend that the
wheels of the vehicle be
blocked, and that no person
remain in a vehicle that is
being jacked.
What to do in an emergency
166
7. Place the jack at the front or rear
jacking position closest to the tire
you are changing. Place the jack
at the designated locations under
the frame. The jacking positions
are plates welded to the frame
with two tabs and a raised dot to
index with the jack.
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 1.2 in (30 mm).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-
ble and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.
9.Loosen the wheel nuts and
remove them with your fingers.
Slide the wheel off the studs and
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To
put the wheel on the hub, pick up
the spare tire, line up the holes
with the studs and slide the wheel
onto them. If this is difficult, tip the
wheel slightly and get the top hole
in the wheel lined up with the top
stud. Then jiggle the wheel back
and forth until the wheel can be
slid over the other studs.
WARNING
- Jack location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle
and in the correct jack position;
never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
OEN066007 OEN069009
617
What to do in an emergency
10.To reinstall the wheel, hold it on
the studs, put the wheel nuts on
the studs and tighten them finger
tight.Jiggle the tire to be sure it is
completely seated, then tighten
the nuts as much as possible
with your fingers again.
11. Lower the car to the ground by
turning the wheel nut wrench
counterclockwise.
Then position the wrench as shown
in the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut.Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an
extension pipe over the wrench han-
dle. Go around the wheel tightening
every other nut until they are all tight.
Then double-check each nut for
tightness. After changing wheels,
have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
tighten the wheel nuts to their proper
torque as soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Steel wheel & aluminum alloy wheel:
65~79 lb·ft (9~11 kg·m)
WARNING
Wheels may have sharp edges.
Handle them carefully to avoid
possible severe injury. Before
putting the wheel into place, be
sure that there is nothing on the
hub or wheel (such as mud, tar,
gravel, etc.) that interferes with
the wheel from fitting solidly
against the hub.
If there is, remove it. If there is
not good contact on the mount-
ing surface between the wheel
and hub, the wheel nuts could
come loose and cause the loss
of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may
result in loss of control of the
vehicle.This may cause serious
injury or death.
OEN066008
What to do in an emergency
186
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recom-
mended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the cor-
rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting tire pressure. If the cap is
not replaced, air may leak from the
tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy
another and install it as soon as pos-
sible.
After you have changed wheels,
always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire
from rattling while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
CAUTION
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled -
or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud or
vice-versa will not secure the
wheel to the hub properly and
will damage the stud so that it
must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not
have metric threads. Be sure to
use extreme care in checking
for thread style before installing
aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.
If in doubt, consult an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel.This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision
resulting in serious injuries.
WARNING - Inadequate
spare tire pressure
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing
the spare tire. Adjust it to the
specified pressure, if necessary.
Refer to “Tires and wheels” sec-
tion 8.
619
What to do in an emergency
F070301AUN
Important - use of compact spare tire
Your vehicle is equipped with a com-
pact spare tire. This compact spare
tire takes up less space than a regu-
lar-size tire.This tire is smaller than a
conventional tire and is designed for
temporary use only.
The compact spare should be inflat-
ed to 60 psi (420 kPa).
✽✽
NOTICE
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.
When using a compact spare tire,
observe the following precautions:
• Under no circumstances should
you exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); a
higher speed could damage the
tire.
• Ensure that you drive slowly
enough for the road conditions to
avoid all hazards.Any road hazard,
such as a pothole or debris, could
seriously damage the compact
spare.
• Any continuous road use of this tire
could result in tire failure, loss of
vehicle control, and possible per-
sonal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-
mum load rating or the load-carry-
ing capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tire.
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tire diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a con-
ventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately 1
inch (25 mm), which could result in
damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION
• You should drive carefully
when the compact spare is in
use. The compact spare
should be replaced by the
proper conventional tire and
rim at the first opportunity.
• The operation of this vehicle
is not recommended with
more than one compact spare
tire in use at the same time.
WARNING
The compact spare tire is for
emergency use only. Do not
operate your vehicle on this
compact spare at speeds over
50 mph (80 km/h). The original
tire should be repaired or
replaced as soon as is possible
to avoid failure of the spare
possibly leading to personal
injury or death.
What to do in an emergency
206
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic car wash while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use tire chains on the com-
pact spare tire. Because of the
smaller size, a tire chain will not fit
properly. This could damage the
vehicle and result in loss of the
chain.
• The compact spare tire should not
be installed on the front axle if the
vehicle must be driven in snow or
on ice.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn com-
pact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
• The compact spare tire should not
be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow tires,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the compact spare wheel. If
such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other car compo-
nents may occur.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
621
What to do in an emergency
TOWING
F080100AEN-EU
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary, we
recommend having it done by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial
tow-truck service. Proper lifting and tow-
ing procedures are necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel
dollies or flatbed is recommended.
For trailer towing guidelines information,
refer to “Trailer towing” in section 5.
On AWD vehicles, your vehicle must be
towed with a wheel lift and dollies or
flatbed equipment with all the wheels off
the ground.
On 2WD vehicles, it is acceptable to tow
the vehicle with the rear wheels on the
ground (without dollies) and the front
wheels off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or suspen-
sion components are damaged or the
vehicle is being towed with the front
wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly
under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial tow
truck and wheel dollies are not used, the
front of the vehicle should always be lift-
ed, not the rear.
OUN046028
CAUTION
The AWD vehicle should never be
towed with the wheels on the
ground. This can cause serious
damage to the transaxle or the AWD
system.
dolly
2WD only
OUN046030
OUN046029
CAUTION
• Do not tow the vehicle backwards
with the front wheels on the
ground as this may cause dam-
age to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type equip-
ment. Use wheel lift or flatbed
equipment.
What to do in an emergency
226
When towing your vehicle in an emer-
gency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC posi-
tion.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
F080200AUN
Removable towing hook (rear)
1. Open the tailgate, and remove the tow-
ing hook from the tool case.
2. Remove the hole cover pressing the
lower part of the cover on the rear
bumper.
3. Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is fully
secured.
4. Remove the towing hook and install
the cover after use.
CAUTION
Failure to place the transaxle shift
lever in N (Neutral) may cause inter-
nal damage to the transaxle.
OEN066010 OEN066011
623
What to do in an emergency
F080300AEN
Emergency towing
If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial tow
truck service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be tem-
porarily towed using a cable or chain
secured to the emergency towing hook
under the front (or rear) of the vehicle.
Use extreme caution when towing the
vehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle to
steer it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only
on hard-surfaced roads for a short dis-
tance and at low speeds. Also, the
wheels, axles, power train, steering and
brakes must all be in good condition.
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehi-
cle out of mud, sand or other condi-
tions from which the vehicle cannot be
driven out under its own power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the
vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other frequent-
ly.
• Before emergency towing, check that
the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and
even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do not
pull from the side or at a vertical angle.
Always pull straight ahead.
OEN066012
OEN066013
Front
Rear
CAUTION
• Attach a towing strap to the tow
hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle
other than the tow hooks for tow-
ing may damage the body of your
vehicle.
• Use only a cable or chain specifi-
cally intended for use in towing
vehicles. Securely fasten the
cable or chain to the towing hook
provided.
What to do in an emergency
246
• Use a towing strap less than 16 feet (5
m) long. Attach a white or red cloth
(about 12 inches (30 cm) wide) in the
middle of the strap for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing strap
is not loosened during towing.
F080301AEN
Emergency towing precautions
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the
steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking bake.
• Press the brake pedal with more force
than normal since you will have
reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be required
because the power steering system
will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill, the
brakes may overheat and brake per-
formance will be reduced. Stop often
and let the brakes cool off.
WARNING
Use extreme caution when towing
the vehicle.
• Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which would
place excessive stress on the
emergency towing hook and tow-
ing cable or chain.The hook and
towing cable or chain may break
and cause serious injury or dam-
age.
• If the disabled vehicle is cannot
be moved, do not forcibly contin-
ue the towing. Contact an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer or a com-
mercial tow truck service for
assistance.
• Tow the vehicle as straight ahead
as possible.
• Keep away from the vehicle dur-
ing towing.
OEN066014
625
What to do in an emergency
F080400BUN
Tie-down hook
(for flatbed towing) (if equipped)
CAUTION - Automatic
transaxle
• If the car is being towed with all
four wheels on the ground, it can
be towed only from the front. Be
sure that the transaxle is in neu-
tral. Be sure the steering is
unlocked by placing the ignition
switch in the ACC position. A
driver must be in the towed vehi-
cle to operate the steering and
brakes.
• To avoid serious damage to the
automatic transaxle, limit the
vehicle speed to 15 km/h (10 mph)
and drive less than 1.5 km (1
mile) when towing.
• Before towing, check the auto-
matic transaxle fluid leak under
your vehicle. If the automatic
transaxle fluid is leaking, a
flatbed equipment or towing dolly
must be used.
WARNING
Do not use the hooks under the
front (or rear) of the vehicle for tow-
ing purposes. These hooks are
designed ONLY for transport tie-
down. If the tie-down hooks are
used for towing, the tie-down hooks
or front (or rear) bumper will be
damaged and this could lead to
serious injury.
OEN066016
OEN066017
Front
Rear
7
Engine compartment / 7-2
Maintenance services / 7-3
Owner maintenance / 7-4
Scheduled maintenance service / 7-6
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items / 7-11
Engine oil / 7-14
Engine coolant / 7-15
Brakes fluid / 7-18
Power steering fluid / 7-19
Washer fluid / 7-20
Parking brake / 7-20
Air cleaner / 7-21
Climate control air filter / 7-22
Wiper blades / 7-24
Battery / 7-27
Tires and wheels / 7-30
Fuses / 7-43
Light bulbs / 7-52
Appearance care / 7-59
Emission control system / 7-65
California perchlorate notice / 7-68
Maintenance
Maintenance
27
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
G010000AEN-EU
OEN078059
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Radiator cap
9. Engine oil dipstick
10. Power steering fluid reservoir
11.Windshield washer fluid reservoir
* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
73
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
G020000AEN
You should exercise the utmost care to
prevent damage to your vehicle and
injury to yourself whenever performing
any maintenance or inspection proce-
dures.
Should you have any doubts concerning
the inspection or servicing of your vehi-
cle, we strongly recommend that you
have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
perform this work.
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer has fac-
tory-trained technicians and genuine
HYUNDAI parts to service your vehicle
properly. For expert advice and quality
service, see an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient
servicing may result in operational prob-
lems with your vehicle that could lead to
vehicle damage, an accident, or person-
al injury.
G020100AEN-EU
Owner’s responsibility
✽✽
NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsibility.
You should retain documents that show
proper maintenance has been performed
on your vehicle in accordance with the
scheduled maintenance service charts
shown on the following pages.You need
this information to establish your compli-
ance with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle warranties.
Detailed warranty information is provided
in your Owner’s Handbook & Warranty
Information booklet.
Repairs and adjustments required as a
result of improper maintenance or a lack
of required maintenance are not covered.
We recommend you have your vehicle
maintained and repaired by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer. An authorized
HYUNDAI dealer meets HYUNDAI’s high
service quality standards and receives
technical support from HYUNDAI in
order to provide you with a high level of
service satisfaction.
G020200AEN-EU
Owner maintenance precautions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this section, sev-
eral procedures can be done only by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer with special
tools.
✽✽
NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance during
the warranty period may affect warran-
ty coverage. For details, read the sepa-
rate Owner’s Handbook & Warranty
Information booklet provided with the
vehicle. If you're unsure about any serv-
icing or maintenance procedure, have it
done by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er.
Maintenance
47
WARNING
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure. This could cause burns
or other serious injury.
G030000AEN
The following lists are vehicle checks and
inspections that should be performed by
the owner or an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer at the frequencies indicated to
help ensure safe, dependable operation
of your vehicle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your dealer as
soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks are
generally not covered by warranties and
you may be charged for labor, parts and
lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
G030101AUN
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in coolant reser-
voir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
WARNING - Maintenance
work
• Performing maintenance work on
a vehicle can be dangerous. You
can be seriously injured while
performing some maintenance
procedures. If you lack sufficient
knowledge and experience or the
proper tools and equipment to do
the work, have it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Working under the hood with the
engine running is dangerous. It
becomes even more dangerous
when you wear jewelry or loose
clothing. These can become
entangled in moving parts and
result in injury. Therefore, if you
must run the engine while work-
ing under the hood, make certain
that you remove all jewelry (espe-
cially rings, bracelets, watches,
and necklaces) and all neckties,
scarves, and similar loose cloth-
ing before getting near the
engine or cooling fans.
OWNER MAINTENANCE
75
Maintenance
G030102AUN
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of the
exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes
in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steering
effort or looseness in the steering
wheel, or change in its straight-ahead
position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns
slightly or “pulls” to one side when trav-
eling on smooth, level road.
• When stopping, listen and check for
unusual sounds, pulling to one side,
increased brake pedal travel or “hard-
to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the oper-
ation of your transaxle occurs, check
the transaxle fluid level.
• Check automatic transaxle P (Park)
function.
• Check parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle
(water dripping from the air condition-
ing system during or after use is nor-
mal).
G030103AUN
At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn sig-
nals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
G030104AUN
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall):
• Check radiator, heater and air condi-
tioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check windshield washer spray and
wiper operation. Clean wiper blades
with clean cloth dampened with wash-
er fluid.
• Check headlight alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields
and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear
and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose wheel
lug nuts.
G030105AUN-EU
At least once a year:
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and checks, and
hood hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weatherstrips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Check the power steering fluid level.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
Maintenance
67
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
G040000AUN-EU
Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule if
the vehicle is usually operated where
none of the following conditions apply. If
any of the following conditions apply, fol-
low Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or sandy
areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in cold
temperatures and/or extremely humid
climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy city
traffic during hot weather above 90°F
(32°C).
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should inspect,
replace or refill more frequently than the
following Normal Maintenance Schedule.
After 120 months or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) continue to follow the pre-
scribed maintenance intervals.
77
Maintenance
G040100AEN-EU
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all
vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is deter-
mined by whichever occurs first.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after Inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.
*
1
: Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary.
*
2
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of HYUNDAI Fuel System Cleaner Plus is recommended.They
are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
DESCRIPTION
7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120 127.5 135 142.5 150
12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 204 216 228 240
6 121824303642485460667278849096102108114120
Replace every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months
RRRR
IIIII
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII II
IIIII
I I IRI I IRI I IRI I IRII IR
Replace every 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or 10 years
II
IRIRIRIRIR
Every 7,500 miles or 12 months
EMISSION CONTROL ITEMS
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
FUEL FILTER
FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES AND CONNECTIONS
VACUUM HOSE
VAPOR HOSE AND FUEL FILLER CAP
AIR CLEANER FILTER
SPARK PLUGS (IRIDIUM COATED)
VALVE CLEARANCE *
1
FUEL TANK AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)
ADD FUEL ADDITIVES*
2
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
MILES X 1000
KILOMETERS X 1000
MONTHS
Maintenance
87
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
DESCRIPTION
7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120 127.5 135 142.5 150
12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 204 216 228 240
6 121824303642485460667278849096102108114120
At first, inspect the drive belt at 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months:
after that, inspect it 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months
At first, replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months
After that, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months*
5
No check, No service required.
IIIII
IIIIIIIIII
IIIIIIIIII
IIIII
IIIIIIIIII
IIIIIIIIII
IIIIIIIIII
GENERAL ITEMS
DRIVE BELTS*
3
ENGINE COOLANT*
4
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID
BRAKE FLUID
BRAKE HOSES AND LINES
REAR BRAKE DISC/PADS
PARKING BRAKE
FRONT DISC BRAKE/PADS,
CALIPERS
EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER
SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS
MILES X 1000
KILOMETERS X 1000
MONTHS
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after Inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
*3
: The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.
*4
: When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An
improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*5
: For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.
79
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after Inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.
DESCRIPTION
7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120 127.5 135 142.5 150
12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 204 216 228 240
6 121824303642485460667278849096102108114120
IIIIIIIIII
IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII II
IIIIIIIIII
IIIIIIIIII
IIIIIIIIII
Replace every 10,000 miles (15,000 km) or 12 months
Inspect every 40,000 miles (60,000 km) or 48 months
Inspect every 40,000 miles (60,000 km) or 48 months
IIIIIIIIII
GENERAL ITEMS
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS /
LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL
JOINT
POWER STEERING FLUID
POWER STEERING PUMP, BELT AND HOSES
DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS
AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)
TRANSFER CASE OIL (AWD)
REAR AXLE OIL (AWD) *
6
PROPELLER SHAFT (AWD)
MILES X 1000
KILOMETERS X 1000
MONTHS
No.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
*6
:Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.
Maintenance
107
G040200AEN-EU
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5 miles (8 km) in normal
temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km) in freezing temperature
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- spread roads
D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold
weather
E - Driving in sandy areas
F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)
G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing
J - Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)
K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
AIR CLEANER FILTER
SPARK PLUGS
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID
FRONT DISC BRAKE/PADS, CALIPERS
REAR BRAKE DISC/PADS, PARKING BRAKE
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/
LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT
DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS
TRANSFER CASE OIL (AWD)
REAR AXLE OIL (AWD)
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)
PROPELLER SHAFT
R
R
R
R
I
I
I
I
R
R
R
I
EVERY 3,750 MILES (6,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS
MORE FREQUENTLY
MORE FREQUENTLY
EVERY 60,000 MILES
MORE FREQUENTLY
MORE FREQUENTLY
MORE FREQUENTLY
EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS
EVERY 80,000 MILES (120,000 KM)
EVERY 80,000 MILES (120,000 KM)
MORE FREQUENTLY
EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS
A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K
C, E
B, H
A, C, E, F, G, I
C, D, G, H
C, D, G, H
C, D, E, F, G, H, I
C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
C, E, G, H, I, J
C, E, G, H, I, J
C, E
C, E
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart
below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
711
Maintenance
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
G050100AUN
Engine oil and filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in the
maintenance schedule.If the car is being
driven in severe conditions, more fre-
quent oil and filter changes are required.
G050200AUN
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil satu-
ration and replace if necessary. Drive
belts should be checked periodically for
proper tension and adjusted as neces-
sary.
G050300AEN
Fuel filter (cartridge)
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven, damage
the emission system and cause multiple
issues such as hard starting. If an exces-
sive amount of foreign matter accumu-
lates in the fuel tank, the filter may
require replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the engine
for several minutes, and check for leaks
at the connections. Fuel filters should be
installed by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
G050400AEN-EU
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections for leakage and damage. Have
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace
any damaged or leaking parts immedi-
ately.
G050600AUN
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should
be inspected at those intervals specified
in the maintenance schedule. Make sure
that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is
correctly replaced.
Maintenance
127
G050700AUN
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses
Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence
of heat and/or mechanical damage.Hard
and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,
abrasions, and excessive swelling indi-
cate deterioration. Particular attention
should be paid to examine those hose
surfaces nearest to high heat sources,
such as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure that
the hoses do not come in contact with
any heat source, sharp edges or moving
component which might cause heat dam-
age or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and cou-
plings, to make sure they are secure, and
that no leaks are present. Hoses should
be replaced immediately if there is any
evidence of deterioration or damage.
G050800AEN
Air cleaner filter
A Genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner filter is
recommended when the filter is
replaced.
G050900AUN
Spark plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs of
the correct heat range.
G051000AEN
Valve clearance
Inspect excessive valve noise and/or
engine vibration and adjust if necessary.
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer should
perform the operation.
G051100AUN
Cooling system
Check cooling system components, such
as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and
connections for leakage and damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
G051200AUN
Coolant
The coolant should be changed at the
intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule.
G051500AUN
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and any
leakage. Replace any deteriorated or
damaged parts immediately.
G051600AUN
Brake fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid
reservoir. The level should be between
“MIN” and “MAX” marks on the side of
the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake
fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4
specification.
713
Maintenance
G051700AUN
Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system includ-
ing the parking brake pedal and cables.
G051900AUN
Brake discs, pads, calipers and
rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear, discs
for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid
leakage.
G052000AUN
Exhaust pipe and muffler
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muf-
fler and hangers for cracks, deterioration,
or damage. Start the engine and listen
carefully for any exhaust gas leakage.
Tighten connections or replace parts as
necessary.
G052100AUN
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections for
looseness or damage. Retighten to the
specified torque.
G052200AUN
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine off,
check for excessive free-play in the
steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or damage.
Check the dust boots and ball joints for
deterioration, cracks, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
G052300AEN
Power steering pump, belt and
hoses
Check the power steering pump and
hoses for leakage and damage. Replace
any damaged or leaking parts immedi-
ately. Inspect the power steering belt (or
drive belt) for evidence of cuts, cracks,
excessive wear, oiliness and proper ten-
sion. Replace or adjust it if necessary.
G052400AUN
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps
for cracks, deterioration, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts and, if nec-
essary, repack the grease.
G052500AUN
Air conditioning refrigerant
Check the air conditioning lines and con-
nections for leakage and damage.
Maintenance
147
ENGINE OIL
G060100AEN-EU
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to reach
normal operating temperature.
3.Turn the engine off and wait for a few
minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to
return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and
re-insert it fully.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and check
the level.The level should be between
F and L.
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring
the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil from
being spilled on engine components.
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to “Recommended lubricants and capaci-
ties” in section 8.)
WARNING - Radiator hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may be
hot enough to burn you.
OEN076002N OEN076003N
CAUTION
• Do not overfill with engine oil.
Engine damage may result.
• Do not spill engine oil, when
adding or changing engine oil. If
you drop the engine oil on the
engine room, wipe it off immedi-
ately.
715
Maintenance
G060200AEN-EU
Changing the engine oil and filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the begin-
ning of this section.
G070000AUN
The high-pressure cooling system has a
reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze
coolant. The reservoir is filled at the fac-
tory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at the
beginning of the winter season, and
before traveling to a colder climate.
G070100AEN
Checking the coolant level
ENGINE COOLANT
WARNING
Removing radiator
cap
• Never attempt to remove the radi-
ator cap while the engine is oper-
ating or hot. Doing so might lead
to cooling system and engine
damage and could result in seri-
ous personal injury from escap-
ing hot coolant or steam.
(Continued)
CALIFORNIA
PROPOSI-
TION 65 WARNING
Engine oil contains chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer, birth defects, and
reproductive harm.
Used engine oil may cause irrita-
tion or cancer of the skin if left in
contact with the skin for prolonged
periods of time. Used engine oil
contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory ani-
mals. Always protect your skin by
washing your hands thoroughly
with soap and warm water as soon
as possible after handling used oil.
Maintenance
167
Check the condition and connections of
all cooling system hoses and heater
hoses. Replace any swollen or deterio-
rated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F and L marks on the side of the
coolant reservoir when the engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
specified coolant to provide protection
against freezing and corrosion. Bring the
level to F, but do not overfill. If frequent
additions are required, see an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for a cooling system
inspection.
OEN076004
(Continued)
• Turn the engine off and wait until
it cools down. Use extreme care
when removing the radiator cap.
Wrap a thick towel around it, and
turn it counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the
cooling system. When you are
sure all the pressure has been
released, press down on the cap,
using a thick towel, and continue
turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
• Even if the engine is not operat-
ing, do not remove the radiator
cap or the drain plug while the
engine and radiator are hot. Hot
coolant and steam may still blow
out under pressure, causing seri-
ous injury.
WARNING
The electric motor
(cooling fan) is con-
trolled by engine
coolant temperature,
refrigerant pressure
and vehicle speed. It may some-
times operate even when the
engine is not running. Use extreme
caution when working near the
blades of the cooling fan so that
you are not injured by a rotating fan
blades. As the engine coolant tem-
perature decreases, the electric
motor will automatically shut off.
This is a normal condition.
717
Maintenance
G070101AUN
Recommended engine coolant
• Use only soft (de-mineralized) water in
the coolant mixture.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be pro-
tected by an ethylene-glycol-based
coolant to prevent corrosion and freez-
ing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the specified
coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less than
35% antifreeze, which would reduce
the effectiveness of the solution.
For mixture percentage, refer to the fol-
lowing table.
G070200AEN
Changing the coolant
Have coolant changed by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer according to the
Maintenance Schedule at the beginning
of this section.
WARNING
Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator are
hot. Scalding hot coolant and
steam may blow out under pres-
sure causing serious injury.
CAUTION
Put a thick cloth around the radiator
cap before refilling the coolant in
order to prevent the coolant from
overflowing into engine parts such
as the generator.
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may cause
loss of vehicle control or damage
to paint and body trim.
-15°C (5°F) 35 65
-25°C (-13°F) 40 60
-35°C (-31°F) 50 50
-45°C (-49°F) 60 40
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage (volume)
Antifreeze
Water
OEN076005
Maintenance
187
BRAKE FLUID
G080100AEN
Checking the brake fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri-
odically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap and
adding brake fluid, clean the area around
the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent
brake fluid contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX
level. The level will fall with accumulated
mileage.This is a normal condition asso-
ciated with the wear of the brake linings.
If the fluid level is excessively low, have
the brake system checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
Use only the specified brake fluid. (Refer
to “Recommended lubricants and capac-
ities” in section 8.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
WARNING - Brake fluid
When changing and adding brake
fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it
come in contact with your eyes. If
brake fluid should come in contact
with your eyes, immediately flush
them with a large quantity of fresh
tap water. Have your eyes examined
by a doctor as soon as possible.
WARNING - Loss of brake
fluid
In the event the brake system
requires frequent additions of fluid,
the vehicle should be inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OEN076006
CAUTION
Do not allow brake fluid to contact
the vehicle's body paint, as paint
damage will result. Brake fluid,
which has been exposed to open air
for an extended time should never
be used as its quality cannot be
guaranteed. It should be disposed
of properly. Don't put in the wrong
kind of fluid. A few drops of miner-
al-based oil, such as engine oil, in
your brake system can damage
brake system parts.
719
Maintenance
POWER STEERING FLUID
G090100AEN
Checking the power steering fluid
level
With the vehicle on level ground, check
the fluid level in the power steering reser-
voir periodically. The fluid should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir at the normal tem-
perature.
Before adding power steering fluid, thor-
oughly clean the area around the reser-
voir cap to prevent power steering fluid
contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX
level.
✽✽
NOTICE
Check that the fluid level is in the
"HOT" range on the reservoir. If the
fluid is cold, check that it is in the
"COLD" range.
In the event the power steering system
requires frequent addition of fluid, the
vehicle should be inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Use only the specified power steering
fluid.(Refer to "Recommended lubricants
and capacities" in section 8.)
G090200AEN
Checking the power steering
hose
Check the connections for oil leaks, dam-
age and twists in the power steering
hose before driving.
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to the power
steering pump, do not operate the
vehicle for prolonged periods
with a low power steering fluid
level.
• Never start the engine when the
reservoir tank is empty.
• When adding fluid, be careful that
dirt does not get into the tank.
• Too little fluid can result in
increased steering effort and/or
noise from the power steering
system.
• The use of the non-specified fluid
could reduce the effectiveness of
the power steering system and
cause damage to it.
OEN076007N
Maintenance
207
WASHER FLUID
G120100AUN
Checking the washer fluid level
The reservoir is translucent so that you
can check the level with a quick visual
inspection.
Check the fluid level in the washer fluid
reservoir and add fluid if necessary.Plain
water may be used if washer fluid is not
available. However, use washer solvent
with antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-
mates to prevent freezing.
G140100AEN
Checking the parking brake
Check whether the stroke is within spec-
ification when the parking brake pedal is
depressed with 66 lb (30 kg, 294 N) of
force. Also, the parking brake alone
should securely hold the vehicle on a fair-
ly steep grade. If the stroke is more or
less than specified, have the parking
brake adjusted by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Stroke : 5.1~5.5 in (130~140 mm)
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may cause
loss of vehicle control or damage
to paint and body trim.
• Windshield washer fluid agents
contain some amounts of alcohol
and can be flammable under cer-
tain circumstances. Do not allow
sparks or flame to contact the
washer fluid or the washer fluid
reservoir. Damage to the vehicle
or occupants could occur.
• Windshield washer fluid is poi-
sonous to humans and animals.
Do not drink and avoid contacting
windshield washer fluid. Serious
injury or death could occur.
OEN076008N OEN056005
PARKING BRAKE
721
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
G160100AEN-EU
Filter replacement
It must be replaced when necessary, and
should not be cleaned and reused.
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching
clips and open the cover.
2. Replace the air cleaner filter.
3. Lock the cover with the cover attaching
clips.
OEN076010N OEN076011N
OEN076012N
OEN076013N
Maintenance
227
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extremely
dusty or sandy areas, replace the ele-
ment more often than the usual recom-
mended intervals. (Refer to
“Maintenance under severe usage condi-
tions” in this section.)
G170100AEN
Filter inspection
The climate control air filter should be
replaced according to the Maintenance
Schedule. If the vehicle is operated in
severely air-polluted cities or on dusty
rough roads for a long period, it should
be inspected more frequently and
replaced earlier. When you replace the
climate control air filter, replace it per-
forming the following procedure, and be
careful to avoid damaging other compo-
nents.
G170200AEN
Filter replacement
1. Open the glove box and remove the
support rod (1).
CAUTION
• Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed; this will result in exces-
sive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner fil-
ter, be careful that dust or dirt
does not enter the air intake, or
damage may result.
• Use a HYUNDAI genuine part. Use
of non-genuine parts could dam-
age the air flow sensor.
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
OEN076015
723
Maintenance
2.With the glove box open, remove the
stoppers on both sides to allow the
glove box to hang freely on the hinges.
3. Remove the climate control air filter
case pulling out both sides of the
cover.
4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order of
disassembly.
✽✽
NOTICE
When replacing the climate control air
filter install it properly. Otherwise, the
system may produce noise and the effec-
tiveness of the filter may be reduced.
OEN078016 OEN076017 OEN076050
Maintenance
247
WIPER BLADES
G180100AUN
Blade inspection
✽✽
NOTICE
Commercial hot waxes applied by auto-
matic car washes have been known to
make the windshield difficult to clean.
Contamination of either the windshield or
the wiper blades with foreign matter can
reduce the effectiveness of the wind-
shield wipers. Common sources of con-
tamination are insects, tree sap, and hot
wax treatments used by some commer-
cial car washes.If the blades are not wip-
ing properly, clean both the window and
the blades with a good cleaner or mild
detergent, and rinse thoroughly with
clean water.
G180200AUN
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean ade-
quately, the blades may be worn or
cracked, and require replacement.
1JBA5122
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do not
attempt to move the wipers manual-
ly.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunc-
tion and failure.
725
Maintenance
G180201AEN-EU
Front windshield wiper blade
For your convenience, move the wind-
shield wiper blades to the service posi-
tion as follows;
1.Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
2. Move the wiper switch to the single
wiping position (MIST) and hold the
switch until the wiper arm is in the fully
up position.
3. Raise the wiper arm. 4. Press the button and slide the blade
assembly upward.
OEN076057N
OEN076049
OEN076047
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield, since it may
chip or crack the windshield.
Maintenance
267
5.Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
6. Return the wiper arm on the wind-
shield.
7.Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion.
8. Move the wiper switch to any position
and then to the OFF position.
G180202AEN
Rear window wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out the
wiper blade assembly.
2. Install the new blade assembly by
inserting the center part into the slot in
the wiper arm until it clicks into place.
3.Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it slight-
ly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms or
other components, have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer replace the wiper
blade.
OEN076048
OEN076018
OEN076019
727
Maintenance
G190100AUN-EU
For best battery service
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections
clean, tight, and coated with petroleum
jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the
battery immediately with a solution of
water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be used for
an extended time, disconnect the bat-
tery cables.
BATTERY
OEN076020N
WARNING - Battery
dangers
Always read the following
instructions carefully when
handling a battery.
Keep lighted cigarettes and
all other flames or sparks
away from the battery.
Hydrogen, a highly com-
bustible gas, is always
present in battery cells and
may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children because
batteries contain highly
corrosive SULFURIC ACID.
Do not allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If any electrolyte gets into
your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least
15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention.
If electrolyte gets on your
skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel a
pain or a burning sensa-
tion, get medical attention
immediately.
Wear eye protection when
charging or working near a
battery. Always provide
ventilation when working in
an enclosed space.
An inappropriately dis-
posed battery can be harm-
ful to the environment and
human health. Dispose the
battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.
(Continued)
Maintenance
287
G190200AUN
Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged in a
short time (because, for example, the
headlights or interior lights were left on
while the vehicle was not in use),
recharge it by slow charging (trickle)
for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while the
vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-
30A for two hours.
(Continued)
• When lifting a plastic-cased bat-
tery, excessive pressure on the
case may cause battery acid to
leak, resulting in personal injury.
Lift with a battery carrier or with
your hands on opposite corners.
• Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery cables
are connected.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage. Never
touch these components with the
engine running or the ignition
switched on.
Failure to follow the above warn-
ings can result in serious bodily
injury or death.
WARNING - Recharging
battery
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in an
area with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks,
or flame near the battery.
(Continued)
CALIFORNIA
PROPOSI-
TION 65 WARNING
Battery posts, terminals, and relat-
ed accessories contain lead and
lead compounds, chemicals known
to the State of California to cause
cancer, birth defects, and reproduc-
tive harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer. Wash
hands after handling.
CAUTION
• When you don’t use the vehicle
for a long time in the low temper-
ature area, separate the battery
and keep it indoors.
• Always charge the battery fully to
prevent battery case damage in
low temperature area.
• If you connect unauthorized elec-
tronic devices, the battery may be
discharged. Never use unautho-
rized devices.
WARNING
Separating the battery from the
vehicle should be done in an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
729
Maintenance
G190400AEN
Removing the battery
1. Remove the nut (1) and disconnect the
battery cable from the negative termi-
nal of the battery.
2. Remove the nuts (2, 3) and disconnect
the battery cable from the positive ter-
minal of the battery.
3. Remove the battery.
4. Reinstall the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
G190300AEN
Reset items
Items should be reset after the battery
has been discharged or the battery has
been disconnected.
• Power tailgate (See section 4)
• Auto up/down window (See section 4)
• Sunroof (See section 4)
• Driver position memory system
(See section 4)
• Trip computer (See section 4)
• Climate control system
(See section 4)
• Clock (See section 4)
• Audio (See section 4)
OEN076052N
(Continued)
• Watch the battery during charg-
ing, and stop or reduce the charg-
ing rate if the battery cells begin
gassing (boiling) violently or if
the temperature of the electrolyte
of any cell exceeds 120°F (49°C).
• Wear eye protection when check-
ing the battery during charging.
• Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1.Turn off the battery charger main
switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp from
the negative battery terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp from
the positive battery terminal.
WARNING
• Before performing maintenance
or recharging the battery, turn off
all accessories and stop the
engine.
• The negative battery cable must
be removed first and installed
last when the battery is discon-
nected.
Maintenance
307
CAUTION
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation also is
possible. Keep your tire pres-
sures at the proper levels. If a
tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Overinflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the center of the tire tread, and
a greater possibility of dam-
age from road hazards.
TIRES AND WHEELS
G200100AUN
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
G200200AEN-EU
Recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold.“Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
one mile (1.6 km).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, vehicle
handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure,
refer to “Tire and wheels” in section
8.
All specifications (sizes and pres-
sures) can be found on a label
attached to the driver’s side center
pillar.
WARNING - Tire underin-
flation
Severe underinflation can lead
to severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
leading to severe injury or
death. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
OEN086003
731
Maintenance
G200300AUN
Checking tire inflation pressure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
G200301AEN
How to check
Use a good quality gage to check tire
pressure.You can not tell if your tires
are properly inflated simply by look-
ing at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they're
underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
WARNING - Tire Inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
CAUTION - Tire pressure
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the
tires are cold. (After vehicle
has been parked for at least
three hours or hasn't been
driven more than one mile (1.6
km) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your
spare tire each time you check
the pressure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle.
Be careful not to overload a
vehicle luggage rack if your
vehicle is equipped with one.
• Worn, old tires can cause acci-
dents. If your tread is badly
worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
CAUTION
• Warm tires normally exceed
recommended cold tire pres-
sures by 4 to 6 psi (28 to 41
kPa). Do not release air from
warm tires to adjust the pres-
sure or the tires will be under-
inflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire
inflation valve caps. Without
the valve cap, dirt or moisture
could get into the valve core
and cause air leakage. If a
valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
Maintenance
327
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gage firm-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement.If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjust-
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the rec-
ommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-
ture.
G200400AUN
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
mended that the tires be rotated
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible.After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tire and wheels” in section
8.
WARNING
• Inspect your tires frequently
for proper inflation as well as
wear and damage. Always use
a tire pressure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly caus-
ing poor handling,loss of vehi-
cle control, and sudden tire
failure leading to accidents,
injuries, and even death. The
recommended cold tire pres-
sure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on
the tire label located on the dri-
ver's side center pillar.
• Worn tires can cause acci-
dents. Replace tires that are
worn, show uneven wear, or
are damaged.
• Remember to check the pres-
sure of your spare tire.
HYUNDAI recommends that
you check the spare every
time you check the pressure
of the other tires on your vehi-
cle.
733
Maintenance
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
✽✽
NOTICE
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to
left.
G200500AUN
Wheel alignment and tire balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
S2BLA790A
CBGQ0707A
Without a spare tire
Directional tires (if equipped)
WARNING
• Do not use the compact spare
tire for tire rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances. This may cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics that could result in death,
severe injury, or property
damage.
CAUTION
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's alu-
minum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
Maintenance
347
G200600BEN
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread.This shows there is
less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
left on the tire.Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
OEN076053
Tread wear indicator
WARNING - Replacing
tires
To reduce the chance or serious
or fatal injuries from an acci-
dent caused by tire failure or
loss of vehicle control:
• Replace tires that are worn,
show uneven wear, or are
damaged. Worn tires can
cause loss of braking effec-
tiveness, steering control, and
traction.
• Do not drive your vehicle with
too little or too much pressure
in your tires. This can lead to
uneven wear and tire failure.
• When replacing tires, never
mix radial and bias-ply tires
on the same car. You must
replace all tires (including the
spare) if moving from radial to
bias-ply tires.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Using tires and wheel other
than the recommended sizes
could cause unusual handling
characteristics and poor vehi-
cle control, resulting in a seri-
ous accident.
• Wheels that do not meet
HYUNDAI’s specifications
may fit poorly and result in
damage to the vehicle or
unusual handling and poor
vehicle control.
• The ABS works by comparing
the speed of the wheels. Tire
size can affect wheel speed.
When replacing tires, all 4
tires must use the same size
originally supplied with the
vehicle. Using tires of a differ-
ent size can cause the ABS
(Anti-lock Brake System) and
ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) to work irregularly (if
equipped).
735
Maintenance
G200601AUN
Compact spare tire replacement
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mount-
ing a regular size tire.
G200700BUN
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
G200800AUN
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. To reduce the possibility of
losing control, slow down whenever
there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
G200900AUN
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
WARNING
A wheel that is not the correct
size may adversely affect wheel
and bearing life, braking and
stopping abilities, handling
characteristics, ground clear-
ance, body-to-tire clearance,
snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer cal-
ibration, headlight aim and
bumper height.
Maintenance
367
G201000AUN
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
G201001AUN
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
G201002AEN
2.Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and num-
bers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
P245/65R17 105T
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
cars or light trucks; however, not
all tires have this marking).
245 - Tire width in millimeters.
65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
17 - Rim diameter in inches.
105 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
T - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one.The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
7.0JX17
7.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
17 - Rim diameter in inches.
I030B04JM
1
1
2
3
4
5,6
7
737
Maintenance
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger car tires. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire.This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe oper-
ating speed.
G201003BEN
3. Checking tire life (TIN :Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of num-
bers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufactur-
ing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1609 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2009.
G201004AEN
4.Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D" means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)
Maximum Speed
Speed
Rating
Symbol
WARNING - Tire age
Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, it is recommended that
tires generally be replaced after
six (6) years of normal service.
Heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading condi-
tions can accelerate the aging
process. Failure to follow this
warning can result in sudden
tire failure, which could lead to
a loss of control and an acci-
dent involving serious injury or
death.
Maintenance
387
G201005AUN
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire.Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
G201006AUN
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
G2010007BEN-EU
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width.
For example:
TREAD wear 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicle
may vary with respect to grade.
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accelera-
tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
739
Maintenance
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C cor-
responds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the labora-
tory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
G201100AEN
Tire terminology and definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air
inside the tire pressing outward on
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
pascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the
combined weight of optional acces-
sories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmis-
sion, power seats, and air condition-
ing.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a
tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords
that is located between the plies and
the tread. Cords may be made from
steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel
wires wrapped by steel cords that
hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the plies are laid at alternate
angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible sudden
tire failure.
Maintenance
407
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of
air pressure in a tire, measured in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
pascals (kPa) before a tire has built
up heat from driving.
Curb Weight:This means the weight
of a motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, but without passengers and
cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into
the sidewall of a tire signifying that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation motor
vehicle safety standards. The DOT
code includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des-
ignator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Front Axle.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Rear axle.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for
air pressure.
Load Index: An assigned number
ranging from 1 to 279 that corre-
sponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The
maximum air pressure to which a
cold tire may be inflated. The maxi-
mum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load
rating for a tire at the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure for that
tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight:The
number of occupants a vehicle is
designed to seat multiplied by 150
pounds (68 kg).
Occupant Distribution: Designated
seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side
of a asymmetrical tire that has a par-
ticular side that faces outward when
mounted on a vehicle. The outward
facing sidewall bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on
the inner facing sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire
used on passenger cars and some
light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-
ed tire inflation pressure and shown
on the tire placard.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the ply cords that extend to the
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and
upon which the tire beads are seat-
ed.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
741
Maintenance
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric
code assigned to a tire indicating the
maximum speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between the
tire and the road surface. The
amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called "wear
bars," that show across the tread of a
tire when only 2/32 inch of tread
remains.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards, a tire information
system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction, tempera-
ture and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing proce-
dures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-
ber of designated seating positions
multiplied by 150 lbs.(68 kg) plus the
rated cargo and luggage load.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire:Load on an individual tire due to
curb and accessory weight plus
maximum occupant and cargo
weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight and dividing by 2.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-
ly attached to a vehicle showing the
original equipment tire size and rec-
ommended inflation pressure.
All season tires
HYUNDAI specifies all season tires
on some models to provide good
performance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road condi-
tions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
HYUNDAI specifies summer tires on
some models to provide superior
performance on dry roads. Summer
tire performance is substantially
reduced in snow and ice. Summer
tires do not have the tire traction rat-
ing M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire
side wall. if you plan to operate your
vehicle in snowy or icy conditions.
HYUNDAI recommends the use of
snow tires or all season tires on all
four wheels.
Snow tires
If you equip your car with snow tires,
they should be the same size and
have the same load capacity as the
original tires. Snow tires should be
installed on all four wheels; other-
wise, poor handling may result.
Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28
kPa) more air pressure than the
pressure recommended for the stan-
dard tires on the tire label on the dri-
ver's side of the center pillar, or up to
the maximum pressure shown on the
tire sidewall, whichever is less.
Maintenance
427
Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120
km/h) when your car is equipped with
snow tires.
Tire chains
Tire chains, if necessary, should be
installed on the drive wheels as fol-
lows.
2WD : Front wheels
AWD : All four wheels
If a full set of chains is not
available for a AWD vehicle,
chains may be installed on
the front wheels only.
Be sure that the chains are installed
in accordance with the manufactur-
er's instructions.
To minimize tire and chain wear, do
not continue to use tire chains when
they are no longer needed.
Radial-ply tires
Radial-ply tires provide improved
tread life, road hazard resistance and
smoother high speed ride. The radi-
al-ply tires used on this vehicle are of
belted construction, and are selected
to complement the ride and handling
characteristics of your vehicle.
Radial-ply tires have the same load
carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias
belted tires of the same size, and use
the same recommended inflation
pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires
with bias-ply or bias belted tires is
not recommended. Any combina-
tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias
belted tires when used on the same
vehicle will seriously deteriorate
vehicle handling.The best rule to fol-
low is:Identical radial-ply tires should
always be used as a set of four.
Longer wearing tires can be more
susceptible to irregular tread wear. It
is very important to follow the tire
rotation interval shown in this section
to achieve the tread life potential of
these tires. Cuts and punctures in
radial-ply tires are repairable only in
the tread area, because of sidewall
flexing. Consult your tire dealer for
radial-ply tire repairs.
WARNING - Snow or ice
• When driving on roads cov-
ered with snow or ice, drive at
less than 20 mph (30 km/h).
• Use the SAE “S” class or wire
chains.
• If you hear noise caused by
chains contacting the body,
retighten the chain to avoid
contact with the vehicle body.
• To prevent body damage,
retighten the chains after driv-
ing 0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1.0 km).
• Do not use tire chains on
vehicles equipped with alu-
minum wheels. In unavoid-
able circumstance, use a wire
type chain.
• Use wire chains less than 0.59
inches (15 mm) to prevent
damage to the chain’s con-
nection.
743
Maintenance
FUSES
G210000AEN
A vehicle’s electrical system is protected
from electrical overload damage by
fuses.
This vehicle has 3 fuse panels, one locat-
ed in the driver’s side panel bolster, the
other in the engine compartment.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check the
appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has
blown, the element inside the fuse will be
melted.
If the electrical system does not work,
first check the driver’s side fuse panel.
Always replace a blown fuse with one of
the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-
cates an electrical problem. Avoid using
the system involved and immediately
consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Three kinds of fuses are used:blade type
for lower amperage rating, cartridge type,
and fusible link for higher amperage rat-
ings.
1VQA4037
Normal
Normal
Blade type
Cartridge type
Fusible link
Blown
Blown
Normal Blown
WARNING - Fuse replace-
ment
• Never replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or aluminum
foil instead of the proper fuse -
even as a temporary repair. It may
cause extensive wiring damage
and a possible fire.
CAUTION
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove fuses
because it may cause a short circuit
and damage the system.
Maintenance
447
G210100AEN
Instrument panel fuse replace-
ment
1.Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.
Use the removal tool provided in the
fuse panel cover.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown.
Spare fuses are provided in the instru-
ment panel fuse panel (or in the engine
compartment fuse panel).
5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of
the same rating from a circuit you may
not need for operating the vehicle, such
as the cigarette lighter fuse.
If the headlights or other electrical com-
ponents do not work and the fuses are
OK, check the fuse panel in the engine
compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must
be replaced.
OEN076022OEN076021
745
Maintenance
G210101AUN
Memory fuse
Your vehicle is equipped with a memory
fuse to prevent battery discharge if your
vehicle is parked without being operated
for prolonged periods. Use the following
procedures before parking the vehicle for
prolonged periods.
1.Turn off the engine.
2.Turn off the headlights and tail lights.
3. Open the driver’s side panel cover and
pull up the memory fuse.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the memory fuse is pulled up from
the fuse panel, the warning chime,
audio, clock and interior lamps, etc.,
will not operate. Some items must be
reset after replacement. Refer to
“Battery” in this section.
• Even when the memory fuse is pulled
up, the battery can still be discharged
by operation of the headlights or other
electrical devices.
G210200AEN
Engine compartment fuse
replacement
1.Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2.Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling up.
OEN076023
OEN076024
OEN076025N
Maintenance
467
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown. To remove or insert the fuse,
use the fuse puller in the engine com-
partment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
G210201AEN
Main fuse
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the nuts shown in the picture
above.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one of the
same rating.
4.Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the main fuse is blown, consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
After checking the fuse panel in the
engine compartment, securely
install the fuse panel cover. If not,
electrical failures may occur from
water contact.
OEN076026N
747
Maintenance
✽✽
NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your vehi-
cle. It is accurate at the time of printing.
When you inspect the fuse panel in your
vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.
Instrument panel fuse panel
Engine compartment fuse panel
OEN076027/OEN076028/OEN076029N
G210300AEN-EU
Fuse/relay panel description
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.
Maintenance
487
Instrument panel fuse panel
Description Fuse rating Protected component
AUDIO-2 10A Audio, Console & rear power outlet relay, Digital clock, BCM, PIC immobilizer module,
ATM key lock control module, RSE module
C/LIGHTER 20A Front cigarette lighter & Power outlet
A/BAG 2 10A Driver seat belt buckle switch, Weight classification module, Telltale lamp
A/BAG 1 15A SRS control module
A/BAG IND 10A Instrument cluster (Air bag indicator lamp)
B/UP LP 10A Back-up lamp relay, TCM, Electro chromic mirror, Back warning control module, Rear combi lamp LH/RH
CRUISE 10A Multifunction switch (Cruise remocon switch), PIC immobilizer module, Driver/Passenger seat warmer switch
ATM CONT 10A ATM key lock control module, AWD ECM, BCM, Multifunction switch,
Semi active engine mounting control module
CLUSTER 10A Instrument cluster, Generator, BCM, Semi active engine mounting control module, PIC immobilizer module,
Tire pressure monitoring module
START 10A Burglar alarm relay, Power tailgate control module
EPS 10A BCM, Rheostat, Power window main switch, Front power window switch RH, AC inverter module
A/CON 10A Front/Rear A/C control module, Blower relay, Rear A/C relay, Rain sensor, Sunroof control module,
Electro chromic mirror
FR S/HTD 15A Driver/Passenger Seat warmer switch
RR S/HTD 15A -
IMS 10A IMS control module, Tilt & Telescopic module, AC inverter switch, Power tailgate control module
H/LP, AQS 10A AQS sensor
FR/WASHER 15A Front wiper relay, Front washer relay
RR/WIPER 15A Rear wiper control module, Rear wiper motor
TAIL LH 10A Head lamp LH, Rear combi lamp LH, Front fog lamp relay, Tailgate handle switch & license lamp
TAIL RH 10A Head lamp RH, Rear combi lamp RH, Glove box lamp, Illuminations, Tailgate handle switch & license lamp,
Trailer lamp connector
749
Maintenance
Description Fuse rating Protected component
DR LOCK 20A Power window main switch, Power tailgate relay, Tailgate lock actuator relay
STOP LP 15A Stop lamp switch
ADJ-PEDAL 15A Adjustable pedal relay
H/LP WASHER 20A -
FUEL LID 15A Fuel filler lid switch
RR FOG 15A -
FR WIPER 30A Front wiper motor
TILT & TELE 15A Tilt & Telescopic module
DRL 15A DRL relay
P/WDW LH 25A Driver safety window ECM, Rear power window switch LH
P/WDW RH 25A Front/Rear power window switch RH
MIRR HTD 10A Power outside mirror motor & defogger LH/RH, Front A/C control module (Defogger switch)
P/SEAT 30A IMS control module, Driver/Passenger seat manual switch, Front lumbar support switch
KEY SOL 10A AWD ECM, Back warning buzzer, PIC mechanical steering column lock, Key solenoid,
Weight classification module, Rear initiator LH/RH
DEICER 15A Windshield defogger relay
S/ROOF 15A Sunroof control module
RSE, SMART KEY 10A PIC immobilizer module, RSE module
15A Audio, USA set top box
15A Instrument cluster, Power window main switch, Door lamp, Room lamp, Data link connector, BCM,
Door warning switch, IMS control module, Front/Rear A/C control module, Foot lamp, Map lamp,
Electro chromic mirror
AUDIO 1
(MEMORY FUSE)
ROOM LP
(MEMORY FUSE)
Maintenance
507
Engine compartment main fuse panel
Description Fuse rating Protected component
IGN 1 40A Ignition switch(ACC, IG1)
IGN 2 40A Start relay, Ignition switch(IG2, START)
I/P B+1 50A Fuse(DR LOCK 20A, STOP LP 15A, TAIL LH/RH 10A, ADJ-PEDAL 15A)
I/P B+2 50A Fuse(P/SEAT 30A, KEY SOL 10A, S/ROOF 15A, RSE/SMART KEY 10A, DEICER 15A),
Memory fuse (AUDIO1 15A, ROOM LP 15A)
P/WDW 40A Fuse(P/WDW LH/RH 25A)
BLOWER 40A Blower relay
RR HTD 40A Rear defogger relay, Fuse(MIRR HTD 10A)
ECU 30A Engine control relay, Fuse(IGN COIL 20A, ECU2 10A, SNSR1 15A, SNSR2 15A, SNSR3 10A)
ABS 1 40A ABS/ESC control module, Multipurpose check connector
ABS 2 40A ABS/ESC control module, Multipurpose check connector
TCU 1 15A TCM
TPMS 10A Tire pressure monitoring module, Semi active engine mounting solenoid, Front initiator LH/RH
B/ALARM 10A -
F/PUMP 20A Fuel pump relay
T/SIG 15A BCM (Hazard lamp), Head lamp (High/Low) relay
A/CON 10A A/C relay
ECU 1 10A ECM
ECU DSL, IGN COIL 20A Ignition coil #1~#6, Condenser
SNSR 1 15A ECM, Mass air flow sensor, Oil control valve, Immobilizer module, PCSV, VIV, CCV
SNSR 2 15A Fuel pump relay, Oxygen sensor #1~#4
SNSR 3 10A Injector #1~#6, Condenser fan relay, Radiator fan relay, A/C relay
ECU 2 10A ECM
751
Maintenance
Description Fuse rating Protected component
H/LP LO RH 15A Head lamp(Low) relay RH
H/LP LO LH 15A Head lamp(Low) relay LH
H/LP HI 20A Head lamp(High) relay
FR FOG 15A Front fog lamp relay
HORN 15A Horn relay
ABS 10A ABS/ESC control module, ESC switch
DIAG 10A Multipurpose check connector
ECU 3 10A ECM
TCU 2/GLOW 10A TCM, Stop lamp switch
Engine compartment sub fuse panel
Description Fuse rating Protected component
I/P BOX B+3 40A Fuse( RR FOG 15A, FUEL LID 15A, FR WIPER 30A, TILT & TELE 15A)
C/FAN 40A Condenser fan relay #1
R/FAN 40A Radiator fan relay
P T/GATE 30A Power tail gate control module
RR BLOWER 20A Rear A/C relay
AMP 30A JBL amp
P/OUTLET 30A Console & rear power outlet relay
AC INVERTER 30A AC inverter (110V)
TRAILER 30A Trailer
Maintenance
527
LIGHT BULBS
G220000AEN
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
✽✽
NOTICE
After heavy, driving rain or washing,
headlight and taillight lenses could
appear frosty. This condition is caused by
the temperature difference between the
lamp inside and outside. This is similar
to the condensation on your windows
inside your vehicle during the rain and
doesn’t indicate a problem with your
vehicle. If the water leaks into the lamp
bulb circuitry, have the vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
G220100AUN
Headlight, position light, turn sig-
nal light, side marker light and
front fog light bulb replacement
(1) Headlight (High)
(2) Headlight (Low)
(3) Position light
(4) Front turn signal light
(5) Front side marker light
(6) Front fog light (if equipped)
WARNING - Working on
the lights
Prior to working on the light, firmly
apply the parking brake, ensure
that the ignition switch is turned to
the LOCK position and turn off the
lights to avoid sudden movement
of the vehicle and burning your fin-
gers or receiving an electric shock.
CAUTION
Be sure to replace the burned-out
bulb with one of the same wattage
rating. Otherwise, it may cause
damage to the fuse or electric
wiring system.
CAUTION
If you don’t have necessary tools,
the correct bulbs and the expertise,
consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer. In many cases, it is difficult
to replace vehicle light bulbs
because other parts of the vehicle
must be removed before you can
get to the bulb. This is especially
true if you have to remove the head-
light assembly to
get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing
the headlight
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
OEN079030
753
Maintenance
G220101AUN-EU
Headlight bulb
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the headlight bulb cover by
turning it counterclockwise.
3. Disconnect the headlight bulb socket-
connector.
4. Unsnap the headlight bulb retaining
wire by depressing the end and push-
ing it upward. (High beam)
(Continued)
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when chang-
ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool
down before handling it.
OHD076046
WARNING -
Halogen bulbs
• Halogen bulbs contain pressur-
ized gas that will produce flying
pieces of glass if broken.
• Always handle them carefully,
and avoid scratches and abra-
sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid
contact with liquids.
• Never touch the glass with bare
hands. Residual oil may cause
the bulb to overheat and burst
when lit.
(Continued)
OEN076060N
OEN076051N
■ High beam
■ Low beam
Maintenance
547
5. Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly.
6. Install a new headlight bulb and snap
the headlight bulb retaining wire (high
beam) into position by aligning the
wire with the groove on the bulb.
7. Connect the headlight bulb socket-
connector.
8. Install the headlight bulb cover by turn-
ing it clockwise.
G220102AEN-EU
Front turn signal, position, side mark-
er and fog light bulbs (if equipped)
If the light bulb is not operating, have the
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
G220200AEN
Side repeater light bulb replace-
ment
If the light bulb is not operating, have the
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
G220300AEN-EU
Rear combination light bulb
replacement
(1) Tail light
(2) Back-up light
(3) Rear turn signal light
(4) Stop and tail light
(5) Rear side marker light
OEN076031
OEN076032
OEN076033
Type A
Type B
755
Maintenance
Outside light
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Loosen the light assembly retaining
screws with a philips head screwdriver.
3. Remove the rear combination light
assembly from the body of the vehicle.
4. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
7. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
8. Reinstall the light assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
OEN076034
OEN076035
OEN076036
OEN076037
Maintenance
567
Inside light
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the service cover using a flat-
blade screwdriver.
3. Loosen the light assembly retaining
nuts with a wrench.
4. Remove the rear combination light
assembly from the body of the vehicle.
5. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
7. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
8. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
9. Reinstall the light assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
10. Install the service cover by putting it
into the service hole.
OEN076054 OEN076055 OEN076056
757
Maintenance
G220400AEN
High mounted stop light
replacement
1. Remove the tailgate trim
2. Remove the high mounted stop lamp
assembly after removing a cap nut and
bolts, then remove the spoiler.
3. Remove the spoiler lamp cover and
loosening the screw. And then remove
the high mounted stop lamp.
4. Install a new lamp and reinstall in the
reverse order.
G220500AEN
License plate light bulb replace-
ment
1. Loosen the lens retaining screws with
a philips head screwdriver.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the lens securely with the
lens retaining screws.
OEN076039
OEN071101 OEN071100
Maintenance
587
G220900AEN
Puddle lamp and door courtesy
lamp bulb replacement
If the light is not operating, have the vehi-
cle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
OEN076046
Map lamp (2nd row) (if equipped)
OEN076040
Map lamp (1st row)
OEN076042 OEN076044
OEN076043
Luggage lamp (if equipped)
Sunvisor lamp
OEN076041
Room lamp (2nd row)
Room lamp (3rd row)
OEN046189
OEN046188
Puddle lamp
Door courtesy lamp (if equipped)
759
Maintenance
G220600AUN
Interior light bulb replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently
pry the lens from the interior light
housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap the
lens into place.
Exterior care
G230101AUN
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning and
caution statements that appear on the
label.
G230102BUN
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish from
rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly
and frequently at least once a month with
lukewarm or cold water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road driv-
ing, you should wash it after each off-
road trip. Pay special attention to the
removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt,
mud, and other foreign materials. Make
sure the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors and rocker panels are kept
clear and clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar deposits
can damage your vehicle’s finish if not
removed immediately.
CAUTION
Use care not to dirty or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.
APPEARANCE CARE
WARNING
Prior to working on the Interior
Lights, ensure that the “OFF” but-
ton is depressed to avoid burning
your fingers or receiving an electric
shock.
OEN079045
Glove box lamp
Maintenance
607
Even prompt washing with plain water
may not completely remove all these
deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on
painted surfaces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do
not allow soap to dry on the finish.
CAUTION
• Water washing in the engine com-
partment including high pressure
water washing may cause the fail-
ure of electrical circuits located in
the engine compartment.
• Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with electri-
cal/electronic components inside
the vehicle as this may damage
them.
OJB037800
WARNING - Wet brakes
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly while maintaining a slow for-
ward speed.
CAUTION
• Do not use strong soap, chemical
detergents or hot water, and do
not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight or when the body of the
vehicle is warm.
• Be careful when washing the side
windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water, water may leak through the
windows and wet the interior.
• To prevent damage to the plastic
parts and lamps, do not clean
with chemical solvents or strong
detergents.
761
Maintenance
Waxing
A good coat of wax is a barrier between
your paint and contaminate. Keeping a
good coat of wax on your vehicle will help
protect it.
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing. Use a good quality liquid or
paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions.Wax all metal trim to protect
it and to maintain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materials
with a spot remover will usually strip the
wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax
these areas even if the rest of the vehicle
does not yet need waxing.
G230103AUN
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust
and may develop into a major repair
expense.
✽✽
NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and requires
any metal repair or replacement, be sure
the body shop applies anti-corrosion
materials to the parts repaired or
replaced.
G230104AUN
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects, use a
tar remover, not a scraper or other
sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal
parts from corrosion, apply a coating of
wax or chrome preservative and rub to
a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts with
a heavier coating of wax or preserva-
tive. If necessary, coat the parts with
non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other
protective compound.
G230105AUN
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may col-
lect on the underbody. If these materials
are not removed, accelerated rusting can
occur on underbody parts such as the
fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust
system, even though they have been
treated with rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody
and wheel openings with lukewarm or
cold water once a month, after off-road
driving and at the end of each winter. Pay
special attention to these areas because it
is difficult to see all the mud and dirt.It will
do more harm than good to wet down the
road grime without removing it.The lower
edges of doors, rocker panels, and frame
members have drain holes that should not
be allowed to clog with dirt; trapped water
in these areas can cause rusting.
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly while maintaining a slow for-
ward speed.
CAUTION
• Wiping dust or dirt off the body
with a dry cloth will scratch the
finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or
caustic agents on chrome-plated
or anodized aluminum parts. This
may result in damage to the pro-
tective coating and cause discol-
oration or paint deterioration.
Maintenance
627
G230106AUN
Aluminum or chrome wheel mainte-
nance
The aluminum or chrome wheels are
coated with a clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol-
ishing compound, solvent, or wire
brushes on aluminum or chrome
wheels. They may scratch or damage
the finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral deter-
gent, and rinse thoroughly with water.
Also, be sure to clean the wheels after
driving on salted roads.This helps pre-
vent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with high-
speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any acid detergent. It may
damage and corrode the aluminum or
chrome wheels coated with a clear
protective finish.
G230107AUN
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion
By using the most advanced design and
construction practices to combat corro-
sion, we produces cars of the highest
quality. However, this is only part of the
job. To achieve the long-term corrosion
resistance your vehicle can deliver, the
owner's cooperation and assistance is
also required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion
on your car are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath the
car.
• Removal of paint or protective coatings
by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor
scrapes and dents which leave unpro-
tected metal exposed to corrosion.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your car is
regularly exposed to corrosive materials,
corrosion protection is particularly impor-
tant. Some of the common causes of
accelerated corrosion are road salts,
dust control chemicals, ocean air and
industrial pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in which
corrosion is most likely to occur. For
example, corrosion is accelerated by
high humidity, particularly when tempera-
tures are just above freezing. In such
conditions, the corrosive material is kept
in contact with the car surfaces by mois-
ture that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive because it is
slow to dry and holds moisture in contact
with the vehicle. Although the mud
appears to be dry, it can still retain the
moisture and promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also accelerate
corrosion of parts that are not properly
ventilated so the moisture can be dis-
persed. For all these reasons, it is par-
ticularly important to keep your car clean
and free of mud or accumulations of
other materials. This applies not only to
the visible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the car.
763
Maintenance
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from get-
ting started by observing the following:
Keep your car clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is to
keep your car clean and free of corrosive
materials. Attention to the underside of
the car is particularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area —
where road salts are used, near the
ocean, areas with industrial pollution,
acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra
care to prevent corrosion. In winter,
hose off the underside of your car at
least once a month and be sure to
clean the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
• When cleaning underneath the car,
give particular attention to the compo-
nents under the fenders and other
areas that are hidden from view. Do a
thorough job;just dampening the accu-
mulated mud rather than washing it
away will accelerate corrosion rather
than prevent it.Water under high pres-
sure and steam are particularly effec-
tive in removing accumulated mud and
corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members, be
sure that drain holes are kept open so
that moisture can escape and not be
trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your car in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. This creates a favor-
able environment for corrosion. This is
particularly true if you wash your car in
the garage or drive it into the garage
when it is still wet or covered with snow,
ice or mud. Even a heated garage can
contribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish should be
covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as
possible to reduce the possibility of cor-
rosion. If bare metal is showing through,
the attention of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are high-
ly corrosive and may damage painted
surfaces in just a few hours. Always
remove bird droppings as soon as possi-
ble.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor mats
and carpeting to cause corrosion. Check
under the mats periodically to be sure
the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if
you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or
chemicals in the car.
These should be carried only in proper
containers and any spills or leaks should
be cleaned up, flushed with clean water
and thoroughly dried.
Maintenance
647
Interior care
G230201AUN
Interior general precautions
Prevent caustic solutions such as per-
fume and cosmetic oil from contacting
the dashboard because they may cause
damage or discoloration. If they do con-
tact the dashboard, wipe them off imme-
diately.See the instructions that follow for
the proper way to clean vinyl.
G230202AUN
Cleaning the upholstery and interior
trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean with a mild soap solution recom-
mended for upholstery or carpets.
Remove fresh spots immediately with a
fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not
receive immediate attention, the fabric
can be stained and its color can be
affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties
can be reduced if the material is not
properly maintained.
G230203AUN
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt web-
bing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for cleaning
upholstery or carpet. Follow the instruc-
tions provided with the soap. Do not
bleach or re-dye the webbing because
this may weaken it.
G230204AUN
Cleaning the interior window glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi-
cle become fogged (that is, covered with
an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should
be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the
directions on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION
Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with
electrical/electronic components
inside the vehicle as this may dam-
age them.
CAUTION
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fire-
resistant properties.
CAUTION
Do not scrape or scratch the inside
of the rear window. This may result
in damage to the rear window
defroster grid.
CAUTION
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alcohol
content solutions. If you use high
alcohol content solutions or
acid/alkaline detergents, the color
of the leather may fade or the sur-
face may get stripped off.
765
Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
G270000AEN-EU
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty infor-
mation contained in the Owner’s
Handbook & Warranty Information book-
let in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an emis-
sion control system to meet all applicable
emission regulations.
There are three emission control sys-
tems, as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function of
the emission control systems, it is rec-
ommended that you have your car
inspected and maintained by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer in accordance with
the maintenance schedule in this manu-
al.
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from misfir-
ing during dynamometer testing,
turn the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system off by pressing the
ESC switch.
• After dynamometer testing is com-
pleted, turn the ESC system back on
by pressing the ESC switch again.
G270100AUN
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation sys-
tem is employed to prevent air pollution
caused by blow-by gases being emitted
from the crankcase.This system supplies
fresh filtered air to the crankcase through
the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,
which then pass through the PCV valve
into the induction system.
G270200AUN
2. Evaporative emission control
(including ORVR: Onboard
Refueling Vapor Recovery)
system
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmos-
phere.
(The ORVR system is designed to allow
the vapors from the fuel tank to be
loaded into a canister while refueling at
the gas station, preventing the escape of
fuel vapors into the atmosphere.)
Maintenance
667
G270201AUN
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the
canister are drawn into the surge tank
through the purge control solenoid valve.
G270202AUN
Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is con-
trolled by the Engine Control Module
(ECM); when the engine coolant temper-
ature is low during idling, the PCSV clos-
es so that evaporated fuel is not taken
into the engine. After the engine warms-
up during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the
engine.
G270300AUN
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control System is
a highly effective system which controls
exhaust emissions while maintaining
good vehicle performance.
G270301AUN
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could affect
its performance, safety or durability and
may even violate governmental safety
and emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modification
may not be covered under warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage, bat-
tery discharge and fire.For your safety,
do not use unauthorized electronic
device.
G270302AUN-EU
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present with
other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you
smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside
your vehicle, have it inspected and
repaired immediately. If you ever sus-
pect exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all the
windows fully open. Have your vehicle
checked and repaired immediately.
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain car-
bon monoxide (CO). Though color-
less and odorless, it is dangerous
and could be lethal if inhaled.
Follow the instructions on this
page to avoid CO poisoning.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSI-
TION 65 WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide variety
of automobile components and
parts, including components found
in the interior furnishings in a vehi-
cle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and
reproductive harm. In addition, cer-
tain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component
wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm.
767
Maintenance
• Do not operate the engine in confined
or closed areas (such as garages) any
more than what is necessary to move
the vehicle in or out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short time
with the engine running, adjust the
ventilation system (as needed) to draw
outside air into the vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi-
cle for any extended time with the
engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to start,
excessive attempts to restart the
engine may cause damage to the
emission control system.
G270303BEN
Operating precautions for catalytic
converters (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic
converter emission control device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gaso-
line engines.
• Do not operate the vehicle when there
are signs of engine malfunction, such
as misfire or a noticeable loss of per-
formance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.
Examples of misuse are coasting with
the ignition off and descending steep
grades in gear with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high idle
speed for extended periods (5 minutes
or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any part
of the engine or emission control sys-
tem. All inspections and adjustments
must be made by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Avoid driving with a very low fuel level.If
you run out of gasoline, it could cause
the engine to misfire and result in exces-
sive loading of the catalytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalytic
converter and to your vehicle.Additionally,
such actions could void your warranties.
WARNING - Fire
• A hot exhaust system can ignite
flammable items under your vehi-
cle. Do not park, idle, or drive the
vehicle over or near flammable
objects, such as grass, vegeta-
tion, paper, leaves, etc.
• The exhaust system and catalytic
system are very hot while the
engine is running or immediately
after the engine is turned off.Keep
away from the exhaust system
and catalytic, you may get burned.
Also, do not remove the heat sink
around the exhaust system, do
not seal the bottom of the vehicle
or do not coat the vehicle for cor-
rosion control. It may present a
fire risk under certain conditions.
Maintenance
687
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE
G280000AEN
Perchlorate Material-special handling
may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/haz-
ardouswaste/perchlorate.
Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:
Perchlorate containing materials, such as
air bag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners
and keyless remote entry batteries, must
be disposed of according to Title 22
California Code of Regulations Section
67384.10 (a).
8
Dimensions / 8-2
Bulb wattage / 8-2
Tires and wheels / 8-3
Recommended lubricants and capacities / 8-4
Vehicle identification number (VIN) / 8-6
Vehicle certification label / 8-6
Tire specification and pressure label / 8-6
Engine number / 8-7
Consumer information / 8-8
Reporting safety defects / 8-9
Binding arbitration / 8-9
Specifications, Consumer information,
Reporting safety defects
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
28
Item in (mm)
Overall length 190.6 (4840)
Overall width 76.6 (1945)
Overall height 68.9 (1750) / 71.1 (1807)*
1
Front tread 65.7 (1668)
Rear tread 65.8 (1671)
Wheelbase 110.4 (2805)
DIMENSIONS
Light Bulb Wattage
Headlights (Low) 55
Headlights (High) 55
Front turn signal lights 28/8
Position lights 5
Side repeater lights LED
Front side marker lights 5
Front fog lights* 55
Stop and tail lights 28/8 or LED
Tail light* 28/8
Rear turn signal lights 27
Back-up lights 16
Rear side marker lights* LED
High mounted stop light LED
License plate lights 5
Map lamps 10
Room lamps 10
Luggage lamp* 10
Glove box lamp 5
Vanity mirror lamps 5
Puddle lamps 5
Door courtesy lamps* 15 or LED
BULB WATTAGE
* : If equipped
*
1
: with roof rack
I010000AEN-EE I030000AEN-EU
83
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
TIRES AND WHEELS
I020000AEN-EU
Front Rear
P245/65R17 7.0J×17 210 210
P245/60R18 7.0J×18 (30) (30)
420 420
T165/90R17 4.0T×17
(60) (60)
Full size tire
Compact spare tire
Wheel lug nut torque
lb•ft (kgf•m, N•m)
65~79
(9~11 , 88~107)
Item
Tire
size
Wheel size
Inflation pressure
kPa (psi)
✽✽
NOTICE
It is permissible to add 3psi to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are expected soon. Tires typically
loose 1psi for every 12°F temperature drop. If extreme temperature variations are expected, re-check your tire pressure as nec-
essary to keep them properly inflated.
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
48
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
I040000AEN-EU
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct
lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
*
1
Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*
2
Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing
the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s
time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*
3
If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.
Lubricant Volume Classification
5.49 US qt. (5.2 l)
Automatic transaxle fluid 7.40 US qt. (7.0 l)
Power steering 0.95 US qt. (0.9 l) PSF-3
Mixture of antifreeze and water (Ethylene glycol
Coolant 11.10 US qt. (10.5 l)
base coolant for aluminum radiator)
Brake fluid 0.7~0.8 US qt. (0.7~0.8 l) FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Rear axle oil (AWD) 0.95 US qt. (0.9 l)
Hypoid gear oil
API Service GL-5 SAE 75W/90
Transfer case oil (AWD) 0.85 US qt. (0.8 l)
(SHELL SPIRAX X or equivalent)
Fuel 20.6 US gal. (78 l)-
Engine oil *
1
*
2
(drain and refill)
Recommends
API Service SM or above
*3
,
ILSAC GF-4 or above
TFF ATF T-IV JWS 3309, Mobil ATF 3309, 3309
US ATF or other brands meeting the JWS 3309
specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co.
85
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
I040100AUN-EU
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an
effect on fuel economy and cold weather
operating (engine start and engine oil
flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils
can provide better fuel economy and cold
weather performance, however, higher
viscosity engine oils are required for sat-
isfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using
oils of any viscosity other than those rec-
ommended could result in engine dam-
age.
When choosing an oil, consider the range
of temperature your vehicle will be oper-
ated in before the next oil change.
Proceed to select the recommended oil
viscosity from the chart.
CAUTION
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain plug, or
dipstick before checking or drain-
ing any lubricant.This is especially
important in dusty or sandy areas
and when the vehicle is used on
unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine
and other mechanisms that could
be damaged.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
Gasoline
Engine Oil *
1
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30
1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of
a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4). However, if
the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper
engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
68
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER (VIN)
H010000AEN
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
the number used in registering your car
and in all legal matters pertaining to its
ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the engine
compartment bulkhead.
The VIN is also on a plate attached to the
top of the dashboard.The number on the
plate can easily be seen through the
windshield from outside.
H020000AUN-EU
The vehicle certification label attached
on the driver’s side center pillar gives the
vehicle identification number (VIN).
OEN086002
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
OEN086004N
OEN086001N
Frame number VIN label
87
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
H030000AUN
The tires supplied on your new vehicle
are chosen to provide the best perform-
ance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's side
center pillar gives the tire pressures rec-
ommended for your car.
H04000AUN
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown in the drawing.
OEN086003
OEN088005
ENGINE NUMBER
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
88
H050000AEN
This consumer information has been pre-
pared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration of the U.S.
Department of Transportation. Your
Hyundai dealer will help answer any
questions you may have as you read this
information.
Hyundai motor vehicles are designed
and manufactured to meet or exceed all
applicable safety standards.
For your safety, however, we strongly
urge you to read and follow all directions
in this Owner's Manual, particularly the
information under the headings
"NOTICE", "CAUTION" and "WARN-
ING".
If, after reading this manual, you have
any questions regarding the operation of
your vehicle, please contact your nearest
Hyundai Motor America Regional Office
as listed in the following:
Eastern Region: Connecticut, Delaware,
Maine, Massachusetts, New Hampshire,
New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvania,
Rhode Island, Vermont.
Eastern Region
1100 Cranbury South River Road
Jamesburg, NJ 08831
(800) 633-5151
Southern Region: Florida, Georgia,
Maryland, North Carolina, South
Carolina, Virginia, West Virginia.
Southern Region
270 Riverside Parkway, Suite A
Austell, GA 30168
(800) 633-5151
South Central Region: Alabama,
Arkansas, Louisiana, Mississippi, New
Mexico, Oklahoma, Tennessee, Texas.
South Central Region
1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400
Coppell, TX 75019
(800) 633-5151
Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, lowa,
Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota,
Nebraska, North Dakota, South Dakota,
Ohio, Wisconsin, Kansas, Missouri.
Central Region
1705 Sequoia Drive
Aurora, Illinois 60506
(800) 633-5151
Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii,
Arizona, California, Colorado, ldaho,
Montana, Nevada, Oregon, Utah,
Washington, Wyoming.
Western Region
10550 Talbert Avenue
P.O.Box 20850
Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850
(800) 633-5151
CONSUMER INFORMATION
89
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
H070000AEN
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying HYUNDAI MOTOR
AMERICA. If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or
HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building Washington,
DC 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
H090000AEN
Any claim or dispute you may have relat-
ed to your vehicle's warranty or the duties
contemplated under the warranty, includ-
ing claims related to the refund or partial
refund of your vehicle's purchase price
(excluding personal injury or product lia-
bility claims), shall be resolved by binding
arbitration. Binding arbitration shall be
administered by and through the
American Arbitration Association (AAA).
You will not be responsible for paying fil-
ing and hearing fees above $275.00. All
other arbitration costs shall be borne by
Hyundai Motor America. You are not
responsible to pay any of the costs
Hyundai incurs.
This Binding Arbitration Agreement shall
not deprive you of any remedies avail-
able to you under applicable law. The
parties are waiving their right to seek
remedies in court, including the right to a
jury trial.
This Binding Arbitration Agreement shall
be governed by and interpreted under
the Federal Arbitration Act, 9 U.S.C. sec-
tions 1-16. Judgment upon any award
may be entered in any court having juris-
diction.
You may revoke this Arbitration
Agreement by (1) written notice or (2)
electronic notice. Written notice must be
delivered (via certified mail) to Hyundai
Motor America, Attn: Consumer Affairs,
10550 Talbert Avenue, P.O. Box 20849,
Fountain Valley, CA 92728-0849.
Electronic notice must be submitted at
the following website address: http://war-
ranty-arbitration.hyundaiUSA.com.
Notice must be received within 90 days
after you purchase your vehicle.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
BINDING ARBITRATION (U.S.A ONLY)
I
Index
Index
2
I
Air bags-advanced supplemental restraint system ········3-41
Air bag warning label··················································3-66
Air bag warning light ··················································3-44
Curtain air bag·····························································3-58
Driver's and passenger's front air bag··························3-52
Occupant classification system ···································3-47
Side impact air bag······················································3-56
Air cleaner ·····································································7-21
All wheel drive (AWD)··················································5-14
Appearance care·····························································7-59
Exterior care ································································7-59
Interior care ·································································7-64
Audio system·······························································4-120
Antenna······································································4-120
Steering wheel audio control·····································4-121
Automatic climate control system·································4-96
Air conditioning ························································4-102
Automatic heating and air conditioning······················4-97
Manual heating and air conditioning···························4-98
Rear heating and air conditioning·····························4-103
Automatic transaxle·························································5-8
Ignition key interlock system······································5-12
Shift lock system·························································5-12
Sports mode·································································5-11
Battery············································································7-27
Before driving··································································5-3
Brake system··································································5-21
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)····································5-24
Electronic stability control (ESC)·······························5-26
Parking brake·······························································5-22
Power brakes································································5-21
Brakes fluid····································································7-18
Bulb wattage····································································8-2
California Perchlorate Notice ······································· 7-68
Child restraint system····················································3-33
Placing a passenger seat belt into
the auto lock mode···················································3-36
Securing a child restraint seat with
tether anchor system·················································3-38
Securing a child restraint seat with
child seat lower anchor system································3-39
Climate control air filter················································7-22
Consumer information·····················································8-8
Cruise control system ····················································5-31
Defroster ········································································4-83
Dimensions ······································································8-2
Door locks······································································4-14
A B
C
D
I
3
Index
Central door lock switch ·············································4-16
Child-protector rear door lock·····································4-18
Driver position memory system·····································4-36
Economical operation····················································5-35
Emergency starting ··························································6-4
Jump starting ·································································6-4
Push starting ··································································6-5
Emission control system················································7-65
Crankcase emission control system·····························7-65
Evaporative emission control (including ORVR:
Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery) System ·············7-65
Exhaust emission control system ································7-66
Engine compartment ················································2-4, 7-2
Engine coolant·······························································7-15
Engine number·································································8-7
Engine oil·······································································7-14
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ···············7-11
Exterior features···························································4-119
Roof rack···································································4-119
Fuel filler door·······························································4-30
Emergency fuel filer door release ·······························4-32
Fuel requirements ····························································1-3
Fuses ··············································································7-43
Fuse/relay panel description········································7-47
Main fuse·····································································7-46
Memory fuse································································7-45
Hazard warning flasher··················································4-69
Hood···············································································4-29
How to use this manual ···················································1-2
If the engine overheats·····················································6-6
If the engine will not start ···············································6-3
If you have a flat tire ·····················································6-12
Changing tires······························································6-14
Compact spare tire·······················································6-19
Jack and tools ······························································6-12
Removing and storing the spare tire····························6-13
In case of an emergency while driving····························6-2
Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster ···················1-7
Instrument cluster ··························································4-51
Engine temperature gauge···········································4-53
Fuel gauge ···································································4-54
Instrument panel illumination ·····································4-52
Odometer/Tripmeter ····················································4-54
Speedometer ································································4-52
Tachometer ··································································4-52
Trip computer ······························································4-55
Warning and indicators················································4-58
Instrument panel overview···············································2-3
E
F
H
I
Index
4
I
Interior features····························································4-112
AC inverter ································································4-115
Ashtray ······································································4-112
Cigarette lighter·························································4-112
Clothes hanger···························································4-118
Cup holder·································································4-113
Digital clock ······························································4-117
Luggage net (holder)·················································4-119
Outside thermometer·················································4-117
Power outlet·······························································4-114
Shopping bag holder··················································4-118
Sunvisor·····································································4-114
Interior light···································································4-78
Interior overview······························································2-2
Key positions ···································································5-4
Illuminated ignition switch············································5-4
Keys ·················································································4-3
Light bulbs·····································································7-52
Headlight, position light, turn signal light, side
marker light and front fog light bulb replacement·······7-52
High mounted stop light replacement·························7-57
Interior light bulb replacement····································7-58
License plate light bulb replacement···························7-57
Puddle lamp and door courtesy lamp bulb
replacement··································································7-57
Rear combination light bulb replacement···················7-54
Side repeater light bulb replacement···························7-54
Lighting··········································································4-70
Battery saver function··················································4-70
Headlight escort function ············································4-70
Rescue mode function·················································4-70
Maintenance services·······················································7-3
Manual climate control system······································4-84
Air conditioning ··························································4-89
Climate control air filter··············································4-95
Cool box ······································································4-92
Heating and air conditioning·······································4-85
Rear heating and air conditioning·······························4-90
Mirrors···········································································4-41
Conversation mirror·····················································4-48
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with compass and
HomeLink
®
system······················································4-42
Inside rearview mirror·················································4-41
Outside rearview mirror ··············································4-48
Owner maintenance·························································7-4
K
L
M
O
I
5
Index
Parking brake·································································7-20
Power adjustable pedals·················································4-38
Power steering fluid·······················································7-19
Rear parking assist system·············································4-67
Rear seat entertainment system (RSE)························4-153
Recommended lubricants and capacities·························8-4
Recommended SAE viscosity number··························8-5
Remote keyless entry·······················································4-8
Reporting safety defects ··················································8-9
Road warning···································································6-2
Scheduled maintenance service·······································7-6
Normal maintenance schedule·······································7-7
Maintenance under severe usage conditions···············7-10
Seat belts········································································3-21
Pre-tensioner seat belt ·················································3-27
Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system with
emergency locking retractor·····································3-23
Seat belts - Front passenger and rear seat
3-point system with combination locking retractor··3-24
Seat belt warning·························································3-23
Seats·················································································3-2
Armrest········································································3-13
Headrest································································3-5, 3-12
Folding the rear seat····················································3-16
Front seat adjustment - manual·····································3-4
Front seat adjustment - power·······································3-9
Lumbar support····················································3-7, 3-11
Rear seat adjustment····················································3-11
Seatback pocket·····························································3-9
Seat warmer···································································3-7
Walk-in seat·································································3-16
Special driving conditions·············································5-37
Driving at night ···························································5-38
Driving in flooded areas··············································5-39
Driving in the rain·······················································5-39
Hazardous driving conditions······································5-37
Highway driving··························································5-40
Reducing the risk of a rollover····································5-41
Rocking the vehicle·····················································5-37
Smooth cornering ························································5-38
Starting the engine···························································5-6
Steering wheel ·······························································4-39
Easy access function····················································4-40
Horn·············································································4-41
Power steering·····························································4-39
Tilt steering··································································4-39
Storage compartment···················································4-109
Center console storage···············································4-109
Glove box ··································································4-109
Multi box···································································4-110
P
R
S
Index
6
I
Luggage box······························································4-111
Sunglass holder··························································4-110
Sunroof···········································································4-33
Tailgate···········································································4-18
Emergency tailgate safety release ·······························4-19
Power ON/OFF button ················································4-22
Power tailgate······························································4-20
Theft-alarm system························································4-12
Tires pressure monitoring system (TPMS)······················6-7
Changing a tire with TPMS·········································6-10
Low tire pressure position telltale·································6-8
Low tire pressure telltale···············································6-8
TPMS (Tire pressure monitoring system)
malfunction indicator·················································6-9
Tire specification and pressure label ·······························8-6
Tires and wheels·····················································7-30, 8-3
All season tires ····························································7-41
Checking tire inflation pressure ··································7-31
Compact spare tire replacement··································7-35
Radial-ply tires ····························································7-42
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures················7-30
Snow tires····································································7-41
Summer tires································································7-41
Tire care·······································································7-30
Tire chains ···································································7-42
Tire maintenance ·························································7-35
Tire replacement··························································7-34
Tire rotation·································································7-32
Tire sidewall labeling ··················································7-36
Tire terminology and definitions·································7-39
Tire traction ·································································7-35
Wheel alignment and tire balance·······························7-33
Wheel replacement······················································7-35
Towing ···········································································6-21
Emergency towing·······················································6-23
Removable towing hook (rear)····································6-22
Tie-down hook (for flatbed towing)····························6-25
Trailer towing·································································5-46
Hitches·········································································5-47
Safety chains································································5-47
Trailer brakes·······························································5-47
Trailer connector··························································5-53
Weight of the trailer (tongue)······································5-52
Vehicle break-in process··················································1-5
Vehicle certification label················································8-6
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders·············1-6
Vehicle identification number (VIN)·······························8-6
Vehicle load limit···························································5-54
Cargo capacity·····························································5-54
Certification label························································5-56
Seating capacity···························································5-54
Tire and loading information label······························5-54
T
V
I
7
Index
Towing capacity···························································5-54
Vehicle capacity weight···············································5-54
Vehicle weight ·······························································5-58
Base curb weight·························································5-58
Cargo weight ·······························································5-58
GAW (Gross axle weight)···········································5-58
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)······························5-58
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)······································5-58
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)·························5-58
Washer fluid···································································7-20
Windows ········································································4-25
Auto up/down window················································4-26
Power window lock button··········································4-28
Windshield defrosting and defogging··························4-106
Defogging logic·························································4-108
Winter driving································································5-42
Snow tires····································································5-42
Tire chains ···································································5-43
Wiper blades ··································································7-24
Wipers and washers·······················································4-74
W
Please consult your Owner's Handbook & Warranty Information booklet for your vehicle's spe-
cific warranty coverage.
The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 7. As the owner, it is your
responsibility to see that all maintenance operations specified by the manufacturer are carried out at
the appropriate intervals.When the vehicle is used in severe driving conditions, more frequent main-
tenance is required for some operations. Maintenance requirements for severe operating conditions
are also included in Section 7.
WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAI VEHICLE
RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE
This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the next owner.
OWNER'S INFORMATION
ORIGINAL OWNER _____________________________________________________
ADDRESS
CITY _________________ STATE ___________ ZIP CODE _____________________
DELIVERY DATE
(Date Sold to Original Retail Purchaser)
DEALER NAME _______________ DEALER NO. _____________________________
ADDRESS ____________________________________________________________
CITY _________________ STATE ___________ ZIP CODE _____________________
